n A Nj) r; o o x ^4*rt <^>i(a^ (^rW <^'Vx( (^'t^ (^^t^l^ '5^%^ WEALE'S ETJDIMENTARY SCIENTIFIC AND EDUCATIONAL SERIES. The following are the Works already 'published in PHYSICAL SCIENCE, NATURAL PHILO- SOPHY, &c. (The Volumes are bomd in litnp cloth, except where otherwise stated.) m iT^ CHEMISTRY, for the Use of Beginners. By Professor ^ ' Xfc{- George Fownes, F.R.S. With an Appendix on the Applica- j^'^ M*rft tion of Chemiatrv in A D-rimilfn>«o lo if'. i TOMB nates and 300 Woodcuts. 6s. 6d. ; cloth boards, 7s. 6d. "A storehouse of [conchologieal and geological information."— i5ardu;icfc«*« Science Gossip, ANIMAL PHYSICS, Handbook of. By Dionysius Lardneb, D.C.L. "Witli 520 Illustrations. In One Vol. (732 pages), 7s. 6d., cloth boards. *,* Sold also in Two Paris, as follows: — Chapters I.— VII. 4s. Chapters VIII.— XVIH. 38. CROSBY LOCKWOOD & SON, 7, STATIONERS' HALL COURT, E.C. THE SILVERSMITH'S HANDBOOK CONTAINING FULL INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ALLOYING AND WORKING OF SILVER INCLUDING THE DIFFERENT MODES OF REFINING AND MELTING THE METAL ; ITS SOLDERS ; THE PREPARATION OF IMITATION ALLOYS ; METHODS OF MANIPULATION ; PREVENTION OF WASTE ; INSTRUCTIONS FOR IMPROVING AND FINISHING THE SURFACE OF THE V^ORK ; TOGETHER WITH OTHER USEFUL INFORMATION AND MEMORANDA O^LDSMITH AND SILVERSMITH AUTHOR OF **TB)E; GO.^DSMVTH's .H^NJ>BQQK," THF, ^l^AI i- MARKING OF SECOND EDITION, REVISED r) LONDON CROSBY LOCKWOOD & CO. 7, STATIONERS' HALL COURT, LUDGATE HILL 1885 CITY BOAD. » i'itL C-^ lis , INSinTi;TL PREFACE. The object of this Treatise is to supply a want long felt in the Silver Trade, namely, a work of reference from which workmen, apprentices, and manufacturers, employing the material upon which it treats, may find information which will be of assistance to them in the performance of their daily duties, and by which their operations may be rendered more successful. The Author was led to undertake the present work from having had many opportunities, during his lengthened experi- ence in the art of silver-working, of observing the difficulties and stumbling-blocks that are constantly to be met with in the manifold branches of this important trade, by those practically engaged in it, and also by those persons who are desirous of ac- quiring a thorough knowledge of the mechanical and manipulative details belonging to it. To assist his object, numerous illustrations have been prepared for this Treatise, with the view of rendering the various processes of the art more readily com- prehensible, and to save a lengthened or detailed description of them. The different modes of alloying and melting silver ; its solders ; the preparation of imitation alloys ; methods of working ; the prevention of vi PREFACE. waste ; instructions for improving and finishing the surface of the work, together with other useful information and memoranda — all these have been carefully collected and placed in order in the body of the work. The Author has endeavoured, throughout, to present the contents (which he has with some little difficulty and labour brought together) in as practical and readable a form as is compatible with accuracy and efficiency. G. E. GEE. PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. Since the publication of the first edition of this work important changes have taken place in the commercial value of silver, its present cost in the best markets being sixpence per ounce lower than it was when this volume first appeared in 1877. This depreciation in value has, of course, necessi- tated a thorough revision of the former prices of the various alloys, solders, and other substances mentioned throughout the work ; and this has been done in order to render it the more complete as a work of general reference, conveying correct and useful information to the reader. The Author trusts that his endeavours in this direction will be appreciated. 58, Tenby St. North, Birmingham, February y 1885 CONTENTS. INTRODUCTORY CHAPTER. Page Silver a Precious Metal i Economy of Treatment i Working Silversmiths . . . . . 2 English and Foreign Workmen ... 2 Technical Education 2 Pure Silver 3 Plate and Ornamental Wares . • • 4 CHAPTER L Stiver. Silver, Characteristics of . . • • 5 Silver for Filigree Work . • • . 5 Indian Filigree Workers . . • . 5 Malleability of Silver 6 Ductility of Silver 6 Viii CONTENTS. Page Test for Pure Silver 6 Silver known to the Ancients ... 6 Silver Currency 6 Polished Silver 7 Tarnishing of Silver 7 Density of Silver ...... 7 Fusibility of Silver 7 Heating Power of Silver .... 7 Action of Silver under Great Heat • . . 8 Hardness of Silver 8 Nitrate of Silver 8 Silver resists Aqua-regia .... 8 Chief Places of Filigree Manufacture . . 8 Chief Uses of Silver 9 Price of Silver, Commercial .... 9 Ores of Silver 9 Dissolution of Silver 9 Caustic Alkalies 10 Nitre 10 Vegetable Acids 10 CHAPTER II. Sources of Silver* Silver-mining 11 Great Britain 11 British Isles' Yield of Silver . . • • 1 1 CONTENTS. ix Page Spain . . . . . . . .II America 1 1 Native Silver 1 1 European Supplies of Silver . . . .12 American Supply of Silver . . . .12 The Richest Mine 12 State of the Jewellery Trade . . . .12 Yield of Silver 13 Foreign Silver Currency . . . '13 Chief Sources of British Silver . . • ' 13 State in which it is found . . . .14 CHAPTER III. The Assay of Silver Ores. Silver and Mercury . . . . • 1 5 Assaying of Silver Ores . . . . .16 Crucible Assay 16 Fluxes for Crucible Assay . • • . 16 Assay of Genuine Silver Ores • . .16 Carbonate of Soda . . . . . .16 Dimensions of Crucible 16 Litharge 17 Preparation and Charge for Assay . . 17 Treatment in the Furnace . . . .18 Casting-mould 18 Scorification Process 18 3 X CONTENTS. • Page Fusing Cup or Scorifier 19 Special Form of Scorifier . . . .19 Scorification Assay the Reverse of Crucible Assay ....... 19 Charge for Scorification Assay ... 20 Advantages of the Process .... 20 Anthracite and its Object . . . .21 Separation of the Silver from the Slag . . 21 Borax, use of, in Assaying . . . .22 Continental Method of Assaying . . .22 Flux and Charge for Crucible ... 23 Details of the Process . . . . 23, 24 Skittle-pot . 25 Cupellation .26 Cupel, its Mode of Manufacture . . .26 Cupel-mould 27 Assayer's Muffle . . . . . .28 Cupel-tongs 28 Brightening , .29 Sprouting . 29 Weighing of Silver Assay .... 30 Chief Alloy of Silver 30 CONTENTS. xi CHAPTER IV. The Cupellation of Silver Ores. Page Test-ring 31 Preparation of Bone-ash 32 Defects in Bone-ash Cupel 33 Currents of Air to the Furnace • 33 Withdrawal of the Silver from the Cupel • 34 Removal of the Litharge, Manner of • 35 Quantity of Alloy per Cupel . • 35 Purity of Silver after Cupellation . • 37 Ancient Method of Assaying . . . • 37 Dr. Lamborn on Assaying . 38 Scriptural Testimony .... 37, 38 English System of Assay • 39 CHAPTER V. The Alloys of Silver. Silversmith's Alloys . . . . Filigree Work Alloy Amalgam ...... Metals employed in the Industrial Arts . 40 40 41 41 41 xii CONTENTS. Metals, their varioUvS Characteristics 4.1 Principal Alloys of Silver . 42 Copper . ST IT " 42 Characteristics of Copper 4^ Protoxide of Copper . • . • Action of Acids on Copper 44 Bean-shot Copper for Alloyins: 44 Chemical name for Copper 44 Nickel 45 Cronstedt 45 Density of Nickel 45 Ductility of Nickel . . • . * 45 Malleability of Nickel .... 45 Fusibility of Nickel ..... 4S Nickel Coinage 45 Nickel Alloys ...... 46 • *T ^ ElectrO'plate . 46 Zinc ........ . 46 Spelter . 46 Zinc in Silver Solder .... . 46 Annealing of Zinc 47 Specific Gravity of Zinc .... ST J 47 Spelter used by Jewellers 47 Tarnishing of Zinc . • • • . 47 Malleability of Zinc .... . 48 Ductility of Zinc . 48 Tenacity of Zinc . 48 Tin . 48 CONTENTS. Xiii Page Ancient Workers in Tin 48 Density of Tin 48 Christianity and Tin ..... 48 Fusibility of Tin 48 Dissolving of Tin ...... 48 Tin alloyed with Gold . . . . - 49 Tin alloyed with Silver . . . . -49 Tin in Silversmith's Solders .... 49 Vapours of Tin injurious to Gold ... 49 Malleability of Tin 49 Ductility of Tin 49 Tenacity of Tin ...... 49 Scientific Name for Tin ..... 50 Table of Metallic Elements .... 50 Melting-points of the Principal Metals . . 51 Physical Properties of the Principal Metals . 5 1 CHAPTER VI. Various Qualities of Stiver, Mechanical Uses of Silver . . . .52 Filigree Work 52 Birmingham 52 London ....... 52 Indian •••«... 53 Chief Places of Filigree Manufacture . . 53 xiv CONTENTS. Page Continental Cheap Labour . . • -54 Hand-made Articles 54 Process of Workmanship . . . -55 Maltese Filigree 55 Chinese and Japanese Filigree ... 56 Filigree of Norway and Sweden . . .56 Filigree working, Necessity for Pure Metal . 56 Old Method of making Filigree . . .57 Twisting of the Wire 58 Lathe, Use of . 58 Flattening of Twisted Wire for Filigree . . 59 New Method of preparing Filigree Wire . 59 English Standards for Silver .... 60 English Coinage 61 Standard Silver Alloy 61 Alloy for Hall-marking 62 Standard Alloy of the Highest Quality . . 62 Standard Alloy for Hall-marking ... 62 Alloy commonly used in England ... 63 Qualities used by English Silversmiths . . 63 Drawbacks to Hall-marking .... 63 Method of calculating the Qualities of Silver . 63 Silver Alloy No. i, cost 4^". ^d, per oz. . . 64 „ No. I, differently calculated . 64 „ No. 2, cost 4^". \d, per oz. . . 64 „ No. 2, differently calculated . 64 „ No. 3, cost 1$, lod. per oz. . . 65 „ No. 3, differently calculated . 65 CONTENTS. XV Silver Alloy No. 4, cost 3^. 7^. per oz. . i 65 „ No. 4, differently calculated . 65 „ No. 5, cost ^s. 6d. per oz. . . 66 „ No. 5, differently calculated . 66 „ No. 6, cost 3^. ^d. per oz. . . 66 „ No. 6, differently calculated . 66 „ No. 7, cost ^s. 2d. per oz. . . 67 „ No. 7, differently calculated . 67 „ No. 8, cost 3^. per oz. . . . 67 „ No. 8, differently calculated . 67 Instructions in the Preparation of Alloys . 68 Copper for Alloying 68 French Standards 69 Silver Ware 69 Coinage 69 French Alloy for Coinage .... 70 French Alloy for Plate 70 French Alloy for Silver Ware ... 70 Instructions in the Preparation of these Alloys 70 German Standards 71 Silver Ware 71 Coinage 71 Silver Alloy for the German Coinage . . 72 Alloy for Plate 72 Alloys for Silver Wares . . . . 72, 73 Law on the Manufacture of Silver Wares . 73 Remedy allowed in Fineness . . . -73 Government Exports 73 Guarantee Marks . . . . -73 xvi CONTENTS. CHAPTER VII. Silver Solders : their Uses and Applications. Page The Act of Soldering . . • . 7d. • /T- Cause of Inferior Manufactures 74. Tin in Solders ...... Filed Solders ...... 76 Zinc in Silver Solder .... 76 /u Solders made with Copper and Silver 76 Hard Silver Solders .... 7 7 Medium Solders ..... 77 Easy Solders ...... 7 7 Connections for Soldering 77 T^hix for Soldprinp" 77 Fusibility of Silver Solders 78 Hpirdest Silver Solder ro«=it t/tT ripr oz 78 Ditto, differently calculated 7Q Medium Silver Solder cost xs \od ner oz 7n /y Ditto, differently calculated 70 Easy Silver Solder, cost 3^. ^d. per oz. . • 79 Ditto, differently calculated . 80 Remarks on Silver Solders . 80 Composition for Solder .... . 81 Best Hard Solder, cost 4^". id, per oz . 81 Ditto, differently calculated . 81 Medium Solder, cost 35. lod, per oz. . 82 Ditto, differently calculated . 82 CONTENTS. XVii Page Easy Solder, cost 3^. 7^. per oz. . . . 82 Ditto, differently calculated . . • .82 Common Solder, cost 3^. 3^. per oz. . . 83 Ditto, differently calculated .... 83 Directions on the Melting of Solders . . 83 Solder for Enamelling, cost 4^. id, per oz. . 84 „ ' „ cost 35-. td. per oz. . 84 Easy Solder for Filigree Work ... 84 Quick Running Solder, cost 3^. 3 196 CHAPTER XIV. Useful Information for the Trade. Silversmith's Alloys 197 Silver Wares . • . . . . •197 Cleaning Plate 198 Imitation Silver 198 Another 198 Removing Gold from Silver Articles • . 198 Oxidizing Silver 198 Dipping Mixture 199 Silver Powder for Copper .... 199 Powder for Silver 200 To protect the Polish of Metals . . . 200 Silver-stripping Mixture .... 200 Stripping Silver . . . • . .201 Soft Solder 201 Soldering Fluid . • • . . . .201 Dissolving Silver 202 Dissolving Silver Alloy . • . • . 202 h xxvi CONTENTS. Page Dissolving Copper 202 Dissolving Soft Solder 202 Dissolving Silver Solder 202 Dissolving Sealing-wax 202 Resist Varnish 202 Plate Powder 202 Electro-plating Soft Solder .... 202 Another Recipe 203 Testing Silver Wares 203 Another Test 204 Perchloride of Iron 205 Aluminium Alloy 205 New Alloy 205 Removing Gold from Silver Wares . . 205 Silver Plating Fluid 206 Plate-cleaning Powder 206 Solder for Aluminium 206 CHAPTER XV. Foreign Silver Standards .... 207 French Work^ Duty on 208 Continental Silversmiths .... 209 French Style of Work 209 German Style of Work 210 Indian Style of Work 210 Austrian Style of Work 211 English Style of Work 211 Index 212 THE SILVERSMITH'S HANDBOOK. INTRODUCTORY CHAPTER. In reviewing the rise and progress of the silver- smith's beautiful and interesting art, in its relation to the manufacture of articles of personal ornament and luxury at home and abroad, we may observe at the outset, that the material of which they are composed differs widely in character from that employed by the ordinary "metalsmiths " and the manufacturer of " electro -plated wares/' Silver, the material of which we are now treating, being a precious metal and of considerable value, it is essentially necessary that the most careful means be exercised in dealing with it from the com- mencement — that is, from the pure or fine state — and also that the utmost economy be observed in reference to the kind of mechanical treatment to which it is subjected in the production of the silversmith's work, in order to prevent too great B 2 INTRODUCTORY CHAPTER. a quantity of waste or loss of material. For it should be borne in mind that silver, like gold, begins to lose, in one way or another, every time it is touched ; therefore, carefulness and economy will be the characteristics of our teaching, so far as regards the present subject. The vast majority of working silversmiths know very little of the physical and chemical properties of the metal they employ, and still less of the com- parison it bears with other metals in the field of science ; and this want of scientific knowledge is nowhere more apparent than in our own country, where the English workman, in art education, is much behind the foreigner ; and yet we have some of the finest and best workmen, in their special branches, in the whole world. The English work- man believes that if the work is worth doing at all, it is worth doing well ; and we have no hesitation in saying, that, if a good technical education were afforded, concerning the precious metal trades, he would scarcely have an equal, and certainly no superior, abroad, in art workmanship, both in respect to the display of good taste and judg- ment, combined with a knowledge of design, so far as the exercise of these qualities is compatible with the manufacture of articles specially designed for use and ornament- INTRODUCTORY CHAPTER. 3 The object of the information we are about to supply is to enable the practical silversmith to become a perfect master of his art or profession ; and such a condition, when once achieved, will be found of considerable assistance to him in the various kinds of manufacture that present them- selves ; so that he will know how to begin a piece of work and when to leave it off; be able to remedy a defect in the metal when required, as well as be in a position to form an opinion as to the relative treatment of its different alloys ; all of which invariably require different treatment. We shall commence by describing the charac- teristics of fine silver^ carefully narrating the dis- tinctive features of its alloys ; then give an account of the processes employed, mechanical and chemical, in the silversmith's workshop ; and conclude by pointing out the difference between English and foreign work in regard both to style and workmanship. It may be thought by the reader, if uninitiated in the art, that the costly plate and other articles made from the precious metal are manufactured from entirely pure silver, and therefore that they possess absolute freedom from alloy; but this is not the case. Pure silver being far too soft to stand the necessary wear and tear of (metallic) B 2 4 INTRODUCTORY CHAPTER. life, it is mixed with some other metal, to give it increased hardness. In the manufacture of plate and ornamental wares the metal employed is always copper, in various proportions, thus forming different commercial qualities ; and of these we shall speak hereafter. Our first object is to treat of the chemical and physical properties of the pure metal. CHAPTER 1. Silver. Pure silver is, next to gold, the finest metal, but of a smoother and more polished nature. It may be said to be almost infinitely malleable, but it will not so easily yield or extend under the hammer as fine gold. As a malleable metal, however, it stands next to it in this respect. It is characterized by its perfectly white colour, being the whitest of all the metals. It is harder than gold, yet in a pure state it is so soft that it can easily be cut with a knife. On account of its extreme softness, when in a pure state, it is em- ployed for filigree work, being utterly devoid of that elastic power which is found in the metal when alloyed. It is for this reason that the Indian filigree workers, who are the finest in the world, are so very particular about the absolute purity of the metal before commencing the manufacture of their artistic work; all of which is exceedingly beautiful. 6 SILVER. It is reported that fine silver is capable of being beaten into leaves of less than one-hundred-thou- sandth part of an inch in thickness. For the accuracy of this statement we cannot vouch, never having had occasion to try the experiment ; its employment in that form being unknown in the ordinary industrial pursuits. Fine silver is ex- tremely ductile, and may be drawn into the very finest wire without breaking, and almost without annealing. Its purity can be partly ascertained by the latter process ; for perfectly fine silver never changes colour by heat, whereas when it contains alloy it blackens if heated in contact with a current of air, and soon hardens in wire-drawing. Silver was a metallic element known to the ancients, and it is repeatedly mentioned in the Holy Scriptures. In the time of the patriarchs we read of it as having been constantly employed in the transactions of nations, and that it was in use as a standard of value ; thus forming a circulating medium for the purpose of exchange. This func- tion it has always continued to fulfil down to the present day, except that since the year 1816 it has not been so employed in the English currency. However, as token money, it is everywhere recog- nised as a circulating medium of trade. The Egyptian symbol for silver was represented by FINE SILVER. 7 Fig. I, relating to the moon; in modern chemistry- it is understood by ag. from the Latin name argen- tmn^ denoting silver. Fine silver is capable of receiving a polish scarcely inferior in lustre to that of highly polished steel, and in this state it reflects more light and heat than any other metal, without any perceptible change of colour for some consider- able time. It is chiefly on this account, Egyp'tfan mfrk for Silver. as well as its resistance to oxidation in air and water, that it is used for such a variety of purposes, not only of ornament and luxury, but also in a domestic way. Silver, unlike gold, cannot resist the influence of sulphuretted hydro- gen, from the action of which it very soon becomes much tarnished if left exposed in damp rooms, &c. Silver ranks next to gold in point of ductility and malleability. When pure, its density, or spe- cific gravity, lies between 10.47 ^^^^ 10.50, taking water as i, according to the degree of compression it has received by rolling and hammering. It is fusible at a full red heat, or about 1873^ Fahr. It is a metal having a very low radiating power for heat ; hence silver wire of given dimensions retains and conducts heat better than a similar piece of another metal ; for the same reason, a liquid con- 8 SILVER. tained in a silver vessel retains its heat much longer than if placed in one made of some other substance. Silver volatilises when subjected to a very great temperature in the fire, emitting rather greenish fumes. It loses between ^sts and -^ths, in pro- portion to its impurity, of its absolute weight in air when weighed in water. In point of tenacity it occupies the fifth position among the useful metals. In hardness it lies between copper and gold ; and a small addition of the former substance consider- ably increases this quality, in which state it is largely employed in the arts. Nitric acid is the proper solvent for silver, as it dissolves it with the greatest ease and rapidity, forming nitrate of silver, which is much used for medical purposes, and in art. Sulphuric and hydrochloric acids act upon it but slowly in the cold. Silver resists partially the best aqua-regia, probably on account of the dense chloride which forms on the surface of the metal, from the action of the hydrochloric acid in the mixture of aqua-regia. Fine silver is largely used in the industrial and commercial arts, in the manufacture of silver lace and fine filigree work ; the latter branch being more commonly practised in India, Sweden, Nor- way, and some parts of Germany, where labour is cheap, than in England. This class of silver- FINE SILVER. 9 smith's work takes a long time to produce, and as labour forms the chief item of its cost, this, not unnaturally, acts as a great drawback in the exten- sion of the art of very fine filigree working, in all its intricate variety, in countries where labour is dear. To this subject we shall subsequently refer again in detail. Fine silver, with a small pro- portion of alloy, is largely used by all nations for purposes of coinage. It amalgamates with nearly all the metals, but is principally used in alloys suitable to the watchmaker's and silver- smith's art. The purchasable price of fine silver for manufacturing purposes is now, 1884, four shillings and eightpence per ounce, troy weight, varying however in value according to the total amounts purchased ; for which see refiners' and assayers' charge lists, to be procured at the ofiices of any bullion dealer. The silver ores of commerce have generally an intermixture of a small quantity of gold, and sometimes instances have occurred in which it has been employed in manufactures with- out a proper chemical investigation ; and in such cases the loss resulting from the omission would have amply paid the expenses of the process. Exposed to the action of hot and concentrated sul- phuric acid, silver dissolves, setting free sulphurous acid. By the application of this process — which B3 lO SILVER. is one of the most advantageous methods — silver may readily be separated from gold, sulphuric acid having no action upon the latter metal. With the exception of gold, silver perhaps more perfectly resists the action of the caustic alkalies and the powerful effects of nitre (saltpetre) than any other metal, if we omit platinum from the list of elements at present known to metallurgical chemistry. For reasons such as these its superiority for the manu- facture of utensils for culinary and other domestic purposes is at once apparent, and because it is a metal upon which vegetable acids produce no effect. CHAPTER II. Sources of Silver. Strictly speaking, silver mining does not exist as a distinct operation in Great Britain, for it can hardly be said that this country possesses any great quantity of silver ore. Yet we must not disguise or leave unnoticed, in dealing with this subject, the positive fact that silver is found to some extent in our copper and lead mines, principally in the latter; but in no case, as far as we know, have mines been worked for the sake of the silver alone. It is almost always found in conjunction with lead, and it is from that source that we have a good supply of British silver. The average annual yield in the British Isles for some years has been equal to 800,000 ounces — a position in regard to the quantity produced ranking second only to Spain amongst the nations of the world, America, of course, being excepted. Silver is found in a native state, the commonest ore being a sulphuret. 12 SOURCES OF SILVER. The chief European supplies are derived from Spain, in which country genuine silver ore exists ; from Saxony and Prussia, where the ores are prin- cipally associated with lead, as in England ; and from Austria, where it is for the greater part found mixed with copper. Silver is nearly always to be found in copper and lead mines, but generally in such small quantities that it is rarely worth the trouble and expense of separation. Considerably more than three-fourths of the whole total supply of silver comes from America ; and in fact nearly the whole territory of America is said to be more or less argentiferous. Until lately Mexico carried off the palm, as containing and yielding the largest percentage of silver ; but through the discovery of another mine in the United States, at Nevada, of considerable richness, which has yielded enormous supplies, we shall not be far wrong in pronouncing the silver mines in the State of Nevada to be the richest in the whole world. The extensive production of these mines, combined with other causes, has led to a considerable depre- ciation in the value of silver, and probably this may yet lead to its more extensive employment in the arts and manufactures ; and, in the midst of the very general depression of the jewellery trade, any change extending in that direction would be EUROPE. 13 joyfully accepted by the thousands of workmen in the precious metal trades now standing idle. We are told that, since the year i860, the production of silver has increased from an average yield of eight or nine to fourteen millions per annum, or about 60 per cent. ; while, on the other hand, the foreign demand for the metal (formerly largely employed for the currency) has greatly diminished. This decrease in the demand has been caused by the adoption in the following countries of a gold cur- rency, viz., Holland, Germany, and the Scandi- navian Governments in Northern Europe, &c. ; and also by a diminution in the amount of silver coined by the undermentioned powers : France, Belgium, Switzerland, Italy, and Greece. The chief sources of supply in the British Isles, according to Professor George Gladstone, are as given below; and as all the silver found in this country is produced from lead ores, the average yield here given must be understood to exist in about that proportion to every ton of lead ore assayed : — Isle of Man, 50 or 60 oz. ; Cornwall, about 30 oz. ; Devonshire, about 30 oz. ; Cardigan- shire, 15 to 20 oz. ; Montgomeryshire, 15 to 20 oz. Thus, it will be seen the lead ores of the Isle of Man yield the greatest proportion of silver in the British dominions. Silver is also found in the under- 14 SOURCES OF SILVER. mentioned counties, in all of which it is produced from lead ore : — Cumberland, Durham, and Nor- thumberland, Denbighshire, Flintshire, and Derby- shire ; but the percentage is much smaller than in the preceding cases. Ireland also yields a fair per- centage of silver. CHAPTER III. The Assay of Silver Ores* A LARGE proportion of the silver of commerce is extracted from ores (which are too poor to allow of their being smelted or fused) by a process called amalgamation. Founded on the ready solubility of silver, &c., in metallic mercury, the ore is first crushed to powder, then mixed with common salt, and afterwards roasted. By the adoption of this plan the silver is reduced to a state of chloride. The roasting is done in a reverberatory furnace, in which the heat is very gradually raised, the ore being constantly stirred ; the heat is then increased sufficiently to raise the ore to a good red heat. It is then put into wooden barrels, revolving on iron axles attached to the ends, and scraps of iron are then added to it ; both are then agitated together by rotary motion, the effect of which is to reduce the chloride of silver to a metallic state. When this is effected, it is again agitated with mercury. 1 6 THE ASSAY OF SILVER ORES. and a fluid amalgam is formed with the metal, together with any other metallic ingredient that may happen to be present in the roasted ore. Subsequently, to recover the silver, the mercury is driven off by heat, and the silver is thus left behind in an impure state. There are three ways of assaying silver ores ; they are in the test assay as follows : — 1 . Melting in a crucible. 2. Scorification. 3. Cupellation. In the crucible assay the ore is commonly run down with a suitable flux, those most frequently employed being litharge, carbonate of soda, borax, and charcoal. These four substances are all that are required by the practical assayer in the treat- ment of the regular ores of silver. The assaying of the genuine ores is performed in the following manner ; that is, if they contain but little earthy matter. They may then be con- veniently treated by fusing with carbonate of soda, on account of its cheapness, and borax, in a fire-clay crucible (Fig. 2). The Fig. 2. Fire-clay Crucible. dimensions of the crucible should be as follows : 4^ inches in height, and 2 J inches MELTING IN A CRUCIBLE. 1 7 in its greatest diameter, which should be at the top. A quantity of litharge (a semi-vitrious sub- stance, oxide of lead), more than is actually neces- sary to take up the whole of the silver in the ore, should be added, so as to promote fusion, and collect the ingredients into one mass at the bottom of the crucible. In preparing the ore for the cru- cible, it must be well pounded, and intimately mixed with the undermentioned chemicals : — Pounded silver ore • • • . 240 grains. Litharge 800 „ Carbonate of soda • . • . 700 Borax 300 Charcoal 50 » Place two crucibles to warm during the time occupied in the preparation of the mixture, then put it into the warm crucible; take 100 grains more of litharge, and powder it over the contents in the vessel. Prepare in this manner a second mixture for the other crucible, place them both in the furnace, and put plenty of coke round them. The mixtures maybe melted in an ordinary wind or melting furnace, such as is used by jewel- lers in the preparation of their material for art working. The fusion should take place very gradually at first, as silver in combination with lead is sensibly volatile at a high temperature : it 1 8 THE ASSAY OF SILVER ORES. may then be continued at a low heat for twenty- five minutes, and finally the operation may be com- pleted with a full red heat for five minutes longer. During the process of fusing the contents of the crucible may be watched by removing one of the bricks from the top of the furnace, and when the whole mass has become quite liquid the crucible must be seized with a pair of suitable tongs, tapped once or twice very lightly against the side of the furnace to procure the settlement of the contents, and immediately poured into an iron mould, previously warmed and greased to prevent adhesion and spitting. Allow the mould to remain for some time, in order to partially cool, and then plunge it into a vessel of cold water. On cooling, the metallic elements w411 be found incorporated into a button, the slag can then easily be removed by tapping with a hammer on the edge, and the plunging into cold water greatly facilitates this separation. The whole mass has then to be cupelled, in order to separate the silver from the lead and other metals. Silver ores, containing a large proportion of the sulphides (chemical combinations of sulphur with metallic substances) of other metals, may be easily assayed by the scorification process, which is, without exception, applicable to the assay of all kinds of argentiferous ores ; and is one of the best, SCORIFICATION. 1 9 most simple, and most exact methods that can possibly be employed in the extraction of silver from its ores. This process, like that of fusion with litharge, already described, has the effect of pro- ducing an alloy, and subsequently requires cupel- lation. The ore is first well pounded, and then put into a small shallow vessel made of close- grained refractory fire-clay (Fig. 3), with an excess of finely granulated lead and some borax. The fusing cup or scorifier employed in this pro- 3 Fi^e-ciay Fusing cess should be about ij in. high and 2 J ins. in its greatest diameter; some assayers, however, use them deeper in proportion to their width, and representing in form the end of an egg. The object of this shape is to preserve the bath of molten metal at the bottom, and that it may always be well covered and protected by the slag on the top during the process of fusing. In the scorification method the principles are ex- actly the reverse of those of the crucible assay ; for in the latter the object is to reduce the oxide of lead to a metallic state, whereas in the former the metallic lead added to the pounded ore in the scori- fier is oxidized by being fused in contact with the air. The charge for this assay may be as follows : — 20 THE ASSAY OF SILVER ORES. Well pounded ore Finely granulated lead Borax anhydrous . Powdered anthracite 60 grains. 600 „ 100 „ The cups or scorifiers should be charged in the following manner : well mix the silver ore with 300 grains of granulated lead ; place this mixture in a scorifier, and add 300 grs. more of granulated lead, and over the top of the whole put the burnt borax. The vessel may then be placed in an ordi- nary assay furnace or muffle, as many being intro- duced at one time as there is room for in the furnace, and submitted to the strongest heat for about thirty minutes ; during the greater portion of this time the door should be kept closed, especially for the first fifteen minutes. On open- ing the muffle-door a current of air passes through the furnace, converting a portion of the lead into litharge ; this enters into combination with the earthy portions of the ore, the other metallic sul- phides, and also the borax, producing a fusible slag on the surface of the metallic bath, extending over the whole surface of the scorifier. The excess of lead is thus protected by this film or flux from the oxidizing effects of the currents of air admitted into the furnace, and remains united with whatever silver there may be in the ore, in a metallic state. The fusing should be continued longer than the SCORIFICATION. 21 thirty minutes — in fact until the slag or flux is reduced into a perfectly liquid state; stirring it well with a slender iron rod will facilitate the ope- ration, as it will tend to mix with the mass any hard portions remaining undissolved and attached to the sides or other parts of the vessels. This condition of the flux is absolutely indispensable; when the slags are quite liquid, which with a strong fire will take place in from thirty to forty minutes, wrap up in a piece of paper the powdered anthracite, and drop it into the scorifier while still in the furnace or mufiie. The object of adding the anthracite at the last moment is to reduce any minute portions of the metal that may exist in the slags, and remain separated from the bulk. When the anthracite has burnt off", which process usually takes about five minutes, this point is considered to have been attained, and the operation is then complete. The scorifier may be immediately with- drawn from the fire, and the contents poured into a suitable casting-mould, of the form represented in Fig. 4, a button of silver lead being the result. When cold, the metallic mass is readily separated from the slag or flux by slightly tapping with a hammer ; the former may then be passed on to the next opera- tion, viz. to be purified of its lead by the process of cupellation, which will be presently described. 22 THE ASSAY OF SILVER ORES. When there is not enough borax present, the assayerwill observe an infusible skin floating upon the surface; should this be the case more borax must at once be employed, in order te dissolve such impurity. When a chloride of silver ore is to be assayed, carbonate of soda must be added to the mixture to prevent sublimation. The following method of assaying is adopted in several large Continental establishments, where the ores have, beside the usual earthy matter and the sulphides of lead, an admixture of zinc, iron^ and copper. The process is precisely similar to the crucible assay, in the case of genuine silver ores, as already described — ^with this exception, that no more lead is added than the ores then contain — that is, if we are treating galena or silver lead; other ores require different treatment according to their known composition. In this process wrought-iron crucibles are employed having the form and shape as shown in Fig. 5. They are made of thick iron plate, and are rendered secure by welding the edges firmly together. Their dimensions are as follows : a depth of 4I ins., with a thickness of iron at the bottom of \\ in., and a i of an inch in the sides; the diameter at the top of the crucible should be about 2 J ins., and at the bottom between 2 and 2\ ins. A mechanical CONTINENTAL METHOD. 23 mixture or flux is prepared to use with the ores to which we have referred, consisting of the following chemicals, all of which should be finely powdered and well mixed with the ore to be assayed : — Carbonate of soda .... 6 parts. Tartar 3 >> Saltpetre 2 ,, Borax I part. The furnace used for this assay is the ordinary one, having rather a high chimney, to insure a perfect draught. In effecting the reduction of the silver, the crucible is first placed as before on the fire, and allowed to become hot ; when this is accomplished, take Well powdered ore . . . . 480 grains. Prepared flux 500 ,, These ingredients should be thoroughly mixed together, and put into the red hot crucible. Fuse at a low heat for about twenty minutes, when the whole will be in a perfect state of fusion ; then give about five minutes strong heat, and at the end of that time the crucible may be withdrawn, and its contents poured into an iron mould, as represented in Fig. 4, having one or two conical holes for the reception of the fused mass. The silver and lead collect at the bottom of the mould by reason of its high specific gravity. It may be removed by reversing the position of the latter, 24 THE ASSAY OF SILVER ORES. when a gentle tap or two will deprive it of that slag or flux which is usually attached to it. A Fig. 4. Iron Casting-moulds. large quantity of silver can be readily collected from its ores by an alternate use of crucibles, in which case it is possible to make a regular number of fusions per hour. Wrought-iron crucibles, when strongly prepared and carefully made, will stand about thirty of these fusions, giving way in the end on account of the action of the sulphur contained in the ores. Another kind of crucible, in addition to those already mentioned, is used by the trade, and is recommended by many assayers as superior to all others. Fig. 6 represents the form of it. It is about 4i ins. high, and 2 ins. in its greatest interior diameter, being in the form of a skittle. The charge consists of the following in this assay : Finely powdered ore .... 60 grains. Small pieces of iron . • , . 12 ,, Black flux 180 „ Common salt 50 ,, Put the powdered ore into the crucible, and CRUCIBLES. 25 place upon it the iron, which should not be in the form of filings or dust, but in small pieces ; upon Fig. 5. Iron Crucible for Assay. Fig. 6. Fire-clay Crucible for Assay. the ore and iron should be put the black flux, and lastly the common salt must be placed above all these substances as a protection against the air. The crucibles, as many as convenient, may now be introduced into the furnace, and slowly raised to a strong red heat, at which temperature they should be kept for about half an hour ; at the end of that period they should be removed from the fire, slightly tapped to settle the contents, and then placed aside to cool. When this has taken place, a few blows with a hammer near the base of the crucibles, each in turn, will soon expose the button of silver attached to the undecomposed iron ; the latter substance may, however, be easily detached by a few well-directed blows with the hammer. In order to ascertain the exact amount of the C 26 THE ASSAY OF SILVER ORES. precious metal — that is, the silver — contained in the buttons of lead obtained as the results of the fore- going operations, they are subjected to a purifying process by the metallurgist, called cupellation. By this means the lead and other impurities are driven off by heat in contact with a current of air, and the silver is left behind in a pure state. To perform this operation it is necessary to expose the buttons on some absorbing medium or porous support, and this support is commonly known as a cupel. No doubt many porous substances could be made available for the formation of cupels, but bone-ash is the best for all practical purposes, such as are required by the assayer. The bone-ash, in the condition of a very fine powder, is mixed with a little water in which has been dissolved a small quantity of potash, and moulded into the desired shape. The cupels are tightly consolidated by pressure in an iron mould of the form shown in Fig. 7, which is the best in use, being well adapted for the manufacture of cupels. It consists of a slightly conical steel ring, 2 ins. in depth, and about \\ in. in diameter at the top internally; a steel die with a wooden handle (Fig. 8) is made to fit the mould. To make a cupel the space in the ring is nearly filled with the moistened bone-ash, and pressed down by the hand, and afterwards by THE CUPEL. 27 the die, the latter being driven into the ring by the application of a wooden mallet (Fig. 9) to the handle Fig. 8. Die for Cupel. of the die. It will be seen from the illustration that the die forms a cavity in the cupel capable of receiving the charge of metal for assay. When the bone-ash has been sufficiently compressed, the die is withdrawn, and the cupel removed from the ring. This is a delicate operation, as sometimes the edges of the cupel are liable to be injured; to prevent which and facilitate the removal a loose plate of iron, exactly fitting the bottom of the mould, should be introduced previous to putting in the bone-ash. The iron plate of course being removed with the cupel, it must be replaced before another can be made. By introducing a cylindrical piece of wood to the lower aperture of the steel ring, the cupel can be removed without difiiculty. The size of the cupel should always be regulated according to the quantity of foreign matter to be C 2 28 THE ASSAY OF SILVER ORES. absorbed, it being generally understood that the material of which it is formed takes up double its weight of lead. The process of cupelling is con- ducted in the furnace of the assayer, an apparatus of peculiar construction, the most important part of which, however, is the muffle (Fig. lo), consisting of a small arched oven of fire-clay closed at one end, and furnished Fig. 10. Assayer's Muffle for Cupels. with perpendicular slits in the sides, in order to allow of a free access of air to the cupels inside. The position of the muffle in the furnace is so arranged that it can be readily heated on every side ; and when it has become red hot, six or eight cupels, previously well dried, are taken and placed on the floor of it, which should be covered with a thin layer of bone-ash. The form of tongs required for this purpose is shown in Fig. 1 1 . When the Fig. II. Cupel Tongs. cupels have been raised to the temperature of the muffle itself, the assays are put in by a very slender pair of tongs, the door of the furnace is then closed for a few minutes, when the metal will have become CUPELLATION. 29 fused, and the litharge will begin to be taken up by the bone-ash of which the cupel is composed. The temperature of the furnace is now lowered as much as possible, although not to such an extent that it will retard the progress of oxidation and absorp- tion. When nearly the whole of the lead has been thus absorbed, the bead remaining will have become very rich in. silver, and, as the oxidation proceeds, will appear much agitated, assuming a rapid cir- cular movement, and revolving with great rapidity. The silver gradually concentrates itself in the centre of the cupel, taking the form of a globule, and at this stage the fire should be made sharper, the operation being carefully watched. When the last particle of lead leaves the silver, the agitation will suddenly cease, and a beautiful phenomenon be witnessed, called by assayers the brtghtenmg. The button of silver then becomes brilliant and immovable, and the operation, when this takes place, is complete. The cupel must be cooled with very great care, in order to prevent the silver from sprouting ; which if allowed to take place would result in considerable loss, besides destroying the Fig. 12, Cupels, section and perspective views. 30 THE ASSAY OF SILVER ORES. accuracy of the assay. To prevent this sprouting it is a good plan immediately to cover the cupel by another, which has been heated for that purpose ; the two are withdrawn together, and allowed to remain at the mouth of the muffle until the silver has become solid ; the metal is then in a state of almost chemical purity, and may be detached and weighed. Previous to the latter, however, it should be carefully cleansed from all foreign matter, and flattened on a smooth-faced anvil, this process greatly assisting in the removal of any oxide of lead, which not unfrequently attaches itself to the globule of silver. The weighing is conducted with a pair of scales having an extremely delicate balance ; and where any commercial transaction depends upon the accuracy of the assay, it is always imperative to make several tests of the same sample, to avoid the consequences of any accident or mistake. The chief element in combination with silver on the large scale is lead. Formerly the plan adopted in the separation of this metal was cupellation alone. This process on the large scale is some- what different from that just described ; and as it may appear to the reader interesting and instruc- tive, a brief explanation of it may not be considered out of place. CHAPTER IV. The Cupellation of Silver Ores. This interesting process is performed in a rever- beratory furnace of a very peculiar construction, the cupel employed on the large scale differing somewhat from the ordinary one, being consider- ably larger and varying also in form. It consists of a strong oval wrought-iron ring, with a part of the full shape omitted, as shown in accompanying sketch, in order to allow of the overflow of lead during the process, in the form of litharge. This iron ring, known as the test ringy contains the cupel, and in order to prepare the latter, the frame> which measures about 60 ins. in its longest dia- meter, 40 ins. in breadth, and 6 ins. in depth, is strengthened by having a number of broad strips of iron seamed across the bottom by rivet- ing to the sides of it. The cupel itself is prepared for use by taking finely ground bone-ash, together with a little carbonate of potash, and working them 32 THE CUPELLATION OF SILVER ORES. up with just sufficient water to make the mass cohere properly ; the carbonate of potash may be advantageously dissolved in the water ; the latter is then applied in small quantities at a time to the bone-ash until the proper coherency has been obtained ; of the total quantity of bone-ash em- ployed in the operation, 2 per cent, of potash will be quantum sufficit to mix with it. The iron frame, or test, is then filled with the mixture, and it is pressed down into a solid compact mass, the centre part being hollowed out with a small trowel, the sides sloping towards the concavity in the middle ; the hollow should not however be extended more than within i to i| in. of the bottom of the frame, and above the iron bars. The cupel forms the hearth of the furnace we have spoken of, and of which Fig. 13 is a sec- tional view ; it is remov- able, and not a fixture in the furnace. It must be left for several days to IS Fig. 13. Cupels, section and perspective views. "^^M&i^^ dry, after having been constructed as described, when it is ready for use, and only requires firmly THE CUPEL. 33 wedging in its place beneath the arch of the furnace. The fire should be only very moderate at the commencement of the operation, and the furnace slowly raised in temperature, lest the cupel should crack by being too quickly heated. As the temperature increases, if without any apparent defects in the bone-ash cupel, or hearth, which it may now be termed, the wind or blast, generally driven by a fan, is thrown in through a nozzle, or an aperture in the furnace, which, for facilitating the immediate removal of the bone-ash hearth, is placed upon an iron car, and runs beneath the vault of the furnace on rails, so that it may thus be very readily withdrawn when found necessary. The admission of a current of air into the furnace oxidizes the excess of lead, in com- bination with the silver, producing litharge on the surface of the molten mass ; the formation of the litharge takes place rapidly, and it is continually blown forward by the strength of the blast as fast as it is produced, running through a gap or channel specially made for the purpose in the mouth of the cupel into a movable iron pot which is placed for its reception. The continual oxidization and flow- off of the lead alters the respective proportions of the metals in the cupel. For this reason it is C 3 34 THE CUPELLATION OF SILVER ORES. always kept full of lead ore, which is effected by- taking it in its fused state from a kettle in which it is ready melted by means of a long-handled ladle ; and thus about 500 or 600 lbs. of metal are con- stantly kept in this bone-ash cupel or hearth. As the silver necessarily increases in the hearth, it will require to be occasionally withdrawn, in order to make room for a further supply of lead ore. This process is adopted when it reaches about from 8 to 10 per cent, of silver to the ton (between 2,000 and 3,000 ozs.), and may be effectually performed by drilling a hole underneath the cupel, and letting the silver flow through it into a receptacle placed to receive it. Of course the operations of the fur- nace are arrested while these manipulations are being carried on. After the withdrawal of the silver, the hole is closed up again with a plug of moistened bone-ash prepared as before ; when the process may be continued a second time by giving 500 or 600 lbs. of fresh lead ore to the cupel. Thus a single cupel will often last 48 hours, and 6 or 7 tons of lead may be oxidized upon it. We have already observed that the prolongation of the cupelling process increases the richness of the remaining alloy, and this very rich silver-lead alloy is again subjected to a second operation in cupelling. This process of assaying or refining CUPELLATION. 35 is similar in every respect to the former, and is often performed in the same furnace, the cupel being first of all brought to almost a bright red heat, when about 600 lbs. of the silver-lead alloy are added, and a strong current of air given in order to oxidize the remaining lead in com- bination with the silver. In this operation the material under treatment, previous to its intro- duction to the cupel, should be melted in a kettle easy of access, and added in its fused state. The current of air in connection with the heat of the furnace immediately begins to purify the silver by oxidizing the lead, and forms litharge, which passes off through the channel provided in the mouth of the cupel ; as this proceeds, fresh silver-lead alloy is added, to keep the level of the metal always at the same height. This is con- tinued until some three tons of the alloy from the first cupellation have been put in, and when about 600 or 700 lbs. of silver are collected in the cupel. When the cupel has received the above pro- portion of metal, the addition of the alloy ceases, and the silver is allowed to purify. The litharge which passes off towards the close of this process will be richer in silver than in the former one ; consequently it is found best in practical metal- lurgical operations to treat in a special manner the 36 THE CUPELLATION OF SILVER ORES. last part of silver cupelling on the large scale, for it needs very careful management indeed to secure all the silver, especially to do so in a fine state. Towards the completion of the process the fire should be increased considerably, in order to keep the silver thoroughly melted, and also to oxidize and completely remove every trace of lead that is possible. As it begins to purify itself from the remaining lead a characteristic brightness will be perceived. When this takes place the fire must be lowered, the wind or blast stopped, and the metal left to cool gradually. This latter proceeding is of some importance, as a too sudden cooling of the surface causes the interior of the metal to expand and shoot, by which means little globules of silver may be lost ; therefore it should be allowed to cool very slowly. The iron ring encircling the cupel with its con- tents may now be drawn from beneath the arch of the furnace, and the cake of silver taken from its bed in the bone-ash which formed the vessel, and cleaned of any impurity ; w^hen it may be re- melted in a plumbago crucible, and cast into ingot moulds. These moulds should be made of iron, and should always, when used for this purpose, be warmed and greased a little, previous to the intro- duction of the melted material, to prevent the REFERENCES IN SCRIPTURE. 37 metal from spitting and adhering to it. If skil- fully treated during the process of cupellation, the desilvered lead seldom contains more than '002 to '003 per cent, of silver to the test assay of 200 grs., or between six and ten pennyweights to the ton, beyond which point it is unprofitable to carry on the operation. The litharge which is formed and passes off during the process gradually grows richer in silver towards the end of the cupellation. It probably contains after concentration about thirty to forty ounces of silver to the ton of litharge. This is again subjected to the several operations of the same kind for the recovery of the silver. It is somewhat remarkable that the present method of recovering and purifying this metal bears a strong resemblance to that employed in ancient times, and which is spoken of in the Holy Scriptures by the prophet Ezekiel (xxii. 18 and 20) : Son of man, the house of Israel is to me become dross : all they are brass, and tin, and iron, and lead, in the midst of the furnace ; they are even the dross of silver.'' And also, As they gather silver, and brass, and iron, and lead, and tin, into the midst of the furnace, to blow the fire upon it, to melt it ; so will I gather you in mine anger and in my fury, and I will leave you there, and melt you." The 38 THE CUPELLATION OF SILVER ORES. celebrated metallurgist Dr. Lamborn says, Only those who have seen, beneath the glowing arch at the smelting works, flames surging wave after wave across the surface of the liquid metal, carry- ing all the substances, here called dross, from the pure silver ; and only those who have heard the roar of the fiery blast, that ceases neither day nor night, until its task of purification is accom- plished, — can appreciate the terrible force of the figure made use of by the prophet." According to the above scriptural passage it is evident that the ancients were in possession of the first rudi- ments of assaying, and understood to some extent the purification of metals ; but scriptural testimony does not point out with what amount of skill and success these operations were performed. Judging from the appliances which have been handed down from generation to generation, we are inclined to think they must have been practised somewhat rudely ; for it has been left to the present school of scientific and practical metallurgists to found and develop the art in the direction of that com- mercial success to which it has at the present day attained. This plan of cupellation which we have just described is still adopted in many continental works in the assaying of silver-lead ores. In METALLURGY OF SILVER. 39 England the system has been almost entirely superseded by one invented by the late Mr. Pattin- son of Newcastle, and which is confidently stated to be far more convenient in practice. For a full and comprehensive description of this and other processes relating to the metallurgy of silver, we refer the reader to an admirable little work on the subject, by Dr. Robert H. Lamborn, issued by the publishers of the present volume. CHAPTER V. The Alloys of Silver. Fine silver enters freely into combination with nearly all the useful metals, but its most important alloys are those prepared from copper, the latter substance being more suitable for the production of silversmith's work than any other ; whilst it produces a more pleasing effect, if not over-alloyed, in regard to finish. Silver articles, especially of the filigree kinds, if the designs are good, possess a very tasteful appearance. In treating of the alloys of silver, it is our intention, first, to give a cursory glance at the chemical and physical properties of the metals which form these alloys. Such a de- scription, although brief, will, we believe, prove of essential service, not only to working silversmiths and metalsmiths, but also to goldsmiths and jewellers, who are constantly manipulating wdth these inferior metals in precisely the same way as the silversmith. Besides, such information cannot, ALLOYS. 41 we apprehend, fail to be useful, whether to the student, the theorist, or the practical worker. An alloy is the union of two or more metals by fusion, so as to form a metallic compound. It may consist of any number of the metallic elements, and in any proportion, provided they will chemi- cally combine, always excepting mercury as one of the ingredients. In this latter case the mixture is called an amalgam. Chemistry has made us acquainted with about forty-nine metals ; of that number, however, not more than fourteen are employed to any considerable extent for industrial art purposes. They are as follow : Gold, silver, copper, zinc, platinum, aluminum, nickel, iron, mercury, lead, tin, arsenic, antimony, and bismuth. Some of these are occasionally employed for special purposes in the arts in their pure state ; but where hardness is to be a distinguishing characteristic, combined with certain variations in shades of colour, a union is effected of two or more of these metals in different proportions, by fusion and stir- ring, so as to form the requisite alloy. Metals used in the pure state, that is, without any mixture of alloy, have very few applications in regard to industrial pursuits and the arts. The precious metals — gold, silver, &c. — would be much too soft, while, on the other hand, arsenic, bismuth, and 42 THE ALLOYS OF SILVER. antimony would be far too brittle to be employed alone for manufacturing purposes. It is quite possible to effect some thousands of alloys, but there do not appear to have been more than about three hundred practised successfully for com- mercial purposes. The principal alloy of silver, as we have already remarked, is copper ; but, occasionally, nickel, and even zinc are employed in the case of the com- moner qualities of silver. Tin is also used in the preparation of solder for these qualities, in order to render it the more easy of fusion when used for soldering the work. Of the distinctive features of these elements of silver-alloy we shall now speak with some amount of detail. Silver will unite with copper in various pro- portions by melting the two ingredients together, and stirring them whilst in a fused state. A product will thus be formed differing physically in character from fine silver, caused by the loss of some little of the latter s ductility and malleability ; but, on the other hand, a compound will be pro- duced harder and more elastic, which is in every sense better adapted to the manufacture and also to the durability of the articles made by the silver- smith. Copper y like the precious metals, appears to have COPPER. 43 been known from a very early age, being one of the six metals spoken of in the Old Testament; and described by the historian as being also one of the seven made use of by the ancient philosopher. It is of a reddish colour, malleable, ductile, and tenacious. It is largely employed in alloying both gold and silver for the manufacture of jewellery and other articles. With regard to malleability, it stands next to gold and silver in the list of useful metals ; in ductility it occupies the fifth position ; and in tenacity one only is superior, viz. iron. It is not very fixed in the fire, for if subjected to a long-continued heat it loses a part of its substance ; for this reason the alloys of silver and copper should be carefully watched in the crucible to prevent this loss when under the action of the fire. When struck copper gives only a feeble sound, and is easily abraded by the file. It fuses at a good white heat, or about 1994^ Fahr., although some authors have given it as 1996^ Fahr. Its specific gravity varies between 8-88for cast copper, and 8-96 when rolled and hammered. It loses between one- eighth and one-ninth, or a^ths, of its weight in water. When exposed to a damp atmosphere a greenish oxide, called verdigris, is produced on its surface, and this is one of the reasons why silver articles containing a percentage of copper become so 44 THE ALLOYS OF SILVER. readily discoloured if left exposed to atmospheric influences ; copper also, if heated in contact with the air, quickly becomes oxidized, and, on being touched, scales fall off : these form the protoxide oj copper. If this process is frequently repeated undei a great heat, each time the metal is operated upon it loses a part of its malleability and ductility, which are both eminent characteristics of the pure metal. Most of the ordinary acids act on copper but slowly in the cold, but nitric acid very readily dissolves it, even if largely diluted. Copper amal- gamates with most of the metals, and its subsidiary alloys are very largely employed in the arts and manufactures of every kind. The bean-shot copper of commerce, costing about a shilling per pound avoirdupois weight, is quite good enough for all the practical purposes of the silversmith. The name given to this metal by the alchemists was Venus (Fig. 14), which is one of the principal planets, whose orbit is situated between the Earth and Mer- cury. The scientific name of cuprum Fig. 14. Venus, for coppcr is derived from the Isle of Egyptian Mark for Copper. Cyprus, where, it is said by Plmy, the Greeks discovered the method of mining and working it. Copper is found distributed all over NICKEL, 45 the world; a considerable portion, however, is found in the United Kingdom. Nickel, — This metal is found chiefly in the Hartz Mountains. It was formerly called by the Germans "Kupfer nickel,'' or false copper, nickel being a term of detraction. It was first discovered about a century and a half ago by Cronstedt. It has a greyish-white colour, and is slightly magnetic, i.e. it is attracted by the magnet in the same way as iron and steel, but it loses this property if heated to about 600^ Fahr. Its specific gravity varies between 8-40 and 8*50, according to the amount of com- pression it has received, and it is rather brittle ; it may, however, be drawn into wire, and rolled flat, or into sheets. It is considerably harder and less ductile than any of the other metals employed in jeweller's and silversmith's work. In hardness it nearly approaches iron, and on this account, when polished, a characteristic brightness is produced. The malleability of nickel is less than that of iron, standing tenth in the list of useful metals ; and in ductility it also occupies the tenth position. Nickel is very infusible, and does not so easily oxidize or tarnish at ordinary temperatures as cop- per does. Several countries have tried to employ it in the manufacture of small coin for the currency^ but its use has now been almost abandoned. 46 THE ALLOYS OF SILVER. Nickel alloys are much used in the arts for manufacturing purposes, under the name of " Ger- man silver/' there being large demand for this metal, as it forms the hard white alloy much used in making electro-plate," and on which silver is afterwards deposited. It also is used in common silver alloys, in order to keep up the whiteness of the latter element, the addition of too large a proportion of copper maintaining the tint of the latter metal, in too strong a degree to be altogether employed by the silverworker. Nickel is some- times specially employed, in combination with other metals, to replace or imitate silver in the manu- facture of commercial wares, while with copper, zinc, tin, &c., it forms very useful alloys, producing great hardness. Zinc, — This metal in its pure state is sometimes called spelter. At the present day it is not much used for alloying silver ; but, as it is commonly employed in the preparation of silver-solder, it is necessary that the amateur and the student should know, as well as the practical mechanic, the dis- tinctive characteristics of it, together with the qualities it imparts to others when in combination with them. As a metallic substance it was un- known until a long time subsequent to the dis- covery of the principal metals ; and only since the ZINC. 47 commencement of the present century has its uses been thoroughly known and appreciated in the industrial world. In its pure state, zinc is a bluish- white metal, hard and highly crystalline ; but, when raised to a heat of between 250° and 300° Fahr., it is malleable, and may safely be rolled and hammered : it is in this way that the zinc of commerce is produced. Zinc may be annealed by placing it for a time in boiling water. Its specific gravity varies between 6*8 and 7*2 Fahr., according to the previous kind of mechanical treatment it has received. At 773° it melts, and is quickly oxidized by exposure to a current of air, emitting white vapours, which rise into the air, and are not unlike cotton-flakes ; oxide of zinc is thus formed by the burning away of the zinc. Spelter or zinc is employed by jewel- lers in the manufacture of bright gold alloys, as it gives liveliness of colour to their wares not to be equalled by any other metal. (For the proportions and treatment of this composition see "The Gold- smith's Handbook.") It may be alloyed with most of the metals we have named ; its uses in roofing, gutters, spouting, and chimney-pots being all well known. All the acids very readily attack it in the gold, and even when largely diluted ; it speedily tarnishes, and becomes covered with a white oxide 48 THE ALLOYS OF SILVER. which protects the metal from atmospheric influ- ences. In point of malleability zinc stands eighth among the metals, seventh in ductility, and as re- gards tenacity about seventh also. In chemistry it is represented by the symbol Zn. Its value v^hen in a state of purity, commercially speaking, is about 4^. per. lb. Tin. — This appears to have been one of the oldest known metals, and was employed in the Egyptian arts by the ancients, in combination with copper. Its colour is white, with a shining lustre almost as brilliant as that of silver, but it tarnishes much more quickly than alloys of the latter metal. With the exception of aluminum and zinc, it is the lightest of all the metals, its density being between 7-0 and 7*3, whether cast, hammered, or rolled. It is found in abundance in Cornwall, where it was also obtained at a very early period by the Phoenicians ; and it is reported in Soame's "Latin Church," p. 30, that it was through the medium of the trade in tin that Christianity was first introduced into this country. Tin is not of a fixed nature like gold or silver, but melts in a moderate fire long before it becomes red hot, or about 442° Fahr. It is rapidly oxidized when kept for a long time in a ^^re having a free access to the air ; and it is dissolved by hydrochloric, sulphuric. TIN. 49 and nitric acids, the latter acting on it most power- fully. Tin should not be alloyed with gold or silver, as with either of these it easily enters into combination by fusion, rendering them extremely brittle, especially in the case of silver, which be- comes by the least mixture of it so brittle that it is totally unfit for the work of the silversmith. However, for solder, for filing into dust, it may be advantageously employed to promote a quicker fusion ; but even for this it should be avoided where it is possible to do so. The vapours of tin are also permanently injurious in the melting of gold, silver, and their alloys, as they render them very unworkable, and the operator being often at a loss to understand the cause of his misfortune ; therefore, in melting silver alloys, it is advisable to avoid as much as possible the introduction of little bits of scrap tin into the furnace. If such a thing should happen, however, make the fire once or twice stronger in order that the tin may all be destroyed before the crucible containing the silver alloy is put in. Tin is very malleable, moderately ductile, and tenacious, being fifth on the list for malleability, eighth for ductility, and eighth for tenacity. The Egyptian mark or symbol for tin (sign of Jupiter") was the same as is represented in Fig. 15, D 50 THE ALLOYS OF SILVER. and related to the planet of that name, one remarkable for its brightness. In viythology it is understood as representing the supreme deity of the Greeks and Romans. The modern scientific name for tin is Sn. Fi-.is. jupiier. xin loses over one-seventh, or -A-ths, of Egyptian mark for ' -2 y ' Copper. weight in water from its absolute weight in air. In the next chapter we shall treat of the mixing of silver alloys, &c., and in order to make our information regarding the various metals so employed as complete as possible, we shall conclude this one with the following tables, each of which will no doubt be found useful ; — Table of Metallic Elements. Names of Elements. Symbols. Specific Gravities. Pt 21-40 to 21-50 Gold Au 19-25 19-50 Hg 13-56 „ 13-59 Pb 11-40 „ 11-45 Ag 10-47 „ 10-50 Bi 9-82 „ 9-90 Cu 8-89 „ 8-96 Ni «'5o „ 8-60 Fe 7-77 „ 7-80 Tin Sn 7-25 „ 7*30 Zn 6-8g „ 7-20 Sb 6-75 M 6-8o As 5-7C „ 5-90 Al 2-56 „ 2 -60 TABLES OF METALS. 51 Melting-points of the Principal Metals. Names of Elements. Fahrenheit. Centigrade. Platinum ..... ( Infusible, except by the oxyhydro- ) gen blow-pipe. v^dSL J.l(Jil • • . . . 2786° 2700° 2016° 1530° 1482° 1102° Nickel Gold Copper 1994° 1090° Silver 1873° 1023° 705" 412° Aluminum .... 1300° Zinc 773° 612° Lead 322° Bismuth 497"^ 258° 228° Tin 442° Antimony .... Fuses a little below red-heat. Arsenic Volatilises before it fuses. Physical Properties of the Principal Metals. Malleability. Ductility. Tenacity. Gold Gold Iron . . . 549 Silver Silver Copper . . Aluminum . 302 Copper Platinum 300 Aluminum Iron Platinum . 274 Tin Copper Silver . . 187 Platinum Aluminum Gold . . . i5oi Lead Zinc Zinc . . . 109J Zinc Tin Tin . . . 34* Iron Lead Lead . . 27J Nickel Nickel * * The above weights were lbs. sustained by 0787 of a line in diameter, in wires of the various metals. D 2 CHAPTER VI. Various Qualities of Silver. The chemical and physical properties of fine silver having been dealt with in a preceding chapter, we shall not refer to them again in detail ; but, as we have already observed that it is sometimes employed in its pure state for special purposes, it is desirable that we should point out the uses to which it has been applied, especially those of a mechanical nature. With reference to the latter part of the subject we will now proceed to describe the commercial utility of the metal with some amount of detail. One of the greatest demands for pure silver — if not the greatest of all — is in the manufacture of fine filigree work, a branch of industry exten- sively practised on the Continent. This kind of silversmith's work was attempted to be revived in this country during the years 1864 — 5, Bir- mingham and London being the principal places FILIGREE WORK. 53 where the manufacture was carried on ; but the success of the undertaking as a staple industry must, at the most, have been only a partial one, for it soon declined, and the trade was thus virtually left, as before, in the hands of our Eastern com- petitors; most of whom produce splendid specimens of the art of filigree and fine wire-working. In India this work is wonderfully performed, and it is truly marvellous to witness the beautiful handi- work of the natives who practise this craft. Their productions are quite the work of the true artist, almost every article representing Nature in some of her various forms, such as flowers, animals, serpents, &c., and these are so skilfully imitated that no one could possibly dispute either the faith- fulness of the representation or the ability of the workman. This is all the more surprising, be- cause in India the natives have not the modern mechanical appliances which we possess in this country. The jeweller there represents to some extent our travelling tinker, only with this diff'er- ence, that the travelling tinker in this country is generally an inexperienced and unskilful work- man, whereas the Indian, if we are to judge him by his work, must be just the reverse. Filigree wire-work is manufactured in Italy, Germany, Norway, and Sweden, and the secret of 54 VARIOUS QUALITIES OF SILVER. these countries maintaining tiie monopoly in this branch of the silversmith's trade is that labour there is cheap ; and not in any sense because English workmen cannot make the articles in question. It is owing to this cheapness of labour and the inexpensiveness of living that our Con- tinental competitors can beat us by underselling us in the market ; and to no other cause can the production of the foreign cheap article be assigned. In India the art of working in silver and gold has long been practised, and so particular are the workmen there about the absolute purity of the metals they use, that they refine them by melting five times, under a very strong blast heat, before commencing the work of manufacture. The prin- cipal places where these art-manufactures are carried on are in Southern India and at Trichi- nopoly ; and in these districts the delicacy and intricacy of the workmanship are brought to the greatest possible perfection. The articles pro- duced there are all "hand-made,'' and wrought entirely with a few simple tools, such as a hammer and an anvil (both of which are highly polished and burnished), a few fine pliers, blow-pipes, burnishers, scrapers, a pair of fine dividers, and some delicate scales and weights ; these, with a few FILIGREE WORK. 55 perforated steel-plates for drawing the wire through, comprise the chief appliances of the travelling native jewellers. The process of the work is very- simple. It is commenced by hammering out the metal upon the anvil, and when it has assumed a certain degree of thinness the dividers are next brought into requisition to mark it into certain widths, which are subsequently cut into strips and drawn into very fine wire through perforated steel- plates, a pair of strong pliers being used for the purpose. The holes in the steel-plates consist of graduated sizes, and by this means the strips of metal are soon considerably reduced ; and when the proper thinness has been attained the wire is ready for the exercise of the practical skill and dexterity of the artisan, who produces from it the best filigree work in the world. Most of the native jewellers have books containing a variety of designs, but they more commonly work from memory, without any reference to patterns. The principal localities where this description of work is produced in the highest perfection are Delhi, Cuttack, and Trichinopoly, in India ; and Genoa, Paris, Florence, Malta, Norway, and Sweden. The Indian filigree work is the finest and cheapest in the world. The Maltese manufacture a very good kind, and their crosses are much admired ; 56 VARIOUS QUALITIES OF SILVER. SO also do the Chinese and Japanese, but the manufactures of these latter countries are not so tasteful as those of India, consequently they have not been so highly appreciated. Norway and Sweden produce filigree work of a very light weight ; but still their productions in this art will not compare in regard to effect with the finest specimens from India. We have said that the silver employed by the filigree worker should be in every case absolutely pure ; because, when it is quite fine, it is extremely soft and pliable, so that it will remain in almost any form the artist may choose to work it, without that springiness which is found in all alloyed metals. However small might be the amount of alloy contained in the metal, the least admixture of it would produce an elasticity in the wire when pressed into form which w^ould make it unworkable for fine filigree purposes; and in this state it would be the utter bane of the workman, as his progress would be altogether impeded in the production of his work. It is of the greatest importance that the spirals, and all the various forms required in filigree working, should remain steadily in their places when pressed into shape, without that re- bounding which happens in the case of metals of an elastic nature, and in consequence of which no FILIGREE WIRE. 57 really first-class work can be performed in connec- tion with this art. For such reasons as these it will be at once palpable even to the ordinary reader that fine silver should always be used in preference to alloyed in the manufacture of filigree work. The various ornaments of the filigree kind are commonly enclosed in a rim of plain and somewhat stronger wire, which gives additional strength to each part ; and, when put together, tends to com- pose an article of considerably greater durability. In England these outside rims consist exclusively of sterling or standard silver, whilst all the inner work is of the finer material. There are several methods of preparing the wire called " filigree.'' The oldest and the one almost invariably practised in India consists in the first place in drawing down the wire in a circular form until the very lowest possible thinness has been attained, and frequently annealing it during the process, which is done by heating it to a red heat in a mufiie placed upon an iron or copper pan. When this process has been effectually performed the wire is taken (if of the proper degree of thin- ness) and doubled together; these two fine wires are then twisted into one cord, which should be of the fineness desired. The wire requires annealing more than once during the process of twisting, and ^ 3 58 VARIOUS QUALITIES OF SILVER. when it is completed it has a corded appearance ; it is then ready for the manufacture of the various articles comprised in this kind of work. The old plan of twisting was accomplished in the following manner. One end of the doubled wire being firmly secured in a vice or some other suitable instrument, so as to prevent it from turning round and so prevent the progress of the work, the other end of it was also firmly secured in a small hand machine or vice, which was made to revolve by turning a small handle with the right hand, the machine being held and regulated with the left, in order to keep the wire out at its full length so as to avoid knotting in the various parts of it ; it was in this manner that fine filigree wire was in the first instance made. The second plan was somewhat different, and in regard to the last part of the process it was certainly a great advantage, especially in the saving of labour, as a greater quantity could be prepared in a much less time than by the old method, that being slow in its progress. Here the lathe was made to supply the place of the small hand machine, the speed of which soon brought about the object in view. The flattening of this twisted wire has noAv commonly come into use, and is effected by pass- PREPARING THE MATERIAL. 59 ing it through small steel rollers, hardened and polished. The object of this is soon manifest, as the labour-saving process is brought prominently into play : the wire in the first place need not be so finely drawn, and secondly the same filigree surface can be made to appear upon the articles as before, by securing the edges of the wires which show the filigree uppermost ; and this is always the case in manipulating with this kind of wire. This method is generally in vogue with most filigree workers. A third plan of preparing the material for the manufacture of filigree work is, we believe, due to the ingenuity of a celebrated Birmingham firm, who extensively practised this kind of work some years ago. The secret is not now generally known to the trade, therefore a few observations bearing upon it will not be unacceptable to those for whose benefit we are writing. The process is commenced in the same manner as before, in the preparation of the round wire, though this need not be drawn so fine, because by this method we have no twist- ing. When the round wire has arrived at the proper size it is flattened in the manner already explained ; and when this is done it should be annealed, but experience will dictate best when this particular process should be carried out. 6o VARIOUS QUALITIES OF SILVER. After this latter operation the wire is submitted to the action of very small rollers, and bearing the pattern required in small grooves of various sizes. The pattern takes effect upon the edges of the wires only, and resembles the milled or serrated edges of our coinage, only of course the latter bears no comparison with regard to fineness. Lastly, the wire is again passed through the flattening rollers, and then it is ready to be worked up into the object desired. Having gone through the general details of filigree working we shall next direct our attention to the component parts and commercial uses of the English standards, together with those of some other countries. In England there are two silver standards, called respectively the old and the new standards. They are as follows : — Fine silver per lb. troy. Old Standard, ii oz. 2 dwts. = 925 millims. New Standard, 11 oz. 10 dwts. = 959 millims. The older of these appears to have been always the legally recognised standard for the coinage, and also for the manufacture of plate. By a law passed, however, in the reign of William III. (1697) it was raised to 11 oz. 10 dwts. of fine silver in the pound troy weight. The manufacture of silver ENGLISH STANDARDS. 6i articles from this standard was soon found to be not so durable as those made under the older one ; consequently the silversmiths were permitted by a law passed in the reign of George III. (1819) to manufacture from the former standard of 1 1 oz. 2 dwts., the use of the new one being likewise permitted for the benefit of those who chose to avail themselves of it ; and to this day it remains an English standard, though hardly ever employed. The English coinage contains 37-40ths of fine silver and 3-4oths of alloy, which is always copper; or millesimal fineness 925 parts of fine silver and 75 parts of copper per 1,000 parts ; the remedy allowed by law being millesimal fineness 0*004 parts. The copper which composes the alloy in the silver coinage is added for the purpose of hardening the material employed, and it has been found to wear much better with the above propor- tion of alloy. In order to make the matter as simple as possible, we purpose giving a few practical alloys, as follows : — Old standard silver alloy, cost 4s. ^d, per oz. oz. dwts. grs. Fine Silver . , . o 18 12 Shot Copper . , • o i 12 62 VARIOUS QUALITIES OF SILVER. If it is intended that the above alloy should be for Hall marking, it will be advisable to add a little extra silver to the prepared composition, because fine silver purchased from the refiner or bullion dealer is never absolutely pure, consequently the work will not pass the Hall ; or better still alloy as follows : — Old standard silver for Hall marking. oz. dwts. grs. Fine Silver . . . o i8 14 Shot Copper ... o I 10 I o G The new standard silver is composed of 38|-4oths of fine silver and i|-40ths of copper alloy; or millesimal fineness 959 parts of fine silver and 41 parts of copper per 1,000 parts; the remedy being as before 0*004 parts. New standard silver alloy, cost 45. td, per oz. oz. awts. grs. Fine Silver . . . o 19 4 Shot Copper . • . o o 20 100 New standard silver for Hall marking. oz. dwts. grs . Fine Silver . . , o 19 6 Shot Copper . , , o o 18 100 HALL MARKING, 63 Quality commonly used in England. oz. dwts. grs. Fine Silver . . . o i8 o Shot Copper ,..020 100 The qualities of the silver employed by the English silversmiths are invariably below the standard, the duties, assay charges, and loss of time in sending the work to the Hall to be marked acting as a great drawback to the trade in the midst of the keen competition of the present day. Silver chains, brooches, buckles, collarets, &c. are for the most part manufactured from inferior metal. In fact, some manufacturers positively refuse to make Hall-marked goods, on account of the great drawbacks attending the marking. The alloys of silver are not calculated on the carat system, like gold, but by certain numbers, or other distinctive features, well understood by the particular firms which trade in silver wares. For our present purpose it will be sufficient to distinguish them by using the numerals, i, 2, 3, 4, &c. ; the alloy nearest approaching sterling or standard we shall call No. i, and so on down- wards until the lowest quality has been reached. We may state that silver does not lose its white- ness if not alloyed below equal quantities of the 64 VARIOUS QUALITIES OF SILVER. two metals ; however, the alloys used in manu- factures seldom reach so low a limit. Silver alloy No. i, cost 4^. id, per oz. OZ. dwtS. gTS, Fine Silver . . . o i8 o Shot Copper ..,020 100 Silver alloy No. i, same as above. oz. dwts. grs. Fine Silver , . . I o o Shot Copper ...026 126 Silver alloy No. 2, cost 3^. <^d, per oz. oz. dwts. grs. Fine Silver , . . o i6 o Shot Copper ...040 100 Silver alloy No. 2, same as above. oz. dwts. grs. Fine Silver ...100 Shot Copper ...050 5 o TABLE 01^ ALLOYS. Silver alloy No. 3, cost 6d. per oz. oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver . . . 015 o Shot copper •..050 100 Silver alloy No. 3, same as above. oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver , . . i o o Shot copper • • . o 6 16 I 6 16 Silver alloy No. 4, cost 3^. sd. per oz. oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver . . , o 14 o Shot copper ,,,060 100 Silver alloy No. 4, same as above. oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver , . . i o o Shot^copper • • , o 8 12 "i 8 12 66 VARIOUS QUALITIES OF SILVER. Silver alloy No. 5, cost 3s. 2d. per oz. OZ. dwtS. gTS, Fine silver , • • o 13 12 Shot copper . , . o 6 12 100 Silver alloy No. 5, same as above. oz. dwtS. gTS. Fine silver . • . i o o Shot copper , . . o 9 i8 "i 9 18 Silver alloy No. 6, cost 3^. id, per oz. oz, dwts. grs. Fine silver , . . o 13 o Shot copper ...070 100 Silver alloy No. 6, same as above, oz. dwts. grsu Fine silver . , , i o o Shot copper . • . on o I II O SILVER ALLOYS. 67 Silver alloy No. 7, cost 3,^. per oz. oz. dwts. gTS, Fine silver . • , o 12 12 Shot copper • • . o 712 100 Silver alloy No. 7, same as above. oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver . ♦ . i o o Shot copper ,,.0120 I 12 o Silver alloy No. 8, cost 2s, lod. per oz. oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver ••.0120 Shot copper ••.080 100 Silver alloy No. 8, same as before. oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver ...100 Shot copper . . . o 13 12 I 13 12 68 VARIOUS QUALITIES OF SILVER. The qualities of the silver alloys have been re- duced in this list to various values, and the latter ones are as common as it is possible to make them, without a great and perceptible change oi colour taking place in the prepared material. But if it be desired to work a still more inferior metal, then another ingredient must enter into its com- position, in order to keep up the whiteness of the silver; and this other metal employed is nickel, the alloys with which we shall have occasion to refer to hereafter. Suffice it to say, however, that these inferior alloys of silver, prepared with nickel, are not now much employed by silversmiths in their art-manufactures. It will be observed that we have recommended the employment of shot copper in the manufacture of silver alloys : we do so for two reasons — first, because it can be purchased at a considerably cheaper rate than can the ordinary forms of copper, costing only one shilling per lb., whilst the ordinary prepared copper for alloying will cost double that amount; and, secondly, if proper attention has been given to the melting and casting process, the workable qualities of the metal will be found everything that could be desired. Therefore an excellent material in all respects can be produced by the means suggested at half the cost of alloy. A considerable saving to a large FRENCH STANDARDS. 69 firm might thus be easily effected by its employ- ment. In France there are three silver standards — two to be employed by silversmiths, and one for the coinage, as follows : — Fine silver per lb. troy. Silver ware, 1 1 oz. 8 dwts. = 950 millims. Coinage, 10 oz. 16 dwts. =z 900 millims. Silver ware, 9 oz. 12 dwts. = 800 millims. It will be seen from the above table that the coinage in France does not represent the highest standard, and also that the principal one in that country is inferior to our highest standard. The French coinage contains 36-40ths of fine silver and 4-40ths of copper alloy, or millesimal fineness 900 parts of fine silver and 100 parts of copper per 1,000 parts of metal ; the highest standard for silver wares contains 38-4oths of fine silver and 2-4oths of copper alloy, or millesimal fineness 950 parts of fine silver and 50 parts of copper per 1,000 parts of metal ; the lowest French standard for silver wares contains 32-40ths of fine silver and 8-40ths of copper alloy, or millesimal fineness 800 parts of fine silver and 200 parts of copper per 1,000 parts of metal. The remedy is millesimal fineness 0*005. 70 VARIOUS QUALITIES OF SILVER. French alloy for coinage, 4^. id, per oz. oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver . . . o i8 o Copper .•••020 100 French alloy for plate, 4^. 5^. per oz. oz, dwts. grs. Fine silver . . . o 19 o Copper • . . . 0 I o 100 French alloy, lowest standard, 3^. 9^. per oz. oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver . . . o i6 o Copper ...•040 100 In the preparation of these alloys with French silver it is undesirable to make any addition of fine silver, in order to enable goods manufactured from them to pass the Hall in safety, because the former is assayed before it leaves the bullion dealers, and the bars of metal are marked with their various standards. Such is not the case in England, and GERMAN STANDARDS. refiners' fine metal is sometimes two or three grains under what it is supposed to be ; hence the neces- sity for the further addition of some fine metal as we have already pointed out, when the object in view is to have goods Hall marked ; without which addition it cannot be effected. In Germany there are four silver standards — one for the coinage, and three to be employed in the manufacture of silversmiths' wares ; and in that country the various standards are severally applied in the production of fine filigree and other artistic work. The fineness of the standards is as follows : — Fine silver per lb. troy. As regards the alloy to be employed in the manufacture of these various qualities, copper only must be used, all other metals being forbidden. These standards represent all horne manufactured articles of silver having reference to the standards of that country, as lately appointed by law. The German coinage is the same as the French and contains 36-40ths of fine silver and 4-40ths of copper, or millesimal fineness 900 parts of fine silver and 100 parts of copper per 1,000 parts of Silver ware, 1 1 oz. 8 dwts. Coinage, lo oz. i6 dwts. Silver ware, 9 oz. 12 dwts. Silver ware, 9 oz. o dwts. 950 millims. 900 millims. 800 millims. 750 millims. 72 VARIOUS QUALITIES OF SILVER. metal. The highest standard of all is used for silver wares, and contains 38-40ths of fine silver and 2-40ths of copper, or millesimal fineness 950 parts of fine silver and 50 parts of copper per 1,000 parts of metal. The next German standard for silver wares contains 32-40ths of fine silver and 8-40ths of copper, or millesimal fineness 800 parts of fine silver and 200 parts of copper per 1,000 parts of metal. The commonest German standard employed by the silversmiths of that country contains 30-40ths of fine silver and io-40ths of copper, or millesimal fineness 750 parts of fine silver and 250 parts of copper per 1,000 parts of metal indicated. Remedy 0-003. Silver alloy for the German coinage. oz, dwts. gTS. Fine silver . . . o i8 o Copper ....020 100 Alloy for silver wares of the first standard. oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver . . , o 19 o Copper ....010 100 GERMAN STANDARDS. 73 Alloy for silver wares of the second standard. oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver . . . o i6 o Copper ...,040 100 Alloy for silver wares of the third standard. oz, dwts. grs. Fine silver . • . 0^5 ^ Copper .••.050 100 Silver goods manufactured according to these standards in Germany, which have recently become law, may be alloyed only with copper, and any foreign substance is not allowed to enter into their composition. The remedy permitted in the actual fineness of the silver must not be under three thou- sandths of the standard specified. The goods to be stamped with the number of thousandths and the name of the manufacturer of them, and the correct- ness to be certified by the firm named. Experts are appointed by the Government to test this correctness, and if the provisions of the law have been justly observed a government guarantee mark is applied to them. E CHAPTER VIL Silver Solders : their Uses and Applications. Soldering as applied to silversmith's work is an art which requires great care and practice to perform it neatly and properly. It consists in uniting the various pieces of an article together at their junctions, edges, or surfaces, by fusing an alloy specially prepared for the purpose, and which is more fusible than the metal to be sol- dered. The solder should in every way be well suited to the particular metal to which it is to be applied, and should possess a powerful chemical affinity to it ; if this be not the case, strong, clean, and invisible connections cannot be effected, vy^hilst the progress of the work would be con- siderably retarded. This is partly the cause of inferior manufactures, and not, as might be fre- quently supposed, from the want of skill on the part of the workman who makes them. The best connections are made when the metal PROCESS OF SOLDERING. 75 and solder agree as nearly as possible in uni- formity, that is, as regards fusibility, hardness, and malleability. Experience has proved, more especially in the case of plain and strong work (or work that has to bear a strain in the course of manufacture), that the soldering is more perfect and more tenacious as the point of fusion of the two metals approaches each other ; the solder having a greater tendency to form a more perfect alloy with the metal to which it is applied than under any other conditions. The silver or other metal to be operated upon by soldering being partly of a porous nature, the greater the heat required in the fusion of the solder the more closely are the atoms of the two metals brought into direct relationship ; thus greater solidity is given to the parts united, and which are then capable of forming the maximum of resistance. It is thus obvious that tin should not be employed in forming solders possessing the characteristics we have just described, for being a very fusible metal it greatly increases the fusibility of its alloys ; but when very easy solder is required, and this is some- times the case, especially when zinc has been employed in the preparation of the silver alloy, its addition is a great advantage when it comes to be applied to the work in hand. Solders made with E 2 76 SILVER SOLDERS. tin are not so malleable and tenacious as those prepared without it, as it imparts a brittleness not usually to be found in those regularly employed by silversmiths ; for this reason it is advisable to file it into dustj and apply it in that state to the articles in course of manufacture. The best solders we have found to be those mixed with a little zinc. These may be laminated, rolled or filed into dust ; if the latter, it should be finely done, and this is better for every purpose. Too much zinc, however, should not be added under any conditions, as it has a tendency to eat itself away during wear, thus rendering the articles partly useless either for ornamental or domestic purposes earlier than might be anticipated. Sol- ders thus prepared also act with some disadvan- tage to the workman using them, for they possess the property of evaporating or eating away during the process of soldering, leaving behind scarcely anything to indicate their presence ; consequently the workman has to keep on repeating the process until the connection is made perfect, which is always done at the expense of a quantity of solder as well as loss to the workman as regards time. Solders made from copper and silver only are, generally speaking, too infusible to be applied to all classes of silversmith's work. FUSIBILITY OF SOLDERS. 77 Solders are manufactured of all degrees of hard- ness ; the hardest of all being a preparation of silver and copper in various proportions ; the next being a composition of silver, copper, and zinc ; and the easiest or most fusible being prepared from silver, copper, and tin, or silver, brass, and tin. Arsenic sometimes enters into the compo- sition of silver solders, for promoting a greater degree of fusion ; and we have heard of workmen actually refusing to work with any other solder. The employment of arsenic has, however, a ten- dency to slightly endanger the health of those persons using it in large quantities ; and of late its employment has not been persevered in. In applying solder of whatever composition it is of the utmost importance that the edges or parts to be united should be chemically clean ; and for the purpose of protecting these parts from the action of the air, and oxidation during the soldering process, they are covered by a suitable flux, which not only prevents oxidation, but has also a ten- dency to remove any portion of it left on the parts of the metal to be united. The flux employed is always borax, and it not only effects the objects just pointed out, but greatly facilitates the flow of the solder into the required places. Silver solder should be silver of a little inferior quality to that 78 SILVER SOLDERS. about to be worked up. The various degrees of fusibility of the several solders are occasioned by the different proportions of the component parts of the elements which enter into their existence. For instance, a solder in which tin forms a com- ponent part will flow or fuse much sooner than one in which copper and silver alone enter into composition, or of one wholly composed of copper, silver, and zinc, or of silver and brass ; therefore it must be understood that tin is the best metal for increasing the fusibility of silver solders, and for keeping up their whiteness. Nevertheless it should always be used sparingly, and even then draw- backs will present themselves such as we have already alluded to. It is our intention to give a list of the various solders which have been usually employed with more or less success, so that the silversmith and the art workman will be enabled to select the one most suitable to the particular branch of his trade ; and we contend, from experience in the craft, that success of workmanship mainly depends upon this point. Hardest silver solder, cost 3^^. 9^. per oz. oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver . . . o i6 o Shot copper ,,.040 100 TABLES OF QUALITIES. 79 Hardest silver solder, same as above. oz. dwts. grs Fine silver . . . i o o Shot copper ...050 I 5 o Hard silver solder, cost 3^. td, per oz. oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver . . . o 15 o Brass ..•.050 100 Hard silver solder, same as above. oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver , , . i o o Brass • . . . o 6 i6 "i 6 16 Easy silver solder, cost 3^. id. per oz, oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver . , . o 13 8 Brass .... o 6 16 100 8o SILVER SOLDERS. Easy silver solder, same as above. oz, dwts, grs. Fine silver • • . i o o Brass . • • • o lo o I lo o The silver solders here given are not such as we can confidently recommend to the general silver- smith, having proved them to be very unsatis- factory in certain classes of work. For example, the first solder, except in the case of plain strong work, would be far too infusible to be generally used by the silversmith ; the second, although much more fusible, cannot safely be applied to very fine and delicate wire-work, because the brass in its composition is so uncertain : unless specially prepared by the silversmith, it probably, if pur- chased from the metal warehouses, contains lead ; the latter is injurious, and in process of soldering it burns and eats away, much resembling the appli- cation of burnt sawdust to the work. No really effective work can be produced when the above symptoms present themselves. The same remarks apply to No. 3, which is the most fusible, and when free from lead or other base metal it may be classed as a tolerably fair common solder. In the preparation of the solders to which we are alluding, it is preferable to employ, instead of the PREPARATION OF SOLDERS. 8 1 brass, a composition consisting of a mixture of copper and zinc, in the proportion of two parts of copper to one part of zinc ; the operator then knows of what the solder is composed, and if it should turn out bad he will partly know the cause, and be able to supply a remedy. The solders that we have found to answer our purpose best are composed of the following elements. The first is described again as hard solder, but it is not nearly so hard as the one previously described. Best hard silver solder, 3^. 9^. per oz oz. dwts. grat Fine silver . . . o 16 o Shot copper , « . o 3 12 Spelter . • . . o o 12 100 Best hard silver solder, same as above. oz, dwts. grs. Fine silver « . . i o o Shot copper ...049 Spelter .... o o 15 I 5 o SILVER SOLDERS. Medium silver solder, 3^-. td, per oz. oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver , , , 015 O Shot copper ..,040 Spelter . • • • o i o 100 Medium silver solder, same as above. oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver , • I 0 0 Shot copper 0 5 8 Spelter . 0 I 8 I 6 16 Easy silver solder, is. ^d, per oz. oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver . , . o 14 o Shot copper . . . o 412 Spelter . • • • o i 12 100 Easy silver solder, same as above. oz. dwts. gprs. Fine silver . • . i o o Shot copper , . , o 6 12 Spelter .,,,024 I 8 16 TABLES OF QUALITIES. 83 Common silver solder, 3^. per oz. oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver • • . o 12 12 Shot copper ...060 Spelter • • • • o i 12 100 Common silver solder, same as above. oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver ,,,100 Shot copper • • • o 9 15 Spelter .•.•029 I 12 o The whole of the above-named solders will bleach or whiten properly if applied to silver of the suitable quality for such purposes. We have used copper and spelter in our silver solders, because we have found from experience that the fewer number of times a solder is melted the better it is for all purposes. This result of our experience is in direct opposition to those authors who have professed to treat upon this subject, and who can have had but a small amount of real practical knowledge, for it is argued by them that the oftener a solder is melted the more properly does it become mixed, and, consequently, the more fit is it for the workman's use. To such arguments 84 SILVER SOLDERS. we are prepared to give a blank denial, and our reasons for so doing we will state further on in this treatise. There are various other silver solders used by silversmiths ; some few of which it will be as well perhaps, while we are on the point, to enumerate : — Silver solder for enamelling, cost 3^. 9^. per oz. OZ. dwtS. gTS. Fine silver . • . i o o Shot copper •••050 ^ 5 o Silver solder for enamelling, cost 3^. id, per oz. oz. dwts. gTS. Fine silver "... i o o Shot copper • . . o 10 o I 10 o Easy silver solder for filigree work, cost 3^. 9^. per oz. oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver 0 16 0 Shot copper 0 0 12 Composition . 0 3 12 I 0 0 TABLES OF QUALITIES. 85 Quick running silver solder, cost 3^". per oz. oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver • . . I o o Composition ,..0100 Pure tin • • • • o 2 o I 12 o Silver solder for chains, cost 35^. per oz. oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver ... I o o Shot copper . , • o lo o Pure spelter •,•020 I 12 o Easy solder for chains, cost 35. per oz. oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver . . , i o o Composition . • , o 10 o Pure spelter ..,020 I 12 o Common silver solder, cost 2s. gd, per oz. oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver • • . i o o Shot copper . , , o 12 o Pure spelter .•.030 I 15 o 86 SILVER SOLDERS. Common easy solder, cost 2S. gd. per oz. oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver , . . I o o Composition • • • o 12 o Pure spelter ...030 I 15 o Silver solder with arsenic, cost 3^. gd, per oz. oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver . . , i o o Shot copper ..,030 Yellow arsenic ..020 "i 5 o Silver solder with arsenic, cost 35'. 6d. per oz. oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver . . . i o o Composition .,,060 Yellow arsenic . • o i o 170 Easy silver solder, cost 3^. 2d. per oz. oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver . . . i o o Composition .,.050 Tinsel ....050 I 10 o TABLES OF QUALITIES. 87 Common easy solder, cost 2s. ()d. per oz. oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver • I 0 0 Tinsel . • 0 10 0 Arsenic • • 0 5 0 I 15 0 Another common silver solder. oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver ...100 Composition • • . 015 o Arsenic •.♦.016 1 16 6 A very common solder. oz. dwts. grs, ' Fine silver . . , i o o Composition . . . I o O White arsenic . • I o o 3 Q o The solders here given will be found amply sufficient to select from, for every operation of the silversmith, and will answer the several purposes for which they have been described. "When tin and arsenic are employed in the composition of solder, either together or separately, they should be withheld until the more infusible metals with 88 SILVER SOLDERS. which they are to be united have become melted ; the tin or tinsel should then be added, and when this is well melted with the mass, fling on the top the arsenic, let it melt, stir it well together, and pour it out quickly into an ingot mould already prepared for its reception. "When silver and brass, or silver and composition, alone form the component parts of the solder, these metals may be put into the melting-pot together, well fused, stirred, and poured out as before. Solders into which volatile metals enter, upon repeated meltings, become hard, brittle, and drossy, and are therefore not so good as when the metal has received only one melting ; it is for this reason that we have always preferred to manufacture our solders from metals which have not been melted before, or from those which have gone through the process as few a number of times as possible. The mode of soldering gold and silver is as follows : Take the solder and roll it out thin between the flattening rollers, or file it into dust, according to the kind of work in hand. If filed into dust, it is all the better if done very fine ; and if reduced to a flat state, which should be tolerably thin, cut it into little bits, or pallions, which may easily be performed with a pair of hand-shears, PROCESS OF SOLDERING. 89 length-ways and afterwards cross-ways. When this is done, take the work which is to be soldered, join it together by means of fine binding-wire (very thin iron wire), or lay it upon the pumice so that the joinings can come close together, and will not be liable to move during the process ; wet the joinings with a solution of borax and water, mixed into a thick paste, applying it with a small camel- hair pencil ; then lay the bits or pallions of solder upon the parts to be united, and having placed the article upon some suitable object, take your blow- ing instrument (Fig. 1 6) and blow with it, through Fig. 16. Blowpipes. a gas jet, a keen flame upon the solder in order to melt it ; this will render the unification of the parts complete and compact. When filed solder is used, the process of charging the article is rather different from the above. In the latter case the filings are com- monly put into a small cup- shaped vessel (Fig. 17), in most cases the bottom of a tea-cup, or some other similar vessel, being Fig. 17. soider-dish. used for the purpose ; a lump of borax is then taken 90 SILVER SOLDERS. and rubbed upon a piece of slate, to which a little water is occasionally added during the rubbing; when this solution attains the consistency of cream, it is put into the solder-dish and well mixed with the solder. This is then applied to the article to be soldered, by means of a charger, consisting of a piece of round metal wire, flattened at one end, and shaped for the purpose it has to serve. The joinings, when this kind is employed, require no boraxing with the pencil, as described under pallion solder ; the borax being intermixed with the solder flushes with it through the joinings to be united, thus rendering any further application unnecessary. The process to which we are alluding is called " hard solder- ing,'' and cannot be applied to metals of a fusible nature ; neither must it be attempted in the case of goods bearing the name of plated, which are put together with soft or pewter solder, similar to that used by tinsmiths and gasfitters. If there should be any soft solder about the article, to be soldered by the means we are describing, it would be almost certain to destroy it, the soft solder having such an affinity for entering into combination with metals more infusible than itself when overheated. There is an art in soldering greater than some people would believe. The heat required is of vari- ous degrees, some articles requiring a broad rough SOLDER FOR FILIGREE WORK. 9 1 flame, others a smooth one, and others again a fine pointed one. All these circumstances connected with the process, together with others which we could detail, proving that it is an art only to be acquired by practice, must be considered enough ; and we proceed to observe that the skilful jeweller in soldering a large piece of work will direct the flame of the gas jet to all parts of it, until it is tolerably hot, and then return to the spot to be soldered, and by a very dexterous movement of the flame, produced by the blowpipe, increase the heat at that spot until the solder has flushed and the parts are rendered thoroughly secure. So far as some of the work of the silversmith is concerned, the process of soldering is a very delicate operation, and ought not to be undertaken by an unpractised hand. The method of preparing solder for filigree work is worthy of a passing notice. It is called by the Germans Lemaille solder. In the first place it is reduced to very fine filings, mixed with burnt borax powdered fine, and in this state it is sprinkled from a spouted grater over the work to be sol- dered. The English filigree workers commonly use clean filed solder, and by means of the camel- hair pencil apply a solution of borax to the work, and then sprinkle the dry solder upon it from the grater. 92 SILVER SOLDERS. In Vienna a kind of powdered borax is employed, called Streu loraXy or sprinkle borax. It is composed of the following ingredients, which should be gently- annealed to expel their water of crystallization, the whole well pounded and mixed together, and sprinkled over the parts to be joined from the spouted grater as before : — oz. dwts. grs. Calcined borax . . . o 17 12 Carbonate of soda . . . o i 12 Common salt . . . , o i o 100 The object of this mixture is to prevent the rising of the solder, and to facilitate its flushing. Too much of it should not, however, be put with solder in the grater at one time, as it is as objectionable as too much borax applied in the ordinary way, but every workman will learn from experience concerning these matters. We have tried this mix- ture, prepared with filed solder in the ordinary way, and found it advantageous at first ; but its greatest drawback is the turning of the solder yellow if not quickly used upon the work after mixing, thus rendering the solder permanently injured. For this reason we have had to abandon its employ- ment in the wet state. But, in its dry state, to the silversmith for filigree purposes it is likely to be of SOLDER FOR FILIGREE WORK. advantage. It may be remarked that this prepara- tion encumbers the work with a great deal more flux than borax does, and consequently it requires to be more often boiled out during the period of soldering together the component parts. This is effected by boiling in a week pickle of sulphuric acid and water, composed of the following propor- tions : one part of acid to thirty parts of water. CHAPTER VIIL On the Melting of Silver. The processes of melting and properly mixing silver with its alloys in a crucible are among the first operations of the silversmith, and are, moreover, of great importance in the production of intimate and homogeneous alloys. In order to effect these, how- ever simple they may appear, various precautions are necessary, and certain principles require carry- ing out to arrive at the best possible results, otherwise a great loss or waste of material may take place. To direct attention to those principles, which from very careful attention to the subject we have found to answer best, will first be our aim, and if we succeed in rendering some little service to our fellow- workers in the craft to which our toil and leisure have been devoted we shall feel highly gratified. The weighing of the component metals, the selection of the crucible, the charging of it, and WEIGHING THE METAL. 95 the attention it requires whilst in the furnace are considerations to which we cannot too strongly call attention. The regulations with regard to weighing should be strictly and accurately carried out. The best and safest plan is, after the various metals have been separately weighed, to re-weigh them, this time collectively, in order to ascertain whether the total weight corresponds with the previous calculation ; if it does, the mixture has been properly prepared. We have known both time and trouble saved by the adoption of this pre- caution, after mistakes had occurred which could not have been detected until the weighing of the bar of metal had taken place after melting. There are various kinds of crucibles manufactured for the use of the precious metal workers. Crucibles were so-called from originally being impressed by the alchemists with the sign of the cross. They are calculated to bear very high temperatures, and consist of English, Hessian, Cornish, Black-lead, and Plumbago. The last two are by far the best ; the plumbago, however, being the hardest, and capable of standing the highest temperature, is to be preferred before all others. It will also stand more frequent meltings than any of the rest. Such crucibles have been known to withstand the heat of the furnace for upwards of fifty times without 96 ON THE MELTING OF SILVER. giving way. The wear of them is very strong and resisting, as they only gradttally become reduced in thickness, so that it is easy to distinguish their unfitness for use. Fluxes act on earthern crucibles, particularly English at a high temperature, whilst nitre and carbonate of soda soon destroy them. Fluxes are necessary in most cases of metallic reductions : they protect the metal from the air, and dissolve impurities. They are of several kinds, as follows : — Vegetable charcoal. Carbonate of potash* Carbonate of soda. Common salt. Salammoniac, Sal-enixum. Saltpetre. Borax. Sandiver. Yellow soap. Black flux. White flux. Crude tartar. Brown potash. Sub-carbonate of potash. All these fluxes have occasional duties to perform, and are therefore of great service to the metallurgist. To prevent the cracking or flying of the crucible, when newly employed, it should, before being charged with the precious metal, be well annealed; that is, heated to redness upon a very slow fire — one FUSION OF THE METALS. 97 that is gradually going down, and in which there is no blaze is to be preferred, because the flame has a tendency, on the introduction of a new cruci- ble, to make it fly to pieces. When it has become red-hot, if a cold bar of iron be introduced it will soon show whether there are any cracks, and if so the crucible should be rejected ; on the contrary, if it withstands this test it may be placed aside until required for use, when it may be employed with perfect safety in the melting of silver and its alloys. When copper and silver only form the alloys of the silversmith, they should both be added to the crucible at the commencement of the operation ; and it is the best plan to put the copper at the bottom, because it is the most infusible metal. By doing so, it will receive the greatest degree of heat, which in jewellers' furnaces always comes upwards and the higher specific gravity of the silver has a tendency to force that metal down- wards ; consequently, when the two metals have become fused, upon well stirring — which should be done with an iron stirrer tapered at the point, and previously heated to redness — a perfectly homoge- neous mass will be the result. When the more fusible metals of which we have spoken are to form the component parts of the mixture, different F 9 8 ON THE MELTING OF SILVER. treatment with regard to them will be required. They should not be added at the commencement of the operation, but should be dealt with afterwards, in the following manner : — Zinc is one of the more fusible metals, and is sometimes employed by the silversmith in his alloys, for the purpose of imparting a greater degree of whiteness to them, as well as rendering inferior silver more easily bleached or w^hitened ; thus assisting to bring back the natural colour of fine silver to manufactured articles, which have partially lost it by the addition of alloy of some other colour. Zinc, when employed in silver alloys, should be cautiously used, and care should be taken not to add too much to a given quantity of material. The solder used with silver-zinc alloys should be far more fusible than that em- ployed with the other alloys. If too much zinc be added in the preparation of these alloys, in the course of the work, particularly in the process of soldering, they have a tendency to sweaty and some- times to eat the metals into holes around the parts to be united ; such alloys, therefore, render this process very difficult to perform, besides entailing more labour in the production of a clean and smooth finish. In melting an alloy of silver, copper, and zinc, ZINC IN SILVER ALLOYS. 99 the silver and copper should first be melted in a plumbago crucible of the form shown in Fig 18, and well stirred together in order that they may become properly mixed. The zinc is sold in flat cakes under the name of spel- ter, and, when required, is usually cut up with a chisel into pieces of various weights suitable for the object in view. When the copper and silver have become well incorporated, the mixture should be pro- Fig. pium^^cTcrucibie tected from the air by a formeitmg. suitable flux, charcoal being the best for this pur- pose. The most suitable time to add it to the crucible in the furnace is when the metals are just beginning to fuse. This flux covers the whole of the surface of the molten mass, and so prevents the action of the air from destroying some of the baser metal. The charcoal should be per- fectly pure and in a finely divided state, for if adulterated with any gritty matter (and sometimes such is the case) a very indifferent working mate- rial is produced, the evil results of which show themselves in every stage of manufacture. These instructions with regard to melting the more in- F 2 lOO ON THE MELTING OF SILVER. fusible metals having been carried out, the zinc is taken with a long pair of tongs (Fig. 1 9), and held within the furnace, over the mouth of the crucible, Fig. 19. Tongs for Melting. until the temperature has almost reached the melt- ing point, when it should be carefully dropped into the fused mass below, quickly stirred, so that it may become intimately mixed with the other metals, and at once withdrawn from the furnace and poured into a suitable ingot mould (Fig. 20). The ingot mould should be clean and smoothinside, slightly greased, and dusted over with fine vege- table charcoal ; this latter sub- stance prevents the metal from Fig. 20. Ingot Mould. adhering to the sides of the mould. It is, perhaps, almost unnecessary to state that the ingot mould requires heating to a certain tempera- ture before the melted composition is poured in. MELTING PROCESS. lOI otherwise serious spouting takes place, resulting in a great loss of metal. On the other hand, the operator should be cautious not to over-heat it, as the same evil consequences may result. The bar of metal upon cooling should be weighed, and the difference — as most meltings show a little — noted. This is loss^ but it will be very little, if the above instructions have been strictly adhered to from the beginning of the ope- ration. With the charcoal flux we have referred to, very nice and clean bars of metal can be pro- duced. This flux is always floating upon the sur- face of the mixture, and, with a little dexterity in the pouring, it can be prevented from coming out of the crucible with the metal ; its proper place is at the end of the pouring. When tin is employed, either in alloys or solders, its treatment is similar to that described for zinc ; such alloys should not be kept too long in the furnace after they have become fused, as they rapidly become oxidized, especially if brought into contact with the air. The waste in silver, and in fact of all alloys, is entirely dependent on the duration of the time of fusion. If it is prolonged after the addition of the fusible metals, the loss is greater in every case, than when once melted. The metals should be sub- jected to the heat of the furnace for the shortest 102 ON THE MELTING OF SILVER. possible period. The alloys of silver with zinc would lose more than the alloys of silver with tin, because zinc rapidly volatilises when heated above the temperature of its fusion, and this is especially the case when it enters into combination with silver and copper in the fused state; its vapours can be seen to rise and burn in the air, producing light and white flaky fumes, and, chemically speak- ing, forming the protoxide of zinc. With care and manipulative skill during the process of fusion, the proportion of waste can be reduced to a mini- mum ; and when this is exactly ascertained an allowance can be made in the preparation of the mixture for the crucible. From the above remarks it will be apparent that when both tin and zinc form component parts of a mixture, either to be used as an alloy or as solder, the tin should be added to the other metals, and well stirred, so as to obtain an intimate mixture, before the addition is made of the zinc. Scrap silver should be carefully sorted before undergoing the process of re-melting, and if pos- sible all foreign substances removed. It may, if preferred to work it in that way, be melted into a separate bar, or otherwise used as an addition to a new mixture. When, however, it is separately melted, a flux, such as carbonate of soda, may be LEMEL. 103 employed, on account of its cheapness, in small proportions to the charcoal flux already alluded to. In brittle and troublesome alloys we have found charcoal and a small quantity of borax extremely effective. Saltpetre is a very useful flux in dis- solving impurities, but in some alloys its presence is injurious. Sandiver will remove iron or steel from the mixture. Corrosive sublimate destroys lead and tin. We have found the sub-carbonate of potash one of the best fluxes for silver, when matters have not been quite so straight as they should be in the working of the metal ; it is used in melting the difficult alloy of 1 8-carat gold, and is considered a secret not generally known to the trade. Salammoniac is an excellent flux for pro- ducing clean and bright ingots and tough alloys. We invariably use it with all our alloys, mixed in small quantities with charcoal, and prefer it to all others. Lemel, that is the filings and turnings produced during the process of manufacture, should have quite a separate method of treatment. It is best prepared for the crucible by passing it through a fine sieve, afterwards thoroughly burning it in an iron ladle, and then intimately mixing it with a flux of the following nature and propor- tions : — I04 ON THE MELTING OF SILVER. Silver dust .... 24 parts Carbonate of soda ... 4 ,> Common salt ... 2 „ Sal-enixum .... i ,, 31 parts. The sal-enixum prevents the rising of the mix- ture in the crucible — which should be of the skittle shape (Fig. 21) — and keeps it from overflowing; it also possesses a refining capacity the same as salt- petre, and is much cheaper. The burning of the lemel has a great tendency to destroy all organic matter that would be likely to cause the mixture to overflow during the period of fusion; but if such a thing should be at all likely to take place, the addition of a little dried Fig. 21. Fireclay Crucible common Salt would remedy the for Lemel. ^^jj^ ^ Small quantity of which ought always to be provided for the purpose. The common carbonate of soda is also a cheap and useful flux to the silversmith. Five-sixths of the above flux should be well mixed with the stated propor- tion of lemel, then placed in the pot, and the one- sixth remaining placed upon the top of the mix- ture, when it may at once be transferred to the MELTING LEAIEL. 105 furnace. Great heat is required in this operation, and it also requires careful supervision to prevent, if possible, waste of material. When the mixture has become perfectly liquid, the heat of the furnace should not be allowed to decrease, but continued for half an hour longer, and if the use of it be not further required, the fire may then be allowed gradually to die out. The mixture will require repeated stirrings during the period of fusion, in order to dissolve such portions as might otherwise not come immediately under the action of the flux. When the operation of fusion has been completed, the crucible is withdrawn and allowed to cool, the solidification of the metal is then perfect, and it may be recovered by breaking the pot at the base, when it will fall out in a lump corresponding with the shape of the crucible. The lump of metal should then be carefully weighed, the loss ascer- tained — which always varies in proportion to the amount of organic matter contained therein ; it may then be sold to the refiner, or exchanged for new metal. In this process it will be observed that the crucible is broken every time a fusion takes place, consequently some little expense is incurred in providing crucibles for the purpose. To obviate which the following plan may be economically and F 3 io6 ON THE MELTING OF SILVER. successfully employed ; and especially when the metal is sold to the refiner by assay, the method about to be described will be found most advan- tageous, for it should be borne in mind that the lump of metal from the previous fusion has to be again run down in another crucible and poured into an ingot mould before the refiner will consent to take his assay from it. In this latter process the whole work is performed in one fusion, and the ex- pense of a new crucible thereby saved. The flux employed in the reduction of the metal is also When the lemel has become properly fused, for facilitating which it is repeatedly stirred with a thin iron rod, it is withdrawn and poured into an ingot mould prepared for it as previously described. The considerably reduced. The plan is performed after the following manner : Fig. 22. Plumbago Cruci- ble for Lemel. Take a plumbago crucible of the shape shown in Fig. 22, and capable of holding the required mixture ; put the lemel into it, and then place on the top one ounce of finely powdered carbon- ate of soda ; this is all the flux the mixture requires, and it is then quite ready for the furnace. MELTING LEMEL. 107 flux and other organic matter, which always accu- mulates upon mixtures of this kind, is held back by the timely application of a thin piece of flat wood to the mouth of the crucible. After the withdrawal of the bar of metal from the ingot mould, it is cooled and weighed, and then it is quite ready for the operations of the refiner. CHAPTER TX. On the Working of Silver. Having reached a most important and very in- teresting part of our subject, viz. the working of silver, and being desirous of making this treatise useful to the silver- worker in all the branches of his art, it is our intention to enlarge upon these pro- cesses — which are purely mechanical — and some- what minutely to describe the various manipula- tions and arrangements required in the production of the wares of the silversmith. After the removal of the bar of m.etal from the ingot mould, it should be plunged into a vessel of cold water, dried, and then carefully weighed. At this .stage of the process it is ready for the operation of rolling. This process, so far as it concerns large ingots of the metal, is a distinct branch of the trade, and is carried on in separate premises established by certain firms for the pur- pose. These establishments are called " rolling- ROLLING-MILLS. 1 09 mills/' the machinery used in them (which is power- ful and costly) being moved by steam-power, the reduction of the bars of metal to their various sizes is soon effected. The very thin ribbon-shaped metal is produced by submitting it to the action of rollers of smaller dimensions, one after the other, until the desired thinness is obtained. The bars of metal are taken to these mills by a man whose special duty it is to watch over them during the processes of rolling and annealing, otherwise it would be very easy to have an ingot of gold or silver exchanged for one of base metal, the mill companies not being responsible for the material intrusted to their care for rolling ; hence the necessity for the porter's services, to watch over his employer's interests. To prevent acci- dently exchanging the bars of metal, through their great similarity to each other, it is the usual thing for the men in charge of them to put a special mark upon the property of each person, previous to the process of annealing. This mark is applied by means of a piece of chalk or soap, and is not removable by heat. The annealing is performed in large iron muffles, heated to redness and kept in that condition by flues ; the bars which require annealing being placed upon a piece of sheet-iron which slides into the muffle, and there they remain no ON THE WORKING OF SILVER. with the doors closed until they have become red- hot. It is more particularly during this operation that each person's property requires marking and watching, because of the number of bars admitted at one time into the muffle ; and unless the greatest care be exercised at such a time some mistake is almost sure to occur. A register is kept of the weight of the metal sent to the mill for the purpose of being rolled into the required shapes and sizes by the manu- facturer, who afterwards works it up into different wares and utensils. The metal is also weighed on its admittance to the mill, by the clerk of the works, and again on its passage out, and a com- parison of the weights registered ; but in Birming- ham, in some cases, this has been so irregularly performed that great discrepancies have actually taken place in the weights at times, and it has led to the establishment of another rolling-mill for gold and silver, in which the proprietors take upon themselves the whole responsibility and care of metals intrusted to their charge for the above purpose. The method pursued by them in respect to their business is as follows : A manufacturer sends a bar of metal to be rolled, carefully noting the exact weight and size to which it is to be reduced upon a proper order head. This weight ROLLING-MILLS. Ill is carefully tested at the mill, and if found correct, an invoice is given in exchange, upon which is entered the cost of rolling and the time when the work will be completed. The messenger then goes away, returning at the time stated to bring away the rolled metal. The advantages this system presents over the others are obvious ; the return of the full weight of the metal is guaranteed by responsible persons, the messenger is at liberty during the time occupied in rolling to follow his other duties, the weighing of the respective metals is far more accurately performed both in and out of the mill, besides greater satisfaction being given both to the manu- facturer and the roller, the reciprocation of confi- dence between each, being among some of the additional advantages which might be enumerated. Messrs. Kemp, of Birmingham, deserve the thanks of the jewellery community for their enterprising efforts in the establishment of a system so admi- rably suited to the requirements of the trade. The following table gives the charges at the present time for rolling bars of silver ; — 112 ON THE WORKING OF SILVER. Table of the Cost of Silver Rolling. r d. Under 6* 0 6 A.bove 6 and under 12 0 Q 12 ,, 18 0 0 10 i8 „ 2"; 0 I 0 2c; 3D 0 I 2 35 45 0 1 6 45 55 0 I 9 55 70 0 2 0 70 85 0 2 3 85 „ 100 0 2 6 100 ,, 115 0 2 9 115 130 0 3 0 Above this 2s. 6d. per 100 ozs. It is a usual thing at all rolling establishments to provide slitting-rolls for those who choose to avail themselves of that mode of cutting up their metal. These rolls are used for the purpose of cutting stout bars of metal into strips suitable for wire-drawing, thus dispensing with the older process of cutting with a pair of vice shears, which method was slow and somewhat uncertain in the production of good work. The slitting-rolls con- sist of circular barrels, after the manner of the "breaking-down" rolls, only of course much smaller in diameter, and with this exception, the slitting- rolls have square grooves cut into each barrel, the projecting portion of each corresponding with the hollow of the other, whereas the breaking-down rolls are perfectly smooth and plain. Rollers some- WIRE-DRAWING. I 1 3 thing similar to those we have described are used by wire-drawers to facilitate the speedy reduction of the metal, the difference being in the construction and action of the grooves. In the grooves of the latter, which are inserted farther apart, the hollows take a half-round shape, and unlike the slitting- rollers, during the revolution of the barrels, the grooves in this case directly meet each other, and thus produce a strip of wire almost round. It is almost needless to remark that wire-rolling requires some amount of practical knowledge to perform it properly. The manipulations indispensable to the art of silver working are so varied and so nume- rous that we are at a comparative loss which part of the process to consider first ; however, if we follow the course of the workman with regard to the production of the various manufactures of his art, we shall perhaps not be far wrong in our desire to effect the purpose we have in view. In commencing to enlarge upon these mechani- cal processes we may at once state that it is our intention to refrain from going into the whole art of wire-drawing, because that process has been somewhat minutely alluded to in our other work recently published in the interests of the gold- smiths ; the details of which are there fully described. 114 ON THE WORKING OF SILVER. The draw-plat^, Fig. 23, which is the principal tool of the modern wire-drawer, was unknown in this country until the middle of the sixteenth century, when it w^as introduced by Christopher Schultz, Fig. 23. Draw-plate. a Saxon, from France. It was sup- posed to have been the invention of a native of that country named Archal. The draw-plate had been in use some years on the Continent previous to its introduction into England. The old method of making wire was upon the anvil, by means of the hammer; and those who manipulated in this art were termed wiresmiths at that period. The best form of draw-plate consists of a piece of steel about nine or ten inches long, one and a quarter to one and a half inch broad, and about half an inch thick, each containing a number of conical holes of various sizes, becoming smaller in suc- cession until the last hole in the plate is reached, when another plate, corresponding in size, having smaller graduated holes, is employed, and the wire drawn through it ; and so on, until the proper size has been obtained. The drawing of stout pieces of wire is effected very readily by means of the draw-bench (Fig. 24), and the thinner pieces, by the application of draw- tongs (Fig. 25), held in the hands of the operator, FINE WIRE-DRAWlINti-. II5 and made to do service by swinging the body backwards. Very fine wire is now drawn by Fig. 24. Draw-bench for Wire. means of an apparatus called a drum (Fig. 26), revolving upon a perpendicular pin, the exterior of which receives the wire and prevents it from becoming entangled. When the end of the wire has finally passed through the draw-plate, the whole coil is carefully removed from the drum (which is made slightly conical in form for facili- Fig. 27. Skeleton Frame or Swift Fig. 26. Drum used by wire- used by wire-drawers. drawers. tating the process) and placed upon a skeleton frame made to receive it (Fig. 27); it is then in Il6 ON THE WORKING OF SILVER. proper form for its passage through the next hole of the draw-plate. In the production of very fine wire, the metal, after passing a few times through the draw-plate, requires annealing, as its fibres become so con- densed and hardened that it is impossible to repeat the operation without some risk of the wire breaking. For fine wire the annealing is repeated five or six times during its passage through the draw-plate ; for stouter kinds the annealing need not be so frequent. This process produces a scale or oxide upon the surface of the wire, which should be removed before the continuation of the drawing takes place, which is generally done by an immersion for a time in very dilute sulphuric acid pickle; or its passage may be assisted through the draw-plate by the application of some lubricating substance, such as beeswax, or a mix- ture of beeswax and oil, which enables it the more readily to pass through it. In the progress of the wire-drawing the holes have a tendency to become enlarged ; these are made smaller again, by re- peated blows upon the front of the plate with a somewhat pointed hammer (Fig. 28), and then opened from the back with a tapered steel punch, such as is shown in the woodcut (Fig. 29). The hardening and tempering of the punch is of DRAW-PLATES. 117 importance. A gauge-plate is used in all estab- lishments for the purpose of determining the size of the wire. The hammering should not take place upon Fig. 28. Knocking-up Hammer. a hardened draw-plate, as it would fly to pieces : it is only those known as soft which should receive such treat- ment ; and those, by a continual altera- tion of the holes, gradually become hard and require annealing at intervals. Draw-plates for wire-drawing purposes are mostly cylindrical in form, but they are employed in various degrees of fine- ness and in different shapes ; such as oval, oblong, half-round, square, fluted, star, sexagon, triangular, and other complex sections, for the production of correspond- ing wires, all of which receive similar treatment to that above described. The process of wire-drawing, in con- nection with the art of the silversmith, i is more particularly employed in the manufacture of chains, in which branch a p^^, 29. Round very large quantity of silver is consumed. ^^^^^ ^^nch. This branch of the craft is almost a purely mechani- cal one, but, nevertheless, there are some designs in Il8 ON THE WORKING OF SILVER. chains which require a considerable knowledge of art for the proper execution of them. It is, how- ever, in wrought or hand-made work that true art is made to play so conspicuous a part ; for it is here that perfect workmanship, together with great skill and taste, are required in the manufac- ture of an article. " Wrought work was one of the earliest productions of the goldsmith and silver- smith, and it still remains the true artistic method, although it has been superseded by others of a Fig. 30. Hammer for Wrought Work, j^gg CXpensivC charaCtcr ; such as stamping, chasing, engraving, enamelling, casting, &c., to which the older processes of orna- mentation and decoration by means of hammer- ing have given place. Wrought work is produced by hammering and soldering the various pieces or ornaments together; and one of the very first things to be attended to in the production of this kind of work is propor- tion, a knowledge of which is indispensable to true art-workmanship ; for the piece of metal which is to be operated upon by the hammer should be of the proper size, so as to require none to be cut off afterwards. Every portion of a design WROUGHT WORK. II9 should be wrought out of the piece of metal sepa- rately, and soldered in its proper place upon the article in process of manufacture. When circular forms have to be raised or flanged by the employ- ment of the hammer, as in the case of a raised or flanged brooch ^^bezil/' the modus operandi is as follows : — Take a piece of metal of the exact size and shape, turn the two ends together from the longitudinal direction, and unite them by solder- ing ; when this is done, the circular band of metal is taken and flanged by means of the hammer and a miniature anvil, placed upon a stout piece of wood which the workman renders secure by placing be- tween his knees, the pressure of which retains it steadily in its place during the various manipula- tions performed upon it ; this kind of tool is termed a " sparrow-hawk " — a re- presentation of it is given in Fig. 31. The work is effected by a series of blows dealt with the hammer in regular concentric circles, the bezil all the time gra- dually working round the pointed end of the sparrow- hawk. It requires great skill and practice to pro- duce the proper shape, and to keep all parts of the 120 ON THE WORKING OF SILVER. metal of equal thickness. The bezils may be produced in this manner round or oval, as well as other complex shapes ; the hammering taking place according to the shape required. When raised or ornamental brooch bezils, such as concave or convex patterns, are to be made, the means adopted in their execution are somewhat more complicated than the mode of flanging above al- luded to. A tool called a " swage " is employed, which partakes of many forms, the pattern or orna- mental device which the metal is required to take being the shape of the swage, or otherwise cut upon it. The metal is easily raised to take the proper design, by a very careful application of the hammering process. Sometimes in silver-working the form of the object to be manufactured is of such a nature as not to allow of the use of the swage tool, and this is more particularly the case in the manufacture of plate. Such things, for instance, as cups or tankards which have raised ornamental surfaces, and which have to be executed after the vessel is roughly finished, require altogether a different tool for the effecting of such purposes. The one com- monly employed in operations of this description consists of a bent piece of steel, upon one end of which is cut the device required; this end being CHASING. 121 turned up to the required height for raising the design, and the other end being bent in an opposite direction, which, when required for use, is secured in a vice. The workman, in executing the design upon the object in hand, places it upon the "snarl- ing-iron (for such the tool is called) at the part to be raised, and there holds it securely while an- other man strikes the piece of steel at the top of the angle, or just above where it is secured in the vice, the reaction of the steel wire then throws out the metal, in accordance with the device or pattern cut on the end of it. Designs are only roughly raised in this manner, the perfecting of them being performed by the application of various kinds of chasing tools. To prevent a change in the form of the object undergoing this operation, it is filled with a composition formed of pitch, resin, and brick-dust, in the following proportions : — The preparation of the cement is as follows : — Reduce the brick- dust to a very fine powder, and pass it through a fine sieve ; then take the other ingredients and melt them in an iron ladle or other Pitch Resin Brick-dust 4 parts. 4 » 2 „ 10 parts. G 122 ON THE WORKING OF SILVER. suitable vessel over a slow fire, stirring them well together ; when this has taken place, the mixture will present a thin liquid appearance, which is the time for using the brick-dust. This should be added in small quantities at a time, and well stirred together, until the mass has become toler- ably thick. It is then poured out either upon the floor, or into some suitable vessel provided for its reception. While undergoing the operation of Figs. 32, 33. Snarling-tool, and its mode of application for raising. chasing, the lower part of the object is preserved from injury, by being laid on a sand-bag. The illustrations, Figs. 32 and 33, represent the snarl- ing-tool, and its mode of application to the work of the silversmith. The progress of the silversmith's art, in conjunc- tion with the researches and discoveries in the mode of working the precious metal during the last DEVELOPMENT OF THE ART. 1 23 Sixty years, have wrought a great change both in the style and manner of workmanship. Before the period referred to, the gold and silversmiths' trade was in its lowest possible condition ; partly, no doubt, on account of the war then raging on the continent of Europe, and partly because the silver- smith at that time was not allowed to manufacture articles of any standard inferior to that of the coinage of 1 1 ozs. 2 dwts. Until the peace of Waterloo, few people were busy but the gun-maker, and other smiths who were able to work at similar occupa- tions ; but with respect to most other trades, the men did all they were capable of, in order to earn their daily bread. If at that time the silver trade had been specially cultivated, the art, as regards its progress, would have met with many drawbacks, as compared with the present time ; the knowledge of the workmen in the production of finished work was not equal to that to be found upon the best articles now manufactured. And although for- bidden by law to work in inferior metal, they would have been incapable of effecting the beautiful sur- faces which modern articles of inferior quality are made to present. The recent scientific discoveries, both chemical and mechanical, that have taken place during the last sixty or seventy years, have wrought a great change in the general conditions, G 2 124 ON THE WORKING OF SILVER. as well as in the mode of the manufacture of silver wares. We have said that previous to the year 1815 all was dark and obscure with the precious metal worker, but from that period the work gradually- rose in artistic excellence, and the trade very slowly improved ; the cause of this no doubt being due, in a great measure, to the security afforded as the result of peace, and with it a revival of the industrial occupations. With the increased industries of the nation arose the pleasures and pastimes of the people, and racing became a national sport. This kind of pleasure soon led to an increase in the work of the silversmith, in consequence of the demand for racing cups, which gave opportunities for the artistic excellence of design in their manufacture ; and the silversmiths who made them soon acquired a prestige as Art-manufacturers. The demand for work of that and a similar kind led to the employ- ment of regular designers and modellers, who gradually improved both the designs and the work in different parts of the country. At the period of which we are speaking, polished or burnished silver goods were most in demand, the modern processes of surface finishing not being then understood. The introduction of the French style of work in filigree soon afterwards caused a ARTISTIC WORK. 125 demand for that class of work; and the attention of those in the trade was then turned in that direction for a time, and others springing up, the silver- smith's and goldsmith's trade generally began to assume a position of importance. This kind of work required no polishing and very little artificial finish ; besides being exceedingly light in weight and graceful in appearance. It required fine mate- rial for its manufacture. In England filigree work has been superseded by other processes, but in India, and in other parts of the East, it is still cultivated to perfection. Silver and gold filigree is also manufactured in the Ionian Islands, in Switzerland, and in some parts of Germany and France, where labour is cheap. In the two latter countries it is made from a very inferior material to that used in India. Silver filigree work in this country was soon found not to answer all the requirements of modern society, so far as regarded its utility, durability, and cheapness ; fashion therefore demanded some- thing different. It is worthy of remark that while this class of jewellery in both gold and silver was so much in vogue for ladies' wear, the old-fashioned seals and keys had undergone a change, and the chasing of them in representation of filigree orna- mentation had become the fashion for gentlemen's 126 ON THE WORKING OF SILVER. wear. The processes of the manufacture of filigree wire and its mode of application to the work of the artist, have been considered in a previous chapter, further detailed information is therefore rendered unnecessary. When filigree work was no longer used, the fashion changed into " stamped or " struck-up " ornament. Small pieces of metal were struck up by means of the hammer and punch, or by the use of the hand-press or stamp ; in the former case a lead cake would be prepared, composed of a mixture of lead and tin, and upon it the various ornaments would be produced from the flat metal, corresponding with the pattern of the punch employed for the purpose ; in the latter a small die (Fig. 34) would be employed with the pattern sunk upon it ; this would have an aperture through it, the dimensions of the off-side being generally rather large, gradually ' becoming smaller towards the front sur- face, which takes the form, in general outline, of the desired pattern. When the necessary blanks have been cut out, another die and punch are used, by which they are raised to their proper shape. These tools should be firmly secured in the press (Fig. 35), otherwise they are likely to be soon destroyed. PLAIN WORK. 127 The small ornaments thus raised were variously arranged one upon another, until a design or pattern was formed, which in every way appeared very showy. Such articles suited the tastes of the people at that time, and still suits those who require good weight for their money. The same kind of thing existed at that period in chains, and being heavy-looking, and costly in appearance, they attracted attention and caused a demand. Thus with the continual chang- ing of the fashions a new era Fig-. 3^. Press. for the goldsmiths and silver- smiths of England began. They were beginning to work in all sorts of qualities, with the manipula- tions and finish of which they were becoming now thoroughly conversant, and a demand springing up for goods for purposes of exportation, encourage- ment was given to the trade, w^hich soon assumed the position of a thriving industry. The style of work that followed the " struck-up patterns was that of plain and solid silver-work, well polished and whitened. This sprung up about the period when coloured gold became the fashion, and the mode of finishing it being some- 128 ON THE WORKING OF SILVER. what similar, no doubt the demand arose as much from the introduction of colouring as from any other assignable cause. In the chain-maker's branch of the art, a great variety of new patterns came into existence at this period ; chain bracelets also began to be introduced ; and altogether the trade made rapid strides, and fast rose into a great commercial industry. This kind of work has re- mained more or less in fashion up to the present time, and vast quantities of silver chains of the plain and solid patterns are now being made in Birmingham. The silver trade seems to be an exception to the general depression which now prevails in all the other branches of the jewellery trade ; the fashion just now is for silver, which causes a greater demand than is usual for goods manu- factured of that material. In a short time we believe this fashion will undergo a change, and then no doubt manufacturers who have taken advantage of it to make large stocks will have goods remaining upon their hands which they will not be able readily to dispose of, unless at a sacrifice ; for it should be borne in mind, that to keep a large stock of silver goods in a saleable condition, and without a quick sale, considerable expense is entailed above the cost of making, to THE "GALVANIC RING/' 129 keep them in that condition, through their great liability to become tarnished. After the introduction of plain and solid-looking work, it next became the fashion to have it chased over its entire surface. P'oUowing this, about the year 1825, came the beautiful process of enamel- ling, which added artistic beauty to the work, and brought out the harmonies of colour. About this time, too, there sprung up a great demand for the so-called " galvanic ring," which consisted of a lining of zinc and one of silver. The ring repre- sented, in appearance, those large, plain, half- round rings which are now made in i8-carat gold, and which weigh from 7 to 10 dwts. each. It was then as now made of half-round shape, and some- times with the addition of a buckle upon it. The silver was so drawn upon the zinc that the outer surface appeared entirely of silver, and a portion of the inner surface was made to show the zinc only, which was quite sufficient for the purpose re- quired. When the ring was put on the finger the zinc, in conjunction with the silver, touched the flesh of the wearer, and was thus supposed to create a galvanic action, which it was alleged had a tendency to remove or prevent rheumatism. This kind of work had a good run at the time ot its introduction, but like all the rest, the fashion G 3 I30 ON THE WORKING OF SILVER. lasted only for a while, when something else had to be brought to the front in the silver trade. The mode of the preparation of the wire was as follows: — A bar of silver would be rolled out until a certain thinness was attained, occasionally annealing it during the process ; it was then cut into strips wide enough for the purpose required, again annealed, and subsequently doomed. The latter process was effected in this manner : — A block of hard wood, such as boxwood, would be made use of, having a round groove in one side of it, the metal to be doomed would be laid along the groove and a round piece of iron or steel held upon the upper surface with the left hand ; a wooden mallet is then taken with the right hand, and by a skilful application of it to the piece of iron or steel, the metal is soon forced down in the groove and made to take the proper form for drawing. The flat strip of metal should be pointed ; this may either be done before or after the dooming process, though it commonly takes place before. It is performed by taking away a small portion in a conical form, from one of the ends with a pair of hand-shears. A piece of zinc wire should be pro- VARIOUS STYLES OF WORK. 131 vided, corresponding in shape with that the ring is to take ; this is placed in the hollow of the silver to be drawn, with the Hat side outwards, so as to correspond with the aperture in the plate through which it has to be drawn. A draw-plate is then taken, with holes of the half-round shape, and the two metals carefully drawn through them. The drawing through a succession of holes produces an edge upon the silver coming against the flat side of the aperture in the draw-plate which over- laps the zinc and thus holds it securely in its place. A change in the style of work gradually took place in the course of every few years, and thus it was that hollow-work became the fashion. This kind could be made in a variety of ways, and being very light and showy, it appeared much more expensive than it really was. It is there- fore very easy to account for the changes which have taken place in the manufacture of articles of adornment and luxury, and for the encouragement which the art has received. With the present styles of the plain,'' the solid," the ^< filigree,'' the stamped," the "mosaic," the "cameo," the "repousse," the "inlaid," the "enamelled," and a variety of others, we can fearlessly say that silver- working has of late years made rapid progress, 132 ON THE WORKING OF SILVER. Fig. 37. Steel and attained to a higher standard than it ever before possessed. The art of stamping and shaping articles of jewellery from sheets of the various metals came into general use just previous to the first Exhibi- tion in 1 85 1. These, which are made in considerable numbers, are produced by means of dies, having the shape of the pattern upon them, both at the top and bot- tom, made of hardened steel. Fig. 37 represents a bottom die for the use of the stamping press, and Fig. 38 represents the press. In raising the metal by stamping, the material un- dergoes the same bondings and extensions between the dies as if it were being manipulated by the ham- mer, and consequently it requires to be repeatedly annealed, otherwise it would crack and fall to pieces in a subsequent operation. The raising Fig. 38. Stamping Press. STAMPING PRESS. 133 should be brought about gradually, and this is done by placing a number of sheets of metal between the dies, which prevents the top die from falling with too sudden an action upon the metal, which it would do, as it falls with a succession of forces if the process be repeated, and if its action be not arrested by the means we have pointed out. After every blow of the stamp one of these pieces is removed from the bottom, and a fresh one added at the top ; the continual falling of the stamp gradually forces these plates, if placed in the manner we have indicated, to take the shape of the die. The exact form of the figure is effected by striking the plates singly between dies which exactly correspond. A very large quantity of work is now produced by the means we have stated, such as brooches, studs, locket-backs, ear- rings, rings, and an endless variety of other things ; moreover, by the cultivation of this art a considerable amount of the labour formerly be- stowed by hand upon the work is now saved, as the stamping in many instances is so complete, almost taking the form of a finished article aftei that process has been performed, that the work- man has only to arrange the parts and supply the ornamentation when required, to render the article complete. 134 ON THE WORKING OF SILVER. Works of art are also produced by other methods ; as an example, we will take the pro- cess of spinning or burnishing into form/' which consists in spinning the metal to the desired shape in a lathe, by means of burnishing tools, specially made for the purpose. This process is employed in the production of large bangle bracelets with plain surfaces and other similar works. The metal to be operated upon should be soft and malleable, otherwise the process is very difficult to perform. The disc, or other form of metal, is taken and fixed in the lathe with the aid of holdfasts, a chuck or mould of the desired pattern being provided, upon which the disc is turned by the tools referred to. The metal, as in the other processes, is gradually spun into the required form. In most cases the mould is exactly the shape of the interior of the article required to be made, and under these cir- cumstances it would be made up in several pieces together with a key-piece ; so that when this latter is taken away, there is no difficulty in removing the rest, and leaving the article free. It is of import- ance, during the spinning, to keep the edges free from notches, but should these occur, it would be better to touch them a little with a turning tool. The metal for spinning into a bangle bracelet should be of the form of a flat circular band. POLISHING. 135 soldered of course ; it would then be secured upon a properly shaped mould, composed of several pieces, in the manner above described ; this would then be placed in the lathe, and the application of the spinning tools would soon bring about the desired form. After the removal of the spun piece of metal, the workman trims the edges up a little, then saws it into two pieces, and at once proceeds to the operations of snapping and jointing, which are delicate processes to perform properly in work of this kind, and require the services of a skilled and competent workman. Having now described some of the processes in the working of silver, and alluded to the various articles which are produced by wtre-drazvmg ; raising with the hammer; stmnping; spinning; chasings &c.; we shall next direct attention to those processes which immediately come after the put- ting together and soldering the article ; and fore- most of these is polishing. We trust that the foregoing details in reference to this part of the subject will convey some idea of the art of silver- working. Polishing is an important process with all pre- cious metal workers. It is applied for the produc- tion of surface to their wares, and in proportion to the smoothness required upon the work, so 136 ON THE WORKING OF SILVER. should be the fineness of the material employed in effecting it. The polishing powders are e77ieryy powdered pumice^ crocus^ rottenstone^ putty of tin^ and rouge. In the best work, scratches are removed with a smooth and rather soft dark grey stone (Water-of-Ayr stone) ; it is then polished in the lathe with a stiff brush, and the application of a little fine polishing mixture. We have placed the materials for polishing in their respective order of smoothness or fineness, beginning with emery, which is the coarsest. A very good mixture for ordinary work consists of equal portions of emery, pumice, and crocus, with oil added to the consist- ence of a thick paste. Good work does not want much polishing, for the beauty of it depends more on its being executed by a well-trained work- man ; whereas rough and badly executed work requires much polishing, and for this the coarser powders are preferable, or a mixture of them ; but for the smoother work the finer powders should be employed. The Water-of-Ayr stone employed for polishing is usually obtained in the form of small square sticks, and is used with a small quantity of water to the surface of the work, in a similar manner to filing. The stone is softer than the material upon which it operates (and, in fact, so are all the POLISHING. 137 materials for polishing), and therefore wears away, producing a mud-like substance upon the article, which should be repeatedly removed in order to ascertain the progress made. This may be done with a piece of clean rag, or tissue-paper. When the work is polished at the lathe it will gradually become enveloped in grease, &c., which should be removed occasionally, to show when the process has been carried far enough. The polishing of silver work is a branch of the trade commonly per- formed by girls. It is hard work for them, as the metal possesses a very soft nature ; it therefore pulls hard against the brush which holds the polishing mixture. The lathe employed is the ordinary polishing lathe with a horizontal spindle, and is worked with a common foot-treadle ; steam- power is used by some firms for moving these lathes, but it is by no means the usual custom at present. After the completion of the polishing process, the work is well washed out in a prepared solution, to remove the mixture which adheres to it ; a solu- tion of soda is found to answer the purpose best, both from its cheapness and effectiveness. It should be used hot, with the addition of a little soap, and w^ith a stiff brush the dirt is soon removed. The quantity of soda used to a given proportion 138 ON THE WORKING OF SILVER. of water differs in the trade, and there is no set rule to go by ; it depends, more or less, upon the adhesiveness of the polishing mixture. We have found about two ounces of it to a quart of water amply sufficient for the purpose. CHAPTER X. Enriching the Surfaces of Silver. By the application of the processes about to be de- scribed, the finishing touches in their relation to articles or wares of silver manufacture are effected. These processes, as adopted by the trade, are various, almost every firm having a specially pre- pared mixture and mode of employing it. We shall refer only to those which, from their practical utility, are likely to be of service to those workmen who have to do with this particular metal. The branch of the art of which we are now treating comes only into operation when every other pro- cess of workmanship has been completed ; and some of these processes must be executed in a perfect manner in order to arrive at the highest possible results in this one. The best and richest surface is produced when the metal to be operated upon is good in quality, and the workmanship of a fair order, so far as regards smoothness, and freedom from surplus solder-marks. 140 ENRICHING THE SURFACES OF SILVER. One of the oldest methods for producing a pure snowy whiteness upon articles of silver was as fol- lows : — Take an iron or copper annealing pan (the latter is much to be preferred), place the work upon it in proper order, so that it may be heated all over alike. It should, previous to this, be immersed in a thick solution of borax, or otherwise brushed over with it. After the work has been properly arranged upon the pan for annealing, it must be sprinkled over with fine charcoal dust ; the pan is then placed in the muffle upon a bright clear fire with- out blaze, and when the work has assumed a degree of heat approaching to cherry redness, it is with- drawn and allowed to cool. When this has taken place, it is removed and boiled out in a very weak solution of sulphuric acid, commonly called oil of vitriol. If the right colour was not then produced, the process was repeated as many times as circum- stances permitted, though usually two or three times was found to be amply sufficient. The annealing process required great attention, for the work being in contact with borax, if slightly overheated, it was liable to become melted, there- fore the operation was a delicate one to perform, and was only intrusted to such workmen as were experienced in the art. Small delicate articles were commonly treated with the mouth blow-pipe and WHITENING THE SURFACE. 141 gas-jet, and were placed upon a pumice-stone, or some other suitable substance capable of with- standing the power of burning. According to the inferiority of the silver alloy, is the difficulty of producing a good white surface on wares of such standards. Fine silver requires very little whiten- ing, generally one process suffices to effect a good colour ; but inferior standards require half a dozen or more to bring up the proper degree of white- ness; and those ranging below 9 oz. 12 dwts. to the lb. Troy cannot be whitened at all by the means we have described, but require the applica- tion of the modern chemical process, known as electro-plating. The East Indian silversmiths never touch their manufactures with any kind of abrasive substance, from the most delicate, to the more strongly made article. But then it should be remembered, that in India the natives work from the pure material, a point which they rigidly adhere to ; whereas we are compelled in this country to manipulate in all sorts of qualities ; and some of these require no little trouble and difficulty to bring back to the surface the snow-white appearance of the pure metal. In the former case it is effected without any difficulty whatever — in fact, the metal scarcely undergoes any change throughout the whole of 142 ENRICHING THE SURFACES OF SILVER. the manipulations to which it is subjected in the various processes of manufacture. The Indian mode of procedure is as follows : — Some juicy lemons are cut into slices ; the silver articles are briskly rubbed with these for a short time, and subsequently covered with them, being placed in a suitable vessel for a few hours for the completion of the process. For very delicate articles of jewel- lery the natives cut a large lime nearly in two halves, into which they insert the work ; the halves are then tightly closed up again, and placed aside for a few hours ; when the article is removed, it is well rinsed in clean water, and consigned to a vessel of nearly boiling soap-suds, where it is well brushed, again rinsed in fresh hot water, and finally dried on a metal plate placed over hot water ; the process is rendered complete by a little gentle rubbing with wash-leather if the work be of a plain nature. Green tamarind pods are also employed by them for the purpose of whitening silver, in the same manner as just described ; they are great detergents both of gold and silver manu- factures, and are largely employed by artisans in the East for the removal of oxides and fire-marks. Another process for the whitening of silver goods is performed in the following manner : — Take the work, which must be cleanly prepared, and WHITENING SILVER GOODS. 1 43 give it a coating of the following mixture : — Finely- powdered vegetable charcoal four parts, saltpetre one part ; the ingredients should be well mixed with a little water, and may be applied to the surface oi the metal either by brushing over with a soft brush, or by dipping the work into it. The work is then placed upon the annealing pan and submitted to the heat of the muffle, until the wet powder has become perfectly dry and ceased to fly about ; it is then withdrawn from the muffle, allowed to cool, and afterwards boiled out in a solution of potash prepared for the purpose, in the proportion of about one ounce of bi-sulphate of potash to twenty ounces of water. The boiling out is done in a copper pan (Fig. 39), and if the work be put through the above process two or three times a beautiful dead- white colour is the result. It is then washed in a hot solu- Fig 39. Boiiing-out Pan. tion of soda, soap, and water, or if preferred bright, scratched, or burnished, and the process is finally completed by drying it in fine boxwood sawdust, which should be made hot, but not allowed to char or burn in any way, as it would produce a stain upon the work very difficult to remove, and thus the finish would be considerably impaired. 144 ENRICHING THE SURFACES OF SILVER. In large manufactories the process of whitening silver goods is repeatedly required to be performed, and where such is the case, the above methods are found not only tedious and expensive, but occupy much unnecessary time and labour ; to dispense with a portion of w^hich, the custom of covering the work with a chemical preparation was accordingly departed from, and yet it was made to show its former brilliancy. To effect this object the liquid for boiling it in was differently prepared, which only required to be made of a proper strength to do all that the surface mixture had done before. The following is the method adopted in preparing the cleansing liquid. Boiling out mixture : — To one pound of smoking salts, add two ounces of cream of tartar; well shake the ingredients to- gether, so that they may be thoroughly incor- porated. The smoking salts employed for this purpose are not the ordinary spirits of salts of com- merce, but a preparation of the common oil of vitriol ; therefore the one should not be taken for the other ; the spirits of salts would turn the work black, whereas, if the proper ingredient were pro- cured, a fine dead matt or blanched surface would be the result of its application. The mixture employed for boiling the work in consists of the proportion of one ounce of the above preparation WHITENING SILVER GOODS. 1 45 to about thirty ounces of water. The silver articles simply require to be annealed, allowed to cool, and then boiled for a minute or so in this solution, when the desired result will be attained ; if, how- ever, the exact colour be not obtained the first time, the process should be repeated a second, and if necessary, a third time ; the right colour will then be produced, if the articles are not made of a too inferior standard. The mode we have ourselves adopted for the colouring or whitening of silver goods is somewhat different, and still more simple than even the above. We will proceed to give the details of the process. A mixture of very dilute sulphuric acid is first provided, in the proportion of one ounce to forty ounces of water, and well mixed together ; the work, after being heated to a good red-heat, is boiled in this, which soon removes the oxide from the surface, and shows the fine white colour of the pure silver. For fine silver work, such as Indian filigree, one process will generally suffice, for English standard quality two, and for low qualities three, but these latter must not by any means be too low ; if so, no colouring can take place by the method just described. Objects of delicate workmanship are usually annealed by the gas ; being placed on a pumice-stone of light material, H 146 ENRICHING THE SURFACES OF SILVER. the flame of the gas is blown with the mouth blow- pipe, in such a manner that the object gradually becomes heated all over alike ; and the work should be well heated, as this facilitates the process of oxidation, and subsequently that of whitening. The oxidation takes place at the expense of the copper in the silver alloy, and this is only effected by raising the articles to a very high temperature, which produces the oxidation of the copper coming in contact with the air, and which necessarily exists upon the surface of the alloyed goods. Whitening silver goods then is nothing more than the removal of the base alloy from the surface, leaving the pure metal behind with its full rich colour. Therefore to be clear, the process of an- nealing in contact with cold air oxidizes the copper upon the surface, and the pickling mixture so dissolves and removes it, that it gradually under- goes a process of refining, and is ultimately made to represent the finest material in all its purity. Sometimes silver work is to be seen having a brow^n colour upon it ; this is produced when the acid employed for cleansing has been too strong ; it can only be remedied by another annealing and boiling out in a much more diluted mixture. There are various other methods employed in the trade for the purpose of whitening silver work of the best WHITENING COMMON ARTICLES. 1 47 quality ; and although annealing is always a part of the process, other ingredients, such as salt and tartar, permanganate of potash, cyanide of potas- sium, alum, &c., have been severally used for the cleansing or whitening mixture. They may be useful in their application to plated work (articles that have received a ccating of pure metal by means of the electro-metallurgical process), for cleansing purposes only, but for all practical pur- poses the process to which we have called special attention is to be much preferred. Common articles of silver cannot be whitened by annealing and boiling out in a diluted acid ; a thin film of pure silver must be deposited upon their surface by the process of electro-deposition, or by the action of some chemical preparation in which fine silver forms the principal ingredient. Such preparation, however, as the latter can be used only to plain surfaces, therefore they are not applicable to all kinds of work. They are composed of the following chemical ingredients: — ist, chloride of silver i part, cream of tartar i part ; 2nd, chloride of silver i part, common salt i J parts; 3rd, chloride of silver i part, prepared chalk i part, pearl-ash I part ; 4th, chloride of silver i part, alum i part, common salt 2 parts. The chloride of silver is easily prepared by precipitating it from the nitrate H 2 148 ENRICHING THE SURFACES OF SILVER. with a solution of common salt or hydrochloric acid. The various mixtures should be worked up with water into a thin paste, and applied to the work by rubbing w4th a soft cork or piece of wash- leather, or by thoroughly stirring it about in the mixture until it has acquired the requisite degree of whiteness. For the purpose of silvering watch and clock faces, &c. these mixtures may be used with advantage and entire success. Other solutions are sometimes employed for similar purposes and are very useful ; being simple in their preparation and easy of management. We have selected the following as being the most practical : — Take one ounce of the nitrate of silver and dissolve it in one quart of pure distilled water, or if this cannot be procured, water which has been boiled, by which it loses some of its impurity. When the nitrate of silver has become thoroughly dissolved, throw into the mixture a little powdered hyposulphite of soda, this will precipitate the silver, and when it has taken place, a further addition of hyposulphite of soda should be made, which will eventually re-dissolve the precipitate, and the solution is then ready for use. To produce a good mixture, the salt of soda should be added slightly in excess. The solution is used by simply dipping a sponge in it and rubbing it over the IMPROVING THE COLOUR. 149 surface of the articles to be coated, and this is continued until they have assumed the desired colour. For improving the colour of silver and electro- plated wares, the following mixture has been strongly recommended: — Nitrate of silver 4 penny- weights, cyanide of potassium 5 ounces, and water I quart; the ingredients should be well mixed together, and applied by means of a soft brush or sponge to the surface of the work. In using this cyanide solution, the operator should be care- ful to guard against a too frequent contact with it, as it is decidedly injurious to the hands, especially if there be any abrasion of the skin ; it being one of the deadliest poisons known. Sufficient details of the process of silver whitening and cleansing having now been given to assist the workman who manipulates in this particular metal, and to enable him to select a form of recipe in every way adapted to the kind of work in hand, we shall now pro- ceed to the modern process of electro-platings and give a practical description of it in its applicability to the trade of the silversmith. This art is decidedly of modern origin, as far as concerns its employment for commercial pur- poses. The invention is supposed to be due to the electrical and chemical researches of Mr. Spencer, 150 ENRICHING THE SURFACES OF SILVER. of this country, and Professor Jacobi, of Russia, both of whom claim to have found out the art of depositing one metal upon another, somewhere about the same period. Of course it was left to others to apply the invention to the industrial arts, and it was not until after the discovery of the Constant Battery^ by Professor Daniell, about half a century ago, that the art began gradually to extend in the direction of commercial pursuits. The Messrs. Elkington, of Birmingham, were the first to employ it in their manufactures, with a success which their enterprise thoroughly merited. This took place about the year 1840, and since that time the art of electro-plating and gilding has wonderfully developed, in its application to the various manufactures of the country. Its pro- gress would be a subject highly interesting, were we to trace the general details of it, but the part of it we are considering being the practical mode of its employment in manufactures, we shall at once direct our attention to it, by giving a complete description of the process ; so that the ordinary silversmith may be enabled to employ it in his business with safety and advantage. The first thing to be considered in electro- plating is what Battery to employ, which will be the most simple, inexpensive, and effective one. ELECTRO-PLATING. When the battery is only occasionally required for use we prefer the Smee before any other. It is a small portable apparatus, and consists of a high, but narrow, glass or stoneware jar, in the form of a cylinder, capable of holding about two quarts ; inside this jar is fitted a thin plate of platinized silver fitted to a frame with two zinc plates, one on each side of it, the zinc plates being held to the frame by means of a binding screw. Strong copper wires are firmly secured to these screws, which serve as the positive and negative poles of the battery. Those parts of the plates which are not exposed to the action of the acid solution may be advantageously coated with sealing- wax varnish or melted paraffin wax, to protect them from the destructive influences of the battery acid, and to prevent it from creeping upwards, which destroys the connections. The jar is filled with water acidulated with sulphuric acid, in the proportion of i of acid to 20 of water ; the frame containing the plates is then lowered into the solution, and the battery is ready for use. In the above form of battery for occasional use we have one simple in construction, easy of manage- ment, of fair constancy, and when once prepared very inexpensive, merely requiring a little free acid at times to keep up the strength of the 152 ENRICHING THE SURFACES OF SILVER. current. Two cells of this form of battery, each holding two quarts of mixture, will be found suffi- cient for all ordinary purposes. The zincs should be well amalgamated, and not touch the bottom of the cells. The connections should be regularly examined, and kept perfectly free from corrosion, which would stop the passage of the current. For plating small delicate articles of jewellery one cell of the above form will be found powerful enough for the purpose. The battery that we prefer and have of late years employed, for regular continuous working, is the Bunsen, consisting as before of a cylindrical glass or stoneware jar of the same size and dimen- sions, fitted with a well amalgamated cylinder of zinc and a copper wire secured to it ; a porous cell is placed in the centre, and a bar or rod of carbon is put into this cell with a copper wire also secured to it. The porous cell is filled with a mixture of equal parts of nitric and sulphuric acids, or sul- phuric acid alone ; we prefer the latter, as it does not give off such fumes as does the other acid ; a little of the more powerful acid, however, is some- times required to be added in order to increase the action, as with this acid alone it sometimes becomes slow. The outer cell is filled with a mixture of i part of sulphuric acid to 20 parts of ELECTRO-PLATING. water, and the connections being in proper order the battery is then ready for use. In action this form of battery is regular and continuous, it lasts a long time upon one charge, and is therefore in- expensive in use ; if the two cells are coupled for power or intensity, an unusual quantity of work may be got through in a given time. This cell is admirably suited to the work of the manufacturing silversmith, and to those who prefer doing their own plating. The amalgamation of the zinc is effected as follows : — The cylinders are best treated by putting some mercury into a coarse flannel bag, dipped repeatedly into muriatic acid and applied to the surface of the zinc, both inside and out ; and when they present the bright characteristic appearance of mercury they are sufiiciently operated upon, and may be rinsed and set aside to drain. The zinc plates may be advantageously amalgamated by placing some mercury in a shallow dish with a little muriatic or sulphuric acid, a hare's foot or a piece of cloth tied to the end of a stick is then dipped into the mercury and acid, and rubbed over the plates until they are sufiiciently protected with mercury, when they should be rinsed in clean water and set aside to drain. If possible the process of amalgamation should always be conducted in the H3~ 154 ENRICHING THE SURFACES OF SILVER. open air, as the fumes which are given off, if breathed, are highly injurious. The best possible way to amalgamate rods of zinc is by pouring mercury into the melted metal just before casting it into rods, in the proportion of i J oz. of mercury to the pound of zinc. This makes the rods ex- ceedingly brittle, and they should therefore be handled with care. The mercury should not be added to the zinc when the latter is at too high a temperature, and the best manner of testing this is by the application of a piece of paper to the molten metal, when if it takes fire, the temperature is still too high ; it should be allowed to cool until the paper refuses to ignite, then and not till then is the proper time for the addition of the mercury. The copper conducting wires and binding screws must be cleaned when they become much corroded ; if not they add resistance to the current, and it will become considerably diminished, or cease alto- gether. The cleaning may be effected by simply annealing and then plunging them while still hot into dilute sulphuric acid pickle, or dipping them into nitric acid for about an instant. The zincs should be taken from the battery liquids when not required for use ; and the porous cells should be removed every night and their contents poured into a large jug kept for the purpose. The SOLUTION FOR ELECTRO-PLATING. 155 porous cells should be placed in clean water to prevent the salts of the battery liquid from crystal- lizing in the pores, which would crack and spoil them for future use ; the carbons should also be placed in water ; and when required for use again these arrangements should be reversed, when the battery will work as well as ever. The solution for electro-plating articles of jewel- lery is the next part of the subject we have to consider, of which there are many, containing various proportions of the metal employed in silver depositing. The following is one of the best we have employed : take pure silver and dissolve it in a mixture of nitric acid and water: — Fine silver . . . • 5 dwts. Nitric acid • • . . 4 drms. Water 2 drms. The silver should be put into a small Florence flask, so as to allow the mixture of acid and water to cover it thoroughly ; this mixture on being added to the metal soon promotes a chemical action, and the silver becomes gradually dissolved. If the acid employed has been weak, it will necessitate a further addition of it to complete the dissolution of the silver, or the removal of the flask to some other and warmer place, such as a sand-bath, but care should be taken not to apply too much heat. As 15^ ENRICHING THE SURFACES OF SILVER. the chemical action proceeds, red fumes are formed in the flask ; and the action should be allowed to go on until these cease to rise, when the silver should by that time have become dissolved. The mixture then consists of a solution of nitrate of silver, and should be carefully poured into a suit- able porcelain or Wedgwood capsule ; this is then heated upon a sand-bath until a scum or pellicle appears upon the surface, when it should at once be transferred from the sand-bath to a suitable place for cooling. During the last operation the mixture begins to form itself into crystals, and the liquid which appears reluctant to crystallize should be poured away from those already formed, into another capsule, and again heated until it has sufficiently evaporated to crystallize. When the whole of the liquor has finally undergone this pro- cess, the crystals of nitrate of silver must be removed to another vessel, and about one pint of cold w^ater added, the whole being then well stirred until they have become thoroughly dissolved. A solution of cyanide of potassium is next prepared in water, in the proportion of about one ounce of cyanide to the pint of water ; some of this solution is then added to the one containing the nitrate ol silver. It must, however, be added very cautiously, for precipitation soon takes place, and if too much SOLUTION FOR ELECTRO-PLATING. 1 57 be used, the precipitate becomes again dissolved. For this reason it is advisable to take a little of the solution from the vessel, in a wine-glass or test tube, and to add a few drops of the prepared solu- tion of cyanide, in order to ascertain its exact state. If the application of this solution produces no effect upon the nitrate of silver, the operation of precipi- tation is complete. The liquid above the sediment should next be carefully poured away to avoid any waste of silver ; when this is done fresh water should be added, well stirred with the sediment, and allowed to settle ; it is then again poured off, and the pro- cess repeated until the precipitate has become thoroughly washed. Now add sufficient cyanide of potassium to dissolve the precipitate and a little more, and make up two quarts of solution with fresh clean water. It is better to filter the solution before using it. The solution may be made by means of the bat- tery, and, if preferred, the above mode of chemi- cally preparing it may be dispensed with. The following is the most simple method by the bat- tery process : — Dissolve in two quarts of water about half an ounce, and no more, of best black cyanide ; this should be done in an oval, or still better, oblong stoneware vessel, placed in an iron 158 ENRICHING THE SURFACES OF SILVER. one of the same shape containing water. The stone jar should not be allowed to touch the bottom or sides of the iron one, a space being left for holding the water. When the cyanide has become dissolved, fill a porous cell with some of the solution, place this cell in the other vessel containing the cyanide ; the solution should be about the same height in both vessels. Now put a piece of sheet copper, secured to the end of the wire issuing from the zinc of the battery, into the porous cell, and place in the larger vessel con- taining the cyanide solution about one ounce of sheet silver, properly secured to the wire issuing from the carbon of the battery. In a short time the solution in the larger vessel will have acquired the right proportion of silver (5 dwts. to the two quarts) for use; when this has been effected, the porous cell should be removed and its contents thrown away. These solutions are both worked hot, at a temperature of not exceeding 120^ Fahr. with the battery we have described. The solutions are heated by means of gas-jets, and the articles are plated by being suspended to the wire proceeding from the zinc of the battery. To the wire proceeding from the carbon is to be attached the piece of sheet silver which dissolves and keeps up the strength of the solution. The ELECTRO-PLATING. piece of silver or anode being lowered into the solution, upon the immersion of the work, an almost instantaneous deposit of fine silver takes place, the thickness of which depends entirely upon the period of immersion. When a solution begins to plate of an inferior kind through the acquisition of organic matter, it will be better to abandon it altogether and make a new one, rather than to waste valuable time in repeated attempts at improvement, which seldom can be effected in solutions that have been em- ployed for all kinds of work. The silver may be recovered from such solutions by means of the battery, by precipitation, and by evaporation ; the first process, however, we have not always found successful, the solution in some cases refusing to give up its silver to the action of the battery. It is put into operation as follows : — The anode which supplies the solution with silver is replaced by one of platinum, on which the cyanide solution has no action whatever ; a piece of clean sheet copper should be hung upon the zinc wire of the battery, and the battery kept in action until the whole of the silver held in the solution has become de- posited upon it ; at which stage it may be removed, and the exhausted solution thrown into the waste water tub. The piece of copper containing the l6o ENRICHING THE SURFACES OF SILVER. silver may be used again in the place of the silver anode until it has become dissolved, or it may be removed by any other means, if preferred. In the event of the above plan failing, the process oi precipitation or evaporation should be resorted to. If the former one be adopted, the solution should be poured into a large open vessel, and con- siderably diluted with water ; sulphuric acid should then be carefully poured in, a little at a time, until it produces no effervescence. The sulphuric acid precipitates the silver, and the fumes which it creates are highly deleterious to health, therefore the process ought to be performed in the open air, and not in ill-ventilated workshops. When the sulphuric acid produces no effect upon the solution, it should be allowed to stand for a while for the precipitate to subside, when the water above (which should be clear) may be drawn off, the precipitate well washed, to free it from the acid, dried, and fused in a crucible with a little potash or soda. If the latter plan be adopted, the solution may be placed in a cast-iron kettle or saucepan, and then heated upon a gas-jet or stove, until evaporation takes place, after which the sediment should be removed and fused in a crucible, as before. The finishing of silver work requires some little knowledge and skill to perform it properly ; and FINISHING SILVER WORK. l6l we think that a few observations bearing upon it will be of service to those for whom this manual is written. After either of the processes of whiten- ing or plating, the work has to be scratched, unless required to be left a dead white, then this process does not take place ; the scratching re- moves from the surface the dull white colour produced by the above processes, and effects a characteristic bright and uniform colour to the work of the silversmith. Scratching is done at the lathe (Fig. 40) by the application of a very fine brass- wire brush of circular form running upon the spindle ; a solution of weak ale runs from a barrel with a tap to it, placed upon the framework of the lathe so as to enable the beer running from it to fall upon the brush during the whole time of its rotary action, and this assists the brush the more easily to glide over the surface of the work submitted to it. A larg-e ^ Fig. 40. Scratch-brush quantity of silversmith's work receives no other treatment than this, after the whitening processes have taken place. Silver chains are burnished by means of a polished steel 1 62 ENRICHING THE SURFACES OF SILVER. jack chain, and the application of a little soft soap and hot water, or otherwise scratch-brushed. The beautiful frosted surfaces to be seen upon silver lockets, and other work of a similar nature, are all produced by means of the scratch-brush. Burnishing is another mode of finishing silver work. It produces a polished surface, which reflects like a mirror, and gives the greatest lustre ; it removes marks left by the polishing mixtures, and produces a darker surface than the other modes of finishing. The tools employed for this process are extremely variable, and well adapted to the different kinds of work to which they are applied ; they are of two kinds, one being formed of hard stone, and the other of polished hardened steel ; they vary with regard to shape, some being straight with rounded points, or with curved and blunted edges, others with large rounded surfaces, &c. Stone burnishers are made of blood-stone, which is mounted in a wooden handle with a brass ferrule, which firmly secures the stone to it, in which state it is used. Steel burnishers are likewise fixed in wooden handles, which enable them to be firmly grasped by the operator. Throughout the whole process of burnishing, the tool should be repeatedly moistened wdth a solution of soap and water ; which causes it BURNISHING. 1 63 to glide more easily over the surface of the work, prevents it from becoming too much heated, and generally facilitates its action. In consequence of the great friction which the burnishing tool under- goes, it soon loses its bite, when it slips over the work as if it were greasy; its effectiveness must therefore be restored from time to time by rubbing it upon the leather which the workman has beside him for the purpose. It generally consists of a piece of buff leather, impregnated with a little crocus. In very small articles only steel bur- nishers are used, as they are finer in make, and by their greater variety of form, are exceedingly well adapted to all kinds of work ; in this class of work, if any soap-suds should adhere to the article they may be removed by the application of a little tissue paper. Large pieces of work are rubbed with a piece of old linen, or washed in a warm solution of soap and water, rinsed, and dried in boxwood sawdust, which finally completes the process. Silver work may be oxidized by any of the fol- lowing processes : — I. Sal ammoniac .... 2 parts. Sulphate of Copper . . 2 „ Saltpetre . . . . i part. Reduce the above ingredients to a fine powder, l64 ENRICHING THE SURFACES OF SILVER. and dissolve it in a little acetic acid. If the article is to be entirely oxidized, it may be dipped for a short time into the boiling mixture ; if only in parts, it may be applied with a camel-hair pencil, the article and the mixture both being warmed before using. II. Platinum . . . . i part. Hydrochloric acid ... 2 parts. Nitric acid . • . , I part. Dissolve the platinum in the mixture of acid, evaporate to crystallization, and when cold, dis- solve again in a little sulphuric ether. Apply the mixture with a camel-hair pencil to the parts required to be blackened. III. Saltpetre 2 parts. Common Salt . , . . i part. Spirits of Salts • . . i Reduce the salts to powder, and place it in a black-lead crucible along with the acid, boil up, and then dip the articles into the mixture for a short time, or otherwise apply it to the parts required to be oxidized. These mixtures wall give the various tints of oxidation to silver work if properly treated ; but if other tints be desired, the following chemical sub- VARIOUS TINTS. 165 Stances may be employed according to taste : — For slate-coloured surface, dip the articles into a boil- ing solution of sulphuret of potassium. Strong hydrosulphate of ammonia produces a dark tint of oxidation, and if diluted with much water a light tint is produced. Nitric acid produces a light sur- face. The fumes of sulphur produce a beautiful blue-coloured surface. This operation should be conducted in a closed box, and all parts not to be blackened should be coated with a suitable resist varnish. After any of these processes the articles may either be scratched, or otherwise burnished. CHAPTER XI. Imitation Silver Alloys. The undermentioned white alloys have their various uses in the industrial and mechanical arts, some being employed as common silver, whilst others are manufactured as near as pos- sible in imitation of it, and used as a substitute, for many purposes. In melting the alloys in which nickel and several other compounds enter into com- bination, unless very great care be exercised, it is a difficult matter to maintain the true and definite proportion of each metal of which the alloy proper is composed, owing to the loss of the more fusible metals by volatilization, if allowed to remain too long in the furnace. The best method of preparing the compound for the crucible, is to mix the copper and nickel together. The latter is produced from the pure oxide of nickel ; therefore it is taken in this form and placed in the crucible with the cop- per at the commencement of the operation. When ALLOYS. 167 these ingredients are well melted, and incorporated by stirring, add the zinc or other fusible metal required to make up the compound, previously heating it thoroughly over the mouth of the crucible^ to prevent the chilling of the already molten metal which it contains. When silver forms a component part in any of these alloys it should be added at the beginning of the process along with those of a high degree of fusibility, and reduced under the protection of a suitable flux ; charcoal being the best for the purpose. This flux also tends to preserve the fusible metals, upon their addition to the melted compound in the pot, from too suddenly flying away in the shape of fumes. The best zinc of commerce should be employed in these alloys, which is sold under the name of spelter. Common silver alloy — oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver I 0 0 Shot copper 0 17 0 Nickel 0 13 0 2 10 0 Another — oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver . . I 0 0 Shot copper . . I 0 0 Nickel , , . 0 15 0 2 15 0 i68 IMITATION SILVER ALLOYS. Common silver alloy — oz. dwts. gTS, Fine silver • . . i o o Shot copper ...130 Nickel . • • • o 17 o 300 Another — oz. dwts. gTS. Fine silver . . , i o o Shot copper ,,.160 Nickel .... o 19 o 1 5 o Another — oz« dwts. grs. Fine silver •••100 Shot copper • • • i 9 o Nickel . . . • I 10 3 10 o Another — oz. dwts. gTS* Fine silver • • • i o o Shot copper • • • 112 o Nickel ...,130 3 ^5 o ALLOYS. 169 Common silver alloy — oz. dwts, grs. Fine silver ...100 Shot copper • • . 115 o Nickel ....150 400 Another — oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver .••100 Shot copper . . . 2 212 Nickel , • . . I 7 12 4 10 o Another — oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver ,.•100 Shot copper • , • 2 10 o Nickel . . . • I 10 o 500 Another — oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver , I 0 0 Shot copper , • 0 16 0 Nickel 0 10 12 Spelter • • 0 3 12 2 10 0 I I70 IMITATION SILVER ALLOYS. Common silver alloy — Fine silver Shot copper Nickel Spelter • oz. dwts. grs. 1 o o O 19 G O 12 O 040 2 15 O Another — Fine silver Shot copper Nickel Spelter • oz. dwts. grs, 100 120 o 15 o o 3 Q 300 Chinese silver — Shot copper Spelter . Nickel Cobalt . Silver oz. dwts. grs« 100 060 040 o 3 18 0 o 18 1 14 12 Imitation silver- Shot copper Nickel Spelter , oz. dwts. grs» 100 O 6 12 0 4 18 1 II 6 ALLOYS. 171 Imitation silver — oz. dwts. grs. Shot copper . . .100 Spelter . • • . o 12 o Nickel ••••080 200 Another — oz. dwts. grs. Shot copper ••.100 Spelter • . . . o 8 o Nickel ••••040 I 12 o Another — oz. dwts. grs* Shot copper •••100 Spelter . , . • o 10 o Nickel • • • • o 10 o 200 Another — oz* dwts* grs* Shot copper •••100 Nickel * ... o 8 8 Spelter • • • • o 6 16 I 15 o I 2 172 IMITATION SILVER ALLOYS. White alloy — oz. dwts. grs. Shot copper . I O O Tin . o 10 6 Brass o 2 12 Arsenic . o O i8 I 13 12 Clark's patent alloy — oz. dwts. grs. Shot copper I O O Nickel O 3 i8 Spelter . o I 22 Tin . . • , O o 12 Cobalt . o o 12 I 6 l6 White alloy— oz. dwts. grs. Shot copper • . • i o o Tin o 10 o Arsenic , . . , o i o I II o Alloy with platinum — oz. dwts. grs. Fine silver . , . i o o Platinum ....050 I 5 o ALLOYS. Alloy with palladium Fine silver Palladium oz. dwts. grs. 100 050 I 5 o The platinum and palladium of which the last two alloys are composed, although very difficult to use in combination with any other metal, readily unite in any proportions with silver ; and it has been found that such alloys are not so easily tarnished as the ordinary ones, or even as fine silver itself. These various alloys serve to effect the several purposes for which they are employed in manu- factures ; wires prepared from any of them will supply the place of silver, as brooch tongs, stems for pins, catches and joints, &c. for articles of common quality and cheap workmanship. They are also employed for preparing the ground for " electro-plate,'^ for which they are very service- able. When, however, these alloys are employed by the regular silversmith, care should be taken not to get the scraps of metal in any way mixed with those of the better material, otherwise diffi- culties will soon begin to present themselves, which will materially interfere with the regular and proper working of the best silver alloys ; and in fact, with all qualities that have originally been 174 IMITATION SILVER ALLOYS. prepared free from nickel. Those prepared from nickel are much more infusible than those made without it; consequently, if a piece of the nickel alloy, either by accident or design, gets intermixed with the other quality, in a subsequent melting, it will be found to float upon the surface of the j molten metal for some considerable time, and thus retard the process. Alloys prepared in imitation of silver are harder and much more difficult to work than those of the true metal ; therefore it can easily be imagined what alteration the latter undergo upon the addition of some of the former compounds. The hardness and toughness which these alloys possess admirably adapt them for such purposes as we have described. CHAPTER XII. Economical Processes. In all silversmiths' establishments, the economical or waste-saving processes, as they are termed, require special and careful attention, so that the actual working loss, or that portion of it which is entirely irrecoverable by the manufacturer, may be reduced to the lowest possible degree. It may not be known to the general reader, or to the beginner in the precious metal trades, that there always takes place in the working up of the metal a loss of material, a portion of which the manu- facturer is unable to recover, however cautious may be the means employed for that purpose. In the best regulated workships, this loss will amount at the lowest estimate to about 2| per cent, of the whole quantity worked up in the establishment. If the actual loss can be reduced to within the above limit it is considered very low, and highly satisfactory. Taking into con- 176 ECONOMICAL PROCESSES. sideration the loss that is occasioned in precious metal working, and from calculations that we have made from experience, we have long since arrived at the conclusion, that it cannot possibly be esti- mated under 10 per cent, of the total work daily- performed ; and this opinion is based upon experi- ments, the raw material being weighed before the process of melting and after the articles were completed, a fair calculation of course being made for unfinished work. This was including every description of manufacture ; in some branches of the trade the working loss is not quite so great, but then there are others in which it is exceedingly heavy, so that the estimated loss in the jewellery trades cannot be safely put at a lower percentage than we have quoted. It will thus be seen that the real loss, such as manufacturers are unable to recover by the means already known to them, amounts to one-fourth part of the total working loss of the establishment. This is easily accounted for : in the first place, a little takes place in the melting of the various alloys, the re-melting of scrap metal, the reduction of lemel, &c. ; then there are the sundry manipu- lations of working ; the passage of the metal through various acids, and the processes of finish- ing, each of which detaches small particles of LOSS IN WORKING. I77 metal, too small to be visible to the naked eye, but all of which go to form a portion of the loss which the manufacturer never recovers. The un- recovered metal may be judiciously proportioned as follows : — A portion of it works itself into the wood-work of the flooring of the shops, lathes, boards, and other parts of workshop appliances ; then there is the refiner's profit — as purchases ot the sweep, polishings, and other refuse of precious metal workers. Instances can be recorded in which shrewd business-men have actually taken up the floors of their workshops and recovered a vast quantity of metal which was supposed to be lost for ever ; and instances are well remembered in which two jewellers, upon removing into more extensive premises, availed themselves of the opportunity, not only of removing the boards which formed the flooring of the premises they were about to leave, but also those of the tenants they were about to succeed. In one case, metal of the value of ;^8o was recovered, and in the other it reached the large amount of ;^i5o. The two jewellers referred to, of course, were too un-English to refund the proceeds to the late tenants, who, when they became aware of it, if ever they did, would be, no doubt, wiser if sadder men. To prevent the precious metal from finding its I 3 178 ECONOMICAL PROCESSES. way into such places as these, it is advisable to have the floors well protected with sheet zinc or iron, in which case not the least particle could be lost in this manner. The extra cost of laying the floors would soon be amply repaid, by an extra quantity of the working loss being recovered ; and if other equally eff'ective precautions were adopted in the waste-saving processes by precious metal workers, the real loss, which they cannot avoid suffering, might even yet be reduced to the lowest possible point. Iron or zinc covered floors may be protected from wear, by laying over the surface small square grates of perforated iron, and these, being removable, may be readily taken up at stated periods, for sweeping the refuse from the floors ; once a month will be found often enough to do this. The gratings should, however, be swept over lightly every day in order to remove the dust and particles of metal that may accumu- late upon the surface into the perforations, and also for the removal of waste paper and other rubbish, continually accumulating in workshops. Floors containing no such waste-saving pre- cautions, are commonly swept over once, and sometimes twice each day, the refuse arising therefrom being carefully passed through a very fine sieve, all extraneous matter removed, and the SWEEPINGS OF THE FLOORS. 179 residue remaining in the sieve being well sorted for the detection of all the precious metal visible to the naked eye. The whole refuse matter is then thoroughly burned in a muffle provided specially for the purpose, and finally reduced to a fine powder in a cast-iron mortar. When it has reached this stage of the process, it is quite ready for the particular kind of treatment it next receives at the hands of the refiner. Grinding by large stone rollers is now fast superseding this mode of pulverising jewellers' waste and refuse. When the latter plan is adopted, the refuse should be swept from the floors every morning, carefully looked through, and then transferred to a barrel (having the top removed, which may be used as a lid), where it can be well kept together, and hidden from view until the time arrives for its further treatment. The waste which accumulates in the processes of polishing, lapping, &c., is greater than that already referred to, consequently, it cannot be too carefully looked after, in every stage, where a large manufacturing trade is being carried on in various branches. It is advisable in the practice of true economy, for the polishing, lapping, and scratching boxes to be repeatedly cleaned out, and the contents removed out of the temptation of I So ECONOMICAL PROCESSES. every one, by being placed in a box, well lined with either sheet lead or zinc, which ensures the perfect safety of the material placed therein from all irregularities in the workshop. This kind of waste on being prepared for sale is again placed in a very strong wrought-iron box, made of a suit- able size to fit the muffle, and having a thick close lid to it. After the work of the day has been completed, the fire in the furnace or muffle is made up, the dampers are closed, and then the iron box containing the refuse is at once passed in and allowed to remain there till morning, when every particle of matter will have become thoroughly burned ; a slight pulverization after this process readily reduces it to a fine powder ; further opera- tions then cease, and the product is in all pro- bability in a fine state of division, and fit for the subsequent operations of the refiner and assayer, whose special business it is to attend to these arrangements of precious metal workers. The next process we have to consider is one which includes the whole of the liquid substances variously employed in silver-working establish- ments, such as the pickling solutions, washing-out waters, whitening mixtures, and waste or spent solutions of every kind. The whitening solutions or mixtures, when in use, should be kept apart RECOVERING THE SILVER. l8l from the ordinary cleansing liquids, as after they have been in use for a time, they become saturated with copper taken off the work during the whiten- ing processes ; if the solution is then set aside for some time the copper eventually crystallizes out from the liquor, which may be poured into the waste-water tub, and the remaining crystals of sulphate of copper, for such it then is, may be removed and preserved. In small establishments one large tub, to form the receptacle for all spent or used-up liquids, will be found sufficient ; but in large places several will be required. In the former case the water is only drawn off at the beginning of every fresh week, which allows plenty of time for the precipitation of the silver without any disturbance taking place in the mixture between the close of one week and the commencement of another ; whereas in large concerns it requires to be drawn off continually unless other vessels are provided for its reception during a long period. Attempts have been made to recover the silver from these solutions by simply filtering the liquid through a coarse piece of felt or flannel ; or by providing a false bottom in the tub or other vessel containing the waste waters, arranged in the following manner : — A tolerably large tub would be employed, being about one- l82 ECONOMICAL PROCESSES. fourth filled with coarse deal sawdust, next would be placed the false bottom perforated with numerous small holes, and upon this would be firmly secured a piece of felt, so as to exactly fill up the space in that part of the tub, which then serves to act as the filterer of all solutions poured in above. The liquid after passing through the piece of felt pro- ceeds through the perforations in the false bottom into the sawdust beneath, where it is allowed to run away by means of a small hole or tap at the bottom. But the use of either of these processes, if adopted on a large scale, where the waste products amounted to some hundreds per annum, would be wretchedly bad economy and tend to a serious loss of valuable metal ; the boiling sulphuric acid, used in cleansing the work and for other purposes, has the power of dissolving minute particles of silver as well as those of the baser metal which always enters into the composition used in the production of the work of the silver- smith ; therefore, that portion of the metal which has become dissolved and entered into the chemi- cal state, requires to be brought back to its original form before it can be saved by such means as those just described. To illustrate this more clearly, we will take the process of gold-colouring. If workmen were to notice the rinsing waters RINSING WATERS. 1 83 employed in this process, subsequently allowing the vessels containing the rinsing to stand for a very short time, upon pouring away the surplus water, a white curdy precipitate will at once be observed at the bottom. This is the silver removed from the surface of the gold alloy, which has been precipitated by the muriatic acid and the common salt employed in the colouring mixture, into the form of chloride of silver. Now in this proceeding there is no gold to be seen in any of the vessels, but it is a well-known fact that a portion has been removed during the process from the surface of the gold articles. Where is it ? Why, it has become dissolved, and is therefore held invisible in the solution, in consequence of the colouring mixture forming the well-known solvent for gold, aqua-regia. This is exactly the case with a portion of silver in the silversmith's solutions; small particles are continually being dissolved by the mixtures employed, and are thus held in solution past the power of filtering, unless some chemical ingredient be added to it, which acts as a re-agent upon the metal sought to be recovered. From what we have seen in the colour water, which always contains a little silver, it is evident that both muriatic acid and common salt will do this work for us. We prefer common salt, on account 1 84 ECONOMICAL PROCESSES. of its cheapness, besides being easily procur-» able. The best mode of treatment for the silversmith's waste waters, after being collected together by pouring into the receptacle specially provided for that purpose, is to prepare a saline solution for the precipitation of the silver. This may be made by mixing together common salt and tepid water, in the following proportions : — Common salt . • . • 3 oz. Tepid water . . , . i pt. The water need only be sufficiently warm to dissolve the salt, and the proportions given do not require to be strictly adhered to ; in fact any quantity, if properly mixed, will do to effect the purpose required, and we merely give these as a guide for the process. In small establishments where only one tub is employed, the above pro- portion of saline solution may be added (every Saturday after the completion of the day's work) to the waste water ; the whole should then be stirred slowly in a circular direction, and allowed to settle until Monday morning, when all the surplus water may be drawn off and poured away. In larger establishments the accumulation of waste water is greater, therefore several collecting vessels should be employed, and the mixture for precipitation WASTE WATERS. may be added to them at other times than those stated, if required, and in accordance with work- shop regulations. The sediment produced in the collecting vessels after the supernatant water has all been drawn off, may be removed, dried by heat in a strong iron pan, and subsequently sold to the refiner. CHAPTER XIII. Licences and Duties Manufacturing silversmiths, and all persons trading in silver wares of more than five penny- weights each, are compelled to take out a licence ; articles under that weight being exempt. The licence has to be taken out annually, and costs £2 ts. for manufacturing or trading in articles under thirty ounces in weight, and ^5 155". for articles of thirty ounces and upwards. It should be taken out on the 6th day of July in each year at the Excise Office. This Act of the Legislature was passed in the year 1803, 43 George III. c. 69, and is not the only one which refers to the subject we are now considering. There are other con- ditions besides the compulsory Plate Licence^ as it is called, to which manufacturing silversmiths are subject, such as the supervision of the assay offices, in the case of certain descriptions of goods ; and the payment of duty on all such goods. At the DUTY ON SILVER PLATE. 187 present time all hall-marked silver articles have to pay a duty of is. 6d, per ounce, calculated not on their gross weight, but on five-sixths of the weight, the other sixth being allowed for waste in finishing the articles, as they are sent to the Hall in a half- finished state. The duty is paid at the Assay Ofiice at the time the goods are sent to be marked. Some dissatisfaction just now exists in a portion of the trade with regard to the above duty, as it is considered excessive, besides having a tendency to discourage the manufacture of silver wares ; be this as it may with respect to a certain description of goods, on the bulk of the trade it can have no injurious effect whatever. The duty is paid only on manufactured plafe and such other articles as are requested to be hall-marked ; besides which the trade in this particular department of manu- facture has never been very extensive, being con- fined to a few firms of eminence only. Before going into the general details of this question, it will be as well, perhaps, if we give a short history of the imposts that have existed in the silver trade for some time back. The first impost that we can find recorded took the shape of a dufyy and was levied as far back as the year 1720, by 6 George 1. c. 11, which placed a tax of td. per ounce on all silver plate manufactured in LICENCES AND DUTIES. Great Britain, which should be assayed or marked. The officers of the Excise were to collect the tax, but the great difficulty of ascertaining the number of ounces worked up, which the provisions of the Act did not clearly set forth, soon rendered it ineffectual, and it was consequently repealed by the statute 31 George II. c. 32, and a licence then substituted had to be taken out by manufacturers and dealers in plate. The licence at this period amounted to forty shillings, and had to be re- newed annually. In 1759, 32 George II. c. 14, it was increased to per annum, for every person trading in silver wares of thirty ounces and up- wards ; wares in one piece not exceeding five pennyweights in weight being exempted. The next change that took place was in the year 1784, 24 George III. c. 53, when a duty was again imposed of td. per ounce on silver plate. It was also enacted that the assay masters should stamp the work with the additional mark of the "King's head,'' as well as the others already ordered by the various Acts of the Legislature. The mark of the King's head represented that of the reigning sovereign, and showed that the duty had been paid on the work. The present mark, therefore, is the Queen's head. By an Act passed in the year 1797, 37 George SILVER DUTIES. 1 89 III. c. 90, the duty on silver ware was increased to one shilling per ounce, but the Act which subjected silver wares to a duty of (^d, per ounce (24 George III. c. 53) has not been repealed, and is therefore in existence to this very day ; by its provisions, however, the duty has been increased from time to time, until it has reached the amount at which it now stands. The present annual licences of ^2 ts. and ^5 i^s, respectively, were enacted in the year 1 803 by an Act of 43 George III. c. 69, and by these regula- tions every person making or trading in silver wares, or otherwise dealing in the raw material, is compelled to take out an annual licence, or render himself liable to a penalty of ^50. Another Act was passed in reference to the duty on silver goods in the year following, 1804, 44 George III. c. 98, whereby it was increased to i^. id, per ounce. And in the year 1815, 55 George III. c. 185, the Act was further extended to i^. td, per oz. calculated in the manner we have described at the beginning of this chapter. To sum up, therefore, the silver duties in their several forms, bearing upon the trade at the present time, we find them as follows : — Manufacturers of silver wares under 5 dwts. in weights. — Exempted from all duties. I go LICENCES AND DUTIES. Vendors and dealers in silver wares under 5 dwts. in weight. — Ex- empted from all duties. Manufacturers of silver wares under 30 oz. in weight. — A plate licence of £2 ds. annually. Vendors and dealers in silver wares under 30 oz. in weight. — A plate licence of £2 6s. annually. Manufacturers of silver wares of more than 30 oz. in weight. — A plate licence of £^ i^s, annually. Vendors and dealers in silver wares of more than 30 oz. in weight. — A plate licence of £^ i^s. an7tually. Bullion dealers, refiners, and assayers. — A plate licence of £^ i^s. annually. Manufacturers of plate. — A duty of is, 6d. per ounce. Hall-marked goods. — A duty of is. 6d. per ounce. Manufactured plate includes silver wares, such as spoons, forks, snuff-boxes, tea-sets, &c., and other articles used by the rich, and upon which the duty- is compulsory ; the duty on hall-marked goods, refers to all articles — with the exception of watch- cases, which are free — marked at the request of intended purchasers, which then pay duty on the manufacture of them. It will be observed from these remarks, that the silver trade generally is not at all affected by the duty tax ; the wares manufactured by the trade at large not coming directly under the compulsory provisions of the law bearing upon this subject. It has been said that the silver trade ministers to luxury, and no doubt that portion of it which manufactures costly articles of plate for the wealthy does so ; but we fail to see exactly, that the same remark applies LICENCES. 191 to that vast and increasing commercial industry which has sprung up of late years, and which bids fair to become one of the staple trades of the country. The duty-bearing articles are generally purchased by the classes of society who can well afford to pay the little extra which the duty im- poses, and as the tax affects only that section of the silver trade which manufactures the article of luxury, it is not at all likely that the general trade would be increased by its entire removal. The duty, no doubt to most persons, may seem exces- sive, when calculated upon the percentage system ; such for instance, as a tax of 20 per cent, upon spoons and forks ; or one of 1 5 per cent, upon chains; or of 12^ per cent, upon tea-sets, &c. ; this appears unjustly oppressive, and undoubtedly affects the silver-plate manufacturer more vitally than any one else. To the ordinary silversmith this question of duty is not likely to be of much importance; the agita- tion therefore commenced against it, may be expected to confine itself to those persons more directly affected, and whose interests would be advanced by its abolition. The question of licences is one of far greater importance to the trade generally than that of duties, every manufacturer and dealer being com- 192 LICENCES AND DUTIES. pelled to procure a licence before he can carry on his business. If more direct action were taken in regard to this particular question, we believe that the whole trade would enter into it ; for it resolves itself into this : — Why should the silver- smith or goldsmith pay for a licence for the purpose of manufacturing and dealing, any more than the coppersmith, or the manufacturer oi electro-plate, both of whom escape scot-free ? We believe this to be an unjust tax, and that it ought not to be levied upon one particular trade any more than another. We have also distinctions made in the general class of silversmiths : we have those who may trade without any licence at all ; those who may trade with a 46^. licence; and those who may trade with 115s. licence, that is, those who work or sell under 5 dwts., those who work or sell under 30 oz., and those who work or sell at any weight. Now this way of arranging the matter is very unsatisfactory to the trade generally ; and any one of the first two traders to whom we have referred, is liable at any moment to be summoned before a criminal court for an infringement of the law, if he should happen to sell an article slightly over the weight for which he is duly licensed. At the present time a raid is being made upon the goldsmiths with reference LICENCES. 193 to this particular question, and a number have already been summoned for infringing their licences in this manner. However, there appears to be some doubt with respect to the Act of Parliament bearing upon the subject, as in most of the cases the defendants have gained a verdict, the line of defence on their behalf being, that the clause of the act which bore upon the cases referred to, meant the weight in fine metal, ix, "pure gold,'' of which the article was composed, and not that of the gross weight of the article sold. It was urged by those engaged in the various cases on the side of the defendants, that, for a 46^". licence, the vendor could sell an article in which the gold did not exceed two ounces, without any regard to the quality and weight made by alloy, and on this plea the magistrates granted them a verdict. In the higher courts we believe such verdicts would be reversed, for we firmly believe that the framers of the act meant no such thing, however defective may have been the legality of the points raised. The clause of the act to which we have alluded is No. 5, and runs as follows : — " All articles sold, or offered for sale, or taken in pawn, or delivered out of pawn, and alleged to be composed wholly, or in part, of gold or silver, are for the purposes of the above act to be deemed to be composed K 194 LICENCES AND DUTIES. of gold or silver respectively; and if upon the hearing of any information for any offence against this act, any question shall arise touching the quantity of gold or silver contained in any articlCj the proof of such quantity shall be upon the defen- dant/' The Excise authorities argue that this clause means that the absolute or gross weight of an article sold as gold must not exceed two ounces, and one sold as silver must not exceed thirty ounces, gross weight. If this view of the meaning of the act be eventually taken, and we believe it will, it will certainly operate to a greater extent against makers and vendors of gold articles than it will against silversmiths. That part of the clause referring to the quantity of gold or silver contained in a given article, we believe has reference to articles containing jewels, &c., in their construction, which renders it exceed- ingly difficult to get at their exact weight, when the work is finally completed with these jewels properly affixed upon it, and not to the amount of fine material any article may contain by assay. The last part of the clause we have marked in italics, " proof of such quantity shall be upon the defendant," fully bears out these observations, because he is supposed to know the gross weight of any special article before the addition to it of any jewels. LICENCES. 195 We have been led to make these few remarks, in order to point out the gross anomalies which exist in the trade with respect to these licences, and to show the necessity of a reform taking place in a trade singled out from all the others, and made to pay a tax for the privilege of being allowed to make, or sell, articles in which gold or silver forms a component part. Therefore, if any action is to be taken in the matter, it must not be confined (if it is to be successful) to one par- ticular branch of this important trade, but all must unite, and every influence should be brought to bear upon it in as forcible a manner as possible. The electro-plate manufacturer, and the dealer in his wares, ought in all common fairness to the trade, to be put upon the same footing as the silver- smith, if this licence is to be still continued. In electro-plating establishments, thousands of ounces of silver are being annually used on the surface of such wares as are manufactured there ; and if such decisions as those lately given at the Thames and other police courts, with reference to the Act of Parliament on the subject of gold and silver wares are upheld, we fail to see how the manu- facturers of silver-plated articles, who are con- tinually making and selling them, containing as they do, more silver than the general public would K 2 196 LICENCES AND DUTIES. suppose, are to escape much longer these new interpretations of the Act of Parliament, and avoid being called upon to take out a licence in the same manner as the silversmiths. This is a tax in which the holder gets no direct return, and is levied in an unfair manner by the establishment of various grades of silversmiths, so that it gives a just cause for grievance. If the tax is to be upheld at all, why not make it equal by the establishment of one uniform rate for all trades alike i CHAPTER XIV, Useful Information for the Trade. Silversmith's Alloy. Copper, i oz. ; nickel, 3 dwts. 12 grs; bismuth, 6 grs. ; zinc, 2 dwts. 1 2 grs. ; soft iron, 1 2 grs. ; tin, 12 grs. This compound is said to form a fusible and malleable metal, that can be easily- worked by the silversmith ; it is also said to resist oxidation through atmospheric influences. Silver Wares. Never scratch-brush silver ware with a solution of soap and water; neither should it be washed with the solution if it can be avoided, as it gives it the colour of pewter ; better to scratch in weak ale, or if plain, rub it with a piece of wash-leather and prepared chalk. 198 USEFUL INFORMATION FOR THE TRADE. Cleaning Plate. Carbonate of ammonia, i oz. ; water, 4 oz. ; Paris white, 16 oz. ; well mix the ingredients together, and apply to the surface of the plate by means of a piece of soft leather or sponge. Imitation Silver. Fine silver, 6 dwts. ; nickel, 6 dwts. ; copper, 8 dwts. This alloy will cost about i^*. 9» o 19 o 950-1000 1st >» o i8 o 900-1000 Coinage. f* o i6 o 800-1000 2nd Standard. Germany . 0 19 o 950-1000 1st if o i8 o 900-1000 2nd „ >> o i6 o 800-1000 \ Austria . . o 15 o 750-1000 4th o 19 o 950-1000 1st o i8 o 900-1000 2nd „ it o i6 o 800-1000 a o 15 o 750-1000 4th „ Geneva . . o 19 o 950-1000 1st >> o 17 12 875-1000 2nd >> o i6 o 800-1000 Old Standard. Holland 0 17 12 875-1000 a 0 i8 i6 933-1000 1st i6 i6 833-1000 2nd Belgium o 19 o 950-1000 1st i8 o 900-1000 2nd ,, t o i6 0 800-1000 3rd „ Spam . . 0 i8 738-1000 Lowest One only. Portugal o i6 21 844-1000 208 FOREIGN SILVER STANDARDS. 0 o iin, ^ ri 6S • Silver per oz. Thousandth parts. XVCIil dl oz. dwts. grs. Neuchatel O i6 0 800-1000 One only. Russia . o i6 19 840-1000 1st Standard. Italy . . 0 15 0 7 50- T 000 2nd „ • o 19 0 950-1000 1st „ o 18 0 900-1000 2nd „ China . o 16 0 800-1000 o 19 Hi 980-1000 About. Norway . o 16 19 840-1000 One only. Sweden . o 16 ^9 840-1000 >> Denmark o 16 19 840-1000 if In France, all articles manufactured as silver are subject to Government control and pay duty, but this is very slight compared with the English duty, amounting only to one franc per hectrogramme^ which is equal to about threepence per ounce. This is exclusive of the charge for testing and marking ; the state of the articles sent for this purpose with regard to the state of manufacture is, moreover, very different from the custom in this country. Here they are sent in their rough or half-manufactured state, and this seems better suited to the particular processes through which they have to pass ; whereas in France they may be tested and marked in their whole or finished state ; and, if thought requisite, this operation may be performed while the goods are on their way to their final destination, by calling at the Control OflRce for that purpose. FRENCH WORKMEN. 20g The Continental silversmiths, especially the French workmen, exhibit much ingenuity, original thought, and refined taste, in the execution of their work ; and the natural capacity for design which they possess enables them to produce articles of a very high order and artistic character. The con- struction of some of their productions is exceed- ingly ornamental and decorative, and in some instances this is even carried to excess, as may be seen from some very elaborate articles which they manufacture. To them belongs the credit of being producers of the most artistic and best decorative work in the whole world. They set the fashions and work them out with a will to be only found in a people so enthusiastic as the French. Their jewellery is very elegant, light, and showy ; some of which is prepared so thin as regards material, that it has to be supported underneath by a wax composition, which, however, gives increased strength to all articles so manipulated. With regard to articles of vertu^ the French workmen certainly far excel those of any other country : they are more original, and bring into play greater ingenuity in the various processes which they employ in their manufactures. Still with all this ingenuity and skill, their works of art in this department are not 210 FOREIGN SILVER STANDARDS. durable, being very tmselfied ; in wear their shape and form soon undergo a change, and eventually they soon get destroyed. In this branch of art the French workman might learn something to his advantage from the English style of work, which is the most durable of any nation in the world. French silver plate and jewellery of the best manufacture partake of the first standard ; all other kinds are of the lowest standard. In Germany all silver manufactures are placed under Imperative control, and lower standards than those given in the table, under their respective heads, cannot be worked. The German style is similar to that of the French, but the former manufacture an unusually large quantity of filigree articles, very light in construction, tasteful, and cheap; and the possession of these advantages enables them to export to England and other countries their wares at a cheap rate. They are commonly sold by weight, and not so much per article ; in many cases the charge does not exceed 12^. td. per ounce. In filigree work the Germans cannot equal the taste and variety displayed in Indian workmanship. In India the natives have definite designs, but the Germans are too fond of a variety of colours in their wares, which do not always harmonize with their particular kind of work. ENGLISH WORK. 211 In Austria silver manufactures are commonly ornamented by enamel, niello, &c., which gives them a very pleasing appearance. They are usually light and showy, and something after the style of French work. The laws affecting the Austrian silver workers are the same as those of Germany. The English style of work is strong and solid ; and is undoubtedly superior to that of all Conti- nental manufacturers as regards substantial work- manship, careful manipulation, and durability. It is, moreover, capable of a higher finish, and possesses more evenness of surface, together with a combination of strength, that admirably suits it for articles and utensils for daily use, and which causes it to be preferred before that of any other nation ; and while France, Germany, and other countries may exhibit greater ingenuity, to Eng- land belongs the credit of producing the best finished and the most durable work of any nation in the world. INDEX. ^CIDS, vegetable, lo Action of acids on copper, 44 of silver under heat, 8 Acts of the Legislature, 189 on licences, 186 clause on, 193, 194 Advantages of scorification, 20 Air in furnace, 33 Alkalies, caustic, 10 Allowed, remedy in fineness, 72 Alloy, 41 Clark's patent, 172 commonly used, 63 for cupel quantity, 35 for hall-marking, 62 for plate, 71 for silver-wares, 72 French, for coinage, 69 French, for plate, 69 French, for silver- ware, 69 German, for coinage, 71 instructions in preparing, 70 new, 205 Nos. I to 8, 64—67 of the highest quality, 62 silver dissolving, 202 standard, 61 white, 172 Alloy, with copper, 68 with palladium, 173 with platinum, 172 Alloys of common silver, 167- 170 characteristics of, 173, 174 imitation, 166 — 173 imitation, uses of, 173 of nickel, 46 of silver, 42 of tin with gold, 49 of tin with silver, 49 silversmith's, 40, 197 Aluminium alloy, 205 solder, 206 Amalgam, 41 Amalgamation of zinc, 153 America, 11 American supply of silver, 12 Ancient method of assaying, 37 workers in tin, 48 Ancients, 6 Annealing silver, 109 Anthracite, 21 Art in soldering, 90 in the silver trade, 122 Articles, hand-made, 54 of silver common, 147 INDEX. 213 Art of soldering, 74 Arts, metals employed in, 41 Assay crucible, 16 charge for, 17 English system, 39 fluxes, 16 of silver ores, 16 scorification, 19 weighing of, 30 Assayer*s muffle, 28 Assaying, borax, use of, in, 22 Dr. Lamborn on, 38 of silver ores, 16 Austrian style of work, 211 gATTERY, Bunsen's, 152 constant, 150 exciting mixture, 151 for plating, 150 solution, 151 Bean-shot copper, 44 Best crucibles, 95 Birmingham, 52 Black cyanide, 157 Blowpipes, 89 Boiling-out mixture, 144 pan, 143 pickle, 93 Bone-ash, 32 cupel, 33 Borax, 22 sprinkle, 92 Breaking-down rollers, 1 12 Brightening, 29 British Isles, 1 1 Brown colour on silver goods, 146 Burning of lemel, 104 of polishings, 179, 180 Burnished silver work, 124 Burnishing silver work, 161, 163 (CALCULATED alloys, various, 80 Calculating the qualities of silver, 64 Carbonate of soda, 16, 102 Casting-mould, 18 Cause of inferior work, 74 Caustic alkalies, 10 Cement for chasers, 121 Chain bracelets, 128 Chain solder, 85 Characteristics of imitation alloys, 173. 174 of metals, 41 Charcoal, 99 Charge and flux for crucible, 23 for assay, 1 7 for scorification assay, 20 Chief places for filigree, 53 of filigree manufacture, 8 uses of silver, 9 Chinese filigree, 56 silver, 170 Chloride of silver, 183 Christianity and tin, 48 Clark's alloy, 172 Cleaning plate, 198 powder for plate, 206 Coinage, 69 alloys for, 71 English, 61 French, 69 German, 71 Collecting-vessels, 184 Colour-improving, 149 Common articles of silver, 147 easy solder, 85 silver alloy, 167 — 173 silver solder, 84 solder, 85 solders, 81 Composition for solder, 81 214 Conducting-wires, 154 Connections for soldering, 77 Constant battery, 150 Continental cheap labour, 54 method of assaying, 22 silversmiths, 208 Copper, 42 action of acids on, 44 bean-shot, 44 characteristics of, 43 chemical name, 44 dissolving, 202 for alloying, 68 powder for, 199 protoxide of, 44 solder with, 76 Cost of silver alloys, 64, 67 of silver-rolling, 112 Cronstedt, 45 Crucible, dimensions, 16 for lemel, 106 mixture for, 104 pouring lemel from, 107 weighing metal for, 95 Crucible assay, 16 fluxes for, 16 process of, 19 Crucibles, 95 best to employ, 95 action with fluxes, 96 testing soundness, 97 Cupel, defects in, 33 mode of manufacture, 26 mould, 27 quantity of alloy for, 35 tongs, 28 withdrawal of silver, 34 Cupellation, 26 of silver ores, 31 purity of silver, 37 Cup-fusing, 19 Currents of air to furnace, 33 INDEX. Cyanide solution, 156 black, 157 J)EFECTS in bone-ash cupel, 33 Density of nickel, 45 of silver, 7 of tin, 48 Dimensions of crucible, 16 Dipping-mixture, 199 Directions on melting, 94 in preparing solders, 88 Discoverer of electro-plating, 149 Dissolving silver, 202 copper, 202 impurities, 103 soft-solder, 202 silver solder, 202 sealing-wax, 202 tin, 48 Dissolution of silver, 9 Dr. Lambom, 38 Drawbacks to hall-marking, 63 Draw-bench, 114, 115 Drawing fine wire, 116 Draw-plate, 114 Draw-tongs, 115 Drossy solders, 88 Drum for wire-drawing, 115 DuctiHty of nickel, 45 of silver, 6 of tin, 49 of zinc, 48 gAST Indian silversmiths, 141 Easy solders, 79 for chains, 85 silver solder, 80 solder, 81 solder, for filigree work, 84 solder, common, 85 Economical processes, 175 Economy, i INDEX 215 Education, technical, 2 Electro-plate 46 Electro-plating, 147 discoverer of, 149 soft solder, 202 Elements, metallic, table of, 50 Employed metals 41 Enamelling, 131 England, alloy commonly used, 63 English and foreign workmen, 2 coinage, 61 filigree workers, 91 silversmiths, 63 standard for silver, 60 style of work, 211 system of assay, 39 Enriching the surfaces of silver, 139 Exciting mixture for battery, 151 Experts, Government, 73 piLIGREE manufacture, 8 method of making, 57 of China and Japan, 56 of Norway and Sweden, 56 silver work, 127 wire, new, 59 work, 5, 40, 52 working, 56 Filed solders, 76 Flatting of twisted wire, 59 Flux and charge for crucible, 23 for soldering, 77 in pouring, loi Fluxes for assay, 16 their action on crucibles, 96 employed in melting, 96 Foreign silver currency, 13 silver standards, 207, 8 workmen, 2 French alloy for silver ware, 69 alloy for coinage, 69 alloy for plate, 70 French duty, 208 standards, 69 style of work, 209 Fusibility of nickel, 45 of tin, 48 of silver solders, 80 Fusing-cup, 19 QALVANIC ring, 129 German coinage, 7 1 standards, 72 style of work, 210 Gold alloyed with tin, 49 mode of soldering, 88 removing, from silver, 198, 205 Goods, silver, brown colour of, 146 Government experts, 73 Gravity, specific, of zinc, 47 Great Britain, 1 1 Guarantee mark, 73 I^ALL-MARKING, alloy for, 62 drawbacks, 63 Hand-made articles, 54 Hard silver solders, 79 solder, best, 81 Hardest silver solder, 78 silver solder, 79 Hardness of silver, 8 Hawk-sparrow, 119 Heating power of silver, 7 Hollow silver work, 131 JMITATION silver alloys, 166, 173 alloys, characteristics, of, 173 alloys, uses of, 173 silver, 166, 197 Improving colour of electro-plate, 149 Impurities, dissolving, 105 Indian filigree workers, 5 2l6 INDEX. Indian filigree silversmiths, 141 mode of whitening, 142 Industrial arts, 41 Inferior plating solution, 159 Ingot mould, 100 Instructions in preparing alloys, 68 Irregularities in rolling-mills, no APANESE filigree, 56 Jewellery trade, state of, 12 J^AW on silver wares, 73 Lead, 103 Legislature, Acts of, 186 Lemaille solder, 91 Lemel, 104 burning, 104 crucible, 106 melting, 104 — 106 pot for, 104 pouring from crucible, 107 Licence question, 191 Licences, 190 Litharge, 17 Loss, working, 175 real, 175 total working, 1 76 jyjAKING filigree, 56 Malleability of nickel, 45 of silver, 6 of tin, 49 of zinc, 48 Maltese filigree, 55 Manner of removing litharge, 35 Manufacture of cupels, 26 inferior, 73 of fihgree, 53 of silver wares, 72 Mark, guarantee, 72 Marking, hall, 62 Marking, hall, drawbacks of, 63 Material, bad working, 98 Mechanical uses of silver, 52 Medium solders, 82 silver solder, 79 Melting, crucible for, 99 directions on, 94 fluxes employed, 96 imitation alloys, 166 points of metals, 51 solders, 86 tongs for, 100 Mercury, 15 Metal, fusible, 98 pure, 56 Metallic elements, table of, 50 Metals, 41 their characteristics 41 Method of assaying, 22 for whitening, 139 of calculating qualities, 64 of preparing filigree, 59 Mills, rolling, no Kemp's, III Mine, richest, 12 Mining, 11 Mixing metals for melting, 97 Mixture, boiling-out, 144 dipping, 199 for washing-out, 138 stripping, 200 Mixtures for whitening, 147 for battery, 152 nitrate of silver, 148 Modes of melting lemel, 105 of preparing ring, 130 of whitening, Indian, 142 of whitening, our, 145 Molten metal, 99 lemel, 103 Mould-casting, 18 Mould cupel, 27 INDEX. 217 Mould ingot, 100 Muffle assayers, 28 Js^ATIVE silver, ii Necessity for pure metal, 56 New alloy, 205 method for filigree, 59 Nickel, 45 Nitrate of silver, 8 of silver, mixture, 148 Nitre, 10 Norway filigree, 56 QLD method of filigree, 57 Oldest method of whitening, 140 On the melting of silver, 94 working of silver, 108 Ores of silver, 9 Our mode of whitening, 146 Oxidizing silver work, 163 PALLADIUM alloy, 173 Pallion solder, 89 Parliament, Acts of, 190 Perchloride of iron 205 Physical properties of metals, 51 Plain solid work, 127 Plate, 4 alloy for, 70 cleaning powder, 206 electro, 46, 150 French, 70 manufacture, 190 powder, 202 Plating, battery for 150 discoverer of, 149 electro, 150 fluid silver, 206 soft solder, 201 solution, 157 Plating solutions, recovery of silver, 160 Platinum alloy, 172 Plumbago, crucible for melting, 99 Polished silver, 7 Polishing, 135 lathe, 137 Polishings, burning of, 179 Pouring ofFlemel, 107 Powder for silver, 200 Precious metal, i Precipitation of silver, 183 Preparation for assay, 1 7 of bone-ash, 32 of plating solution, 1 55 of solders, 87 Present state of silver trade, 128 Press, 127 stamping, 132 Price of silver, 9 Principal alloys of silver, 42 metals, 51 Process, scorification, 18 ' advantages of, 20 details of, 23 of silver recovery, 180 — 183 Producing various shades, 165 Production of surface, 135 Protect polish of metals, 200 Protoxide of copper, 44 of zinc, 102 Pure silver, 3 Purity of silver, 37 QUALITIES used by silversmiths, 64 Quantity of alloy for cupel, 35 Quick-running solder, 85 J^AISED work, 120 Raising, 122 Recovery of silver from waste, 160 of silver from waste waters, 183, i8S 2l8 INDEX. Refining surface of silver, 146 Remarks on silver solders, 80 Remedy in fineness, 72 Removal of litharge, 35 Removing gold from silver, 198 gold from silver wares, 205 Resist varnish, 202 Ring, galvanic, 129 preparing wire for, 1 30 Rollers, slitting, 1 12 breaking-down, 112 Rolling, silver, 108 mills, no silver, 112 wire, 113 gAL-AMMONIAC, 103 Saving waste, 177 Scientific name for tin, 49 Scorification process, 18 assay, 20 Scorifier, 19 special form, 19 Scrap silver, 102 Scratch-brushing, 161 brush lathe, 161 Scriptural testimony, 37, 38 Sealing-wax, dissolving, 202 Sediment, 185 Separation of silver, 21 Shades, 165 Shop floors, 177 Shot-copper for alloying, 44 Silver a precious metal, i action under heat, 8 alloy, dissolving, 202 alloy for coinage, 72 alloy, standard, 61 alloyed with tin, 49 alloys, Chinese, 170 alloys, common, 167, 172 alloys, imitation, 167, 172 Silver alloys. No. i, 64 No. 2, 64 No. 3, 65 No. 4, 65 No. 5, 66 No. 6, 66 No. 7, 67 No. 8, 67 American supply, 12 and aqua-regia, 8 and mercury, j5 annealing, 109 articles, 194 articles, common, 147 assay, 14 British, chief sources, 13 British yield, 1 1 burnishing, 162 characteristics of, 5 chief alloy of, 30 chloride, 183 commercial, 9 currency, 6 currency, foreign, 13 density of, 7 dissolution of, 9 dissolving, 202 ductility of, 6 easily tarnished, 129 European supplies, 12 filigree work, 125 for filigree work, 5 fusibility of, 7 goods, brown colour, 146 hardness of, 8 heating power of, 7 imitation, 198 known to the ancients, 6 law on, 73 lead and tin in, T03 malleability of, 6 mechanical uses of, 52 INDEX. 219 Silver, method of calculating, 63 mining, 11 native, 11 nitrate of, 8, 148 ores, 9 ores, assay of, 16 oxidizing, 163, 198 plating fluid, 206 polished, 7 powder, 199, 200 powder for copper, 199 precipitating, 183 principal alloys, 42 pure, 3 purity of, after cupellation, 37 recovery of, 160 recovery, 177, 178 rolling, 109 rolling, table of cost, 112 solders, 81 solder, dissolving, 202 solder, easy, 82 solder, hardest, 79 solder, medium, 82 solder, zinc in, 46 Wr solders, fusibility of, 80 standards, foreign, 207 stripping mixture, 200 surface, improving, 139 tarnished, 7 test for, 6 trade, art in, 123 uses of, 9 various qualities, 52 ware, 69, 195 ware, French, 69 ware, German, 71 wares, alloys for, 72 wares, removing gold, 205 wares, testings 203 , . ^ > > weighing,' 30 \ / ' whitening of, 140 L Silver work, burnished, 124 work, hollow, 131 yield of, 13 Silversmiths, 63 alloys, 40, 197 continental, 209 East Indian, 141 working, 2 Skittle-pot, 25 for lemel, 104 Slitting-rollers, 112 Snarling-tools, 122 Soda, carbonate of, 16, 102 Soft .solder, 90, 202 dissolving, 202 plating, 202 Solder, composition for, 81, 98 best hard, 81 common, 83, 85 common easy, 86 dish, 89 easy, 79, 82, 86 filed, 76 for aluminium, 206 for chains, 85 for filigree, 84, 91 hard, 77 Lemaille, 91 medium, 76, 82 pallion, 88 quick running, 85 very common, 87 with arsenic, 86 with copper and silver, 76 with zinc, 76 Soldering, art of, 74, 90 alloy, dissolving, 202 connections, 77 mode of, 88 firid, 201 . J J ^ ^ ' '.I ; flux,v -/^ ^ , » .i i ■; Solders containing tin, 75 ' ^ ' 2 220 INDEX. Solders, drossy, 88 for enamelling, 84 melting of, 83 preparations of, 87 remarks on, 80 tin in, 49 Solid plain work, 127 Solution for battery, 151 cyanide, 156 for plating, 157, 158 for precipitation, 184 inferior, 159 No. I, 163 No. 2, 164 No. 3, 164 Soundness of crucibles, 97 Spain, II Sparrow-hawk, 119 Special soldering flux, 92 Specific gravity of zinc, 47 Spelter, 46 used by jewellers, 47 Spinning, 134, 135 Sprouting, 29 Stamped work, 126 Stamping-press, 132 Standard alloy for hall-marking, 62 alloys of the highest quality? 62 Standards, English, 60 French, 70 German, 71 State in which silver is found, 14 State of silver trade, 128 State of the jewellery trade, 12 Stone, Water-of-Ayr, 136 Strength of solution, 152 Stripping silver, 201 Style of work, Austrian, 211 i;n^lish,!^2i'.( ' ' ; ; ; *Fi-ehcii, io4 ' ' ' ' ^\ Style of work, German, 210 Indian, 210 Surface, refining of silver, 145 Swedish filigree, 56 System of assaying, 39^ 'pABLE of cost of silver-rolling, 112 of metallic elements, 50 of various duties, 90 Tarnishing of silver, 7 of zinc, 47 Tax or licence, 196 Technical education, 2 Test for pure silver, 6 Testing crucible, 97 silverwares, 203 Testimony, Scriptural, 37, 38 Test-ring, 31 Tin, 48 alloyed with gold, 49 alloyed with silver, 49 ancient workers, 48 and Christianity, 48 density of, 48 dissolving, 48 ductility of, 49 fusibility of, 48 in solders, 49, 76 malleability of, 49 scientific name, 50 tenacity of, 49 vapours, 49 Tongs, draw, 115 Tongs for melting, 100 Total working loss, 176 Trade, silver, state of, 128 useful information for, 197 Treatment, economical, I in'fuj'nace, iS - ' of^aste, 179' INDEX. 22 Treatment of waste liquids, i8o Twisting wires, 58 UNJUSTLY assessed tax, 195 Uses of silver, 9 borax, 22 for imitation alloys, 173 of lathe, 58 silver, mechanical, 52 VAPOURS of tin, 49 Various qualities of silver, 52 duties, table of, 190 metals, mixing, 95 Varnish, resist, i \YARES, ornamental, 4 law on, 73 removing gold from, 205 silver alloy for, 72 silver, 197 testing purity, 203 Washing-out mixture, 138 Waste, saving, 178 liquids, treatment of, 180 treatment of, 181 waters, 182 — 185 water, precipitation in, 184 Water-of-Ayr stone, 139 Weighing of silver assay, 30 Whitening, old method, 140 Indian mode of, 142 our mode of, 145 powder, 147 Wire for filigree, 59 rolling, 112 drawer's drum, 115 drawer's punch, &c., 117 drawing, fine, 117 Wires, conducting, 154 Withdrawal from cupel, 34 Work, Austrian style, 2 1 1 burnishing, 162 English, style, 211 filigree, 5, 40, 125 French duty on, 208 French style, 209 German style, 210 hollow, 131 Indian style, 210 silver, burnishing, 124 solid, 127 stamped, 132 Workers, Indian, 5 Working fihgree, 56 loss, 175 material, bad, 98 silversmiths, 2 total, 176 Workmen, English and Foreign, - Workmanship, process of, 55 Wrought work, 118 YIELD of silver, 11, 13 2INC, 46 a fusible metal, 98 amalgamation, 153 annealing, 47 ductility of, 48 gravity of, 47 in silver solder, 46, 76 malleability of, 48 on floors, 178 tarnishing of, 47 tenacity of, 48 PRINTED BY J. S. VIRTUE AND CO., LIMITED, CITY ROAD, LONDON. Valuable Books for Jewellers, Goldsmiths, Etc. ELECTRO-METALLURGY PRACTICALLY TREATED. By Alex- ander Watt, F.R.S. S. A. Including the Electro-Deposition of Copper, Silver, Gold, Brass and Bronze, Platinum, Lead, Nickel, Tin, Zins, Alloys of Metals, Pract cal Notes, &c., &c. Eighth Edition, revised, including the most recent Processes. i2mo, 3s. 6d. cloth. ELECTRO-PLATING : A Practical Handbook. By J. W. Urquhart, C.E. ' Crown 8vo, 5s. cloth. ELECTRO-TYPING : A Practical Manual, forming a New and Systematic Guide to the Reproduction and Multiplication of Printing Surfaces and Works of Art by the Electro-Deposition of Metals. By J. W. Urquhart, C.E. Crown 8vo, 5s. cloth. ELECTRIC LIGHT : Its Production and Use, embodying plain Directions for the Treatment of Voltaic Batteries, Electric Lamps, and Dynamo- Electric Machines. By J. W. Urquhart, C.E. Edited byF. C. Webb, M.I.C.E., M.S.T.E. Second Edition, carefully revised, with 128 Illustra- tions. Crown 8vo, 7s. 6d. cloth. A RUDIMENTARY TREATISE ON CLOCKS AND WATCHES, AND BELLS. By Sir Edmund Beckett, Bart., LL.D., Q.C., F.R.A.S. Seventh Edition, revised and enlarged. Limp cloth (No. 67, Weale's Series), 4s. 6d. ; cloth boards, 5s. 6d, THE PAWNBROKERS', FACTORS', AND MERCHANTS' GUIDE TO THE LAW OF LOANS AND PLEDGES : with the Statutes and a Digest of Cases on Rights and Liabilities, Civil and Criminal, as to Loans and Pledges of Goods, Debentures, Mercantile and other Securities. By H. C. FOLKARD, Esq., Barrister-at-Law. Fcap. 8vo, 3s. 6d. cloth. LATHE- WORK : a Practical Treatise on the Tools, Appliances, and Processes employed in the Art of Turning. By Paul N. Hasluck. Second Edition, thoroughly revised, with a New Chapter on the Screw- cutting Lathe. Crown 8vo, ss. MATHEMATICAL INSTRUMENTS : Their Construction, Adjustment, Testing, and Use ; comprising Drawing, Measuring, Optical, Surveying, and Astronomical Instruments. By J. F. Heather, M.A. Enlarged Edition. i2mo, 5s. cloth. ORNAMENTAL ALPHABETS, ANCIENT AND MEDIEVAL; from the Eighth Century, with Numerals, Monograms, &c. For the Use of Engravers, &c. By F. Delamotte. Printed in Colours. Tenth and Cheaper Edition. Royal 8vo, obiong, 2s. 6d. ornamental boards. EXAMPLES OF MODERN ALPHABETS, PLAIN AND ORNA- MENTAL. For the Use of Engravers, &c. By F. Delamotte. Printed in Colours. Eighth and Cheaper Edition. Royal 8vo, oblong, 2s. 6d. ornamental boards. CROSBY LOCKWOOD & CO., 7, Stationers' Hall Court, Ludgate Hill, E.C. LONDON, 1862. THE PRIZE MEDAL Was awarded to the Publishers of "WEALE'S SERIES." A NEW LIST OF WEALE'S SERIES RUDIMENTARY SCIENTIFIC, EDUCATIONAL, AND CLASSICAL. Comprising nearly Three Hundred and Fifty distinct works in almost every department of Science ^ Arty and Education^ recommended to the notice of F.iifrivpfrs, Architects, Builders, Artisans, and Students generally, as well as to those interested in Workvien^ s Libraries, l.itet'ary and Scientific Institutions ^ Colleges, Schools, Science Classes, dr*c., &^c, IS* WEALE'S SERIES includes Text-Books on almost every branch of Science and Industry, comprising such subjects as Agriculture, Architecture and Building, Civil Engineering, Fine Arts, Mechanic? and Mechanical Engineering, Physical and Chemical Science, and many miscellaneous Treatises. The whole are constantly undergoing revision, and new editions, brought up to the latest discoveries in scientific research, are constantly issued. The prices at which they are sold are as low as ^heir excellence is assured." — American Literary Gazette. " Amongst the literature of technical education, Weale's Series has ever enjoyed a high reputation, and the additions being made by Messrs. Crosby LOCKWOOD & Co. render the series even more complete, and bring the infor- mation upon the several subjects down to the present time." — Mining Journal. " It is not too much to say that no books have ever proved more popular with, or more useful to, young engineers and others than the excellent treatises comprised in Weale's Series." — Engineer. "The excellence of Weale's Series is now so well appreciated, that it would be wasting our space to enlarge upon their general usefulness and value." — Builder. " WEALE'S SERIES has become a standard as well as an unrivalled collection of treatises in all branches of art and science." — Public Opinion, 5'UNlTEDr>7l\TEf^ " ^CENTEf^NIAL^ PHILADELPHIA, 1876. THE PRIZE MEDAL Was awarded to the Publishers for Books : Rudimentary, Scientific, "WEALE'S SERIES," ETC. CROSBY LOCKWOOD & SON, 7, stationers' hall court, LUDGATE hill, LONDON, E.C 7 WEALE*S RUDIMENTARY SERIES, WEALFS RUDIMENTARY SCIENTIFIC SERIES. The volumes of this Series are freely Illustrated witn Woodcuts, or otherwise, where requisite. Throughout the fol- lowing List it must be understood that the books are bound in limp cloth, unless otherwise stated ; but the volumes marked ivith a X may also be had strongly bound in cloth boards for 6d, extra, N.B. — In ordering from this List it is recommended^ as a means of facilitating business and obviating error^ to quote the numbers affixed to the volumes^ as well as the titles and prices. CIVIL ENGINEERING, SURVEYING, ETG- 31*.' WELLS AND WELL-SINKING. By John Geo. Swindell, A.R.I. B.A., and G. R. Burnell, C.E. Revised Edition. With a New Appendix on the Qualities of Water. Illustrated. 2S. 35. THE BLASTING AND QUARRYING OF STONE, for Building and other Purposes. With Remarks on the Blowing up of Bridges. By Gen. Sir John Burgoyne, Bart., K.C.B. Illustrated, is. 6d. 43. TUBULAR, AND OTHER IRON GIRDER BRIDGES, ^^r- ticularly describing the Britannia and Conway Tubular Bridges. By G. Drysdale Dempsey, C.E. Fourth Edition. 2S. 44. FOUNDATIONS AND CONCRETE WORKS, with Practical Remarks^ on Footings, Sand, Concrete, Beton, Pile- driving. Caissons, and Cofferdams, &c. By E. Dobson. Fifth Edition, is. 6d. 60. LAND AND ENGINEERING SURVEYING, By T. Baker, C.E. Fourteenth Edition, revised by Professor J. R. Young. 2s.t 80*. EMBANKING LANDS FROM THE SEA, With examples and Particulars of actual Embankments, &c. By J. Wiggins, F.G.S. 2S. 81. WATER WORKS, for the Supply of Cities and Towns. With a Description of the Principal Geological Formati'^ns of England as in- fluencing Supplies of Water ; and Details of Engines a,nd Pumping Machinery for raising Water. By Samuel Hughes, F.G.S., C.E. New Edition. as.X 118. CIVIL ENGINEERING IN NORTH AMERICA, a Sketch of. By David Stevenson, F.R.S.E., &c. Plates and Diagrams. 3s. 167. IRON BRIDGES, GIRDERS, ROOFS, AND OTHER WORKS. By Francis Campin, C.E. 2s. 6d.X 197. ROADS AND STREETS (THE CONSTRUCTION OF), By Henry Law, C.E., revised and enlarged by D. K. Clark, C.E., including pavements of Stone, Wood, Asphalte, &c. 4s. 6d.t 203. SANITARY WORK IN THE SMALLER TOWNS AND IN VILLAGES. By C. Slagg, A.M.T.C.E. Revised Edition. 3s.t 2 1 2. GAS' WORKS, THEIR CONSTR UCTIONAND ARRANGE- MENT \ and the Manufacture and Distribution of Coal Gas. Originally written by Samuel Hughes, C.E. Re-written and enlarged by William Richards, C.E. Seventh Edition, with important additions. 5s. 6d.t 213. PIONEER ENGINEERING, A Treatise on the Engineering Operations connected with the Settlement of Waste Lands in New Coun- tries. By Edward Dobson, Assoc. Inst. C.E. 4s. 6d.t 216. MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION ; A Theoretical and Practical Treatise on the Strains, Designing, and Erection of Works of Con- struction. By Francis Campin, C.E. Second Edition, revised. 3s. :^ 219. CIVIL ENGINEERING, By Henry Law, M.Inst. C.E. Including Hydraulic Engineering by Geo. R. Burnell, M.Inst. C.E. Seventh Edition, revised, with large additions by D. Kinnear Clark, M.Inst. C.E. 6s. 6d., Cloth boards, 7s. 6d. The X indicates that these vols, may be had strongly bound at 6d. extra. LONDON: CROSBY LOCKWOOD AND SON, WEALE'S RUDIMENTARY SERIES. 3 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING, ETC. I 33, CRANES^ the Construction of, and other INIachinery for Raising ; Heavy Bodies. By Joseph Glynn, F.R.S. Illustrated, is. 6d, I 34. THE STEAM ENGINE. By Dr, Lardner. Illustrated, is. 6d. 59. STEAM BOILERS: their Construction and Management. By R. Armstrong, C.E. Illustrated, is. 6d. 82. THE POWER OF WATER, as applied to drive Flour Mills, and to give motion to Turbines, &c. By Joseph Glynn, F.R.S. 2s. t i 98. PRACTICAL MECHANISM, the Elements of; and Machine Tools. By T. Baker, C.E. With Additions by J. Nasmyth, C.E. 2s. 6d.i f 139. THE STEAM ENGINE, a Treatise on the Mathematical Theory of, with Rules and Examples for Practical Men. By T. Baker, C.E. is. 6d, : 164. MODERN WORKSHOP PRACTICE, as applied to Steam Engines, Bridges, Cranes, Ship-building, &c. By J. G. Winton. Fourth Edition, much enlarged and carefully revised. 3s. 6d.t {Just published. 165. IRON AND HEAT, exhibiting the Principles concerned in the Construction of Iron Beams, Pillars, and Girders. By J. Armour. 2s. 6d.i I 166. POWER IN MOTION : Horse-Power, Toothed- Wheel Gearing, Long and Short Driving Bands, and Angular Forces. By J. Armour, 2s.t i ryi. THE WORKMAN'S MANUAL OF ENGINEERING DRAWING. ByJ.MAXTON. 6th Edn. With 7 Plates and 350 Cuts. 3s. 6d.i ! 190. STEAM AND THE STEAM ENGINE, Stationary and I Portable. Being an Extension of the Elementary Treatise on the Steam Engine of Mr. John Sewell. By D. K. Clark, M.I. C.E. 3s. 6d.t 1200. FUEL, its Combustion and Economy. By C. W. Williams, I AVith Recent Practice in the Combustion and Economy of Fuel — Coal, Coke, Wood, Peat, Petroleum, &c.— by D. K. Clark, M.I.C.E. 3s. 6d.4: 1202. LOCOMOTIVE ENGINES. By G. D. Dempsey, C.E. ; with I large additions by D. Kinnear Clark, M.I.C.E. x^.X \Zl\. THE BOILERMAKER'S ASSISTANT in Drawing, Tem- [ plating, and Calculating Boiler and Tank Work. By John Courtney, Practical Boiler Maker. Edited by D. K. Clark, C.E. 100 Illustrations. 2s. II217. SEWING MACHINERY : Its Construction, History, &c., with ! full Technical Directions for Adjusting, &c. By J. W. Urquhart, C.E. 2s.$ yni. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING. Comprising Metallurgy, I Moulding, Casting, Forging, Tools, Workshop Machinery, Manufacture of the Steam Engine, &c. By Francis Campin, C.E. Second Edition. 2s. 6d.t |!236. DETAILS OF MACHINERY. Comprising Instructions foi the Execution of various Works in Iron. By Francis Campin,'C.E. 3s. + ;237. THE SMITHY AND FORGE; including the Farrier's Art and Coach Smithing. By W. J. E. Crane. Illustrated. 2s. 6d.J .238. THE SHEET-METAL WORKER' S GUIDE; a Practical Hand- book for Tinsmiths, Coppersmiths, Zincworkers, &c. With 94 Diagrams and Working Patterns. By W. J. E. Crane. Second Edition, revised, is. 6d. 251. STEAM AND MACHINERY MANAGEMENT : with Hints on Construction and Selection. By M. Powis Bale, M.I. M E. 2s. 6d.$ 254. THE BOILERMAKER'S READY-RECKONER. By J. Courtney. Edited by D. K. Clark, C.E. 4s., limp; 5s., half-bound. 255. LOCOMOTIVE ENGINE-DRIVING. A Practical Manual for Engineers in charge of Locomotive Engines. By Michael Reynolds, M.S.E. Eighth Edition. 3s. 6d., limp ; 4s. 6d. cloth boards. 1256. STATIONARY ENGINE-DRIVING. A Practical Manual for I Engineers in charge of Stationary Engines. By Michael Reynolds, M.S.E. i Third Edition. 3s. 6d. limp ; 4s. 6d. cloth boards. |26o. IRON BRIDGES OF MODERATE SPAN: their Construc- : tion and Erection. By Hamilton W. Pendred, C.E. 2s. L The % indicates that these vols, may be had strongly bound at 6d. extra. \ 7, stationers' hall COURT, LUDGATE HILL, E.G. 4 weale's rudimentary series. MINING, METALLURGY, ETC. 4. MINERALOGY, Rudiments of; a concise View of the General Properties of Minerals. By A. Ramsay, F.G.S., F.R.G.S., &c. Third Edition, revised and enlarged. Illustrated. 3s. 6d.t 117. SUBTERRANEOUS SURVEYING, with and without the Mag- netic Needle. By T. Fenwick and T. Baker, C.E. Illustrated. 2s. 6d. t 133. METALLURGY OF COFFER ; an Introduction to the Methods of Seeking, Mining, and Assaying Copper. By R. H. Lamborn. 2s. 6d.t 135. ELECTRO-METALLURGY ; Practically Treated. By Alex- ander Watt, F.R.S.S.A. Eighth Edition, revised, with additional Matter and Illustrations, including the most recent Processes. 3s. i 172. MINING TOOLS, Manual of. For the Use of Mine Managers, Agents, Students, &c. By William Morgans. 2s. 6d.± 172*. MINING TOOLS, A TLAS oi Engravings to Illustrate the above, containing 235 Illustrations, drawn to Scale. 4to. 4s. 6d. ; cloth boards, 6s. 176. METALLURGY OF IRON. Containing History of Iron Manu- facture, Methods of Assay, and Analyses of Iron Ores, Processes of Manu- facture of Iron and Steel, &c. By H. Bauerman, F.G.S. FiftL Edition, revised and enlarged. Ss.J 180. COAL AND COAL MINING, By Warington W. Smyth, M.A., F.R.S. Sixth Edition, revised. 3s. 6d.t 195. THE MINERAL SURVEYOR AND VALUER'S COM^ PLETE GUIDE. Comprising a Treatise on Improved Mining Surveying and the Valuation of Mining Properties, with new Traverse Tables. By W. LiNTERN, Mining Engineer. Second Edition, with an Appendix on Magnetic and Angular Surveying. With Four Plates. 3s. 6d.t [Just published. 214. SLATE AND SLATE F/A^6^, Scientific, Practical, and Commercial. By D. C. Davies, F.G.S., Mining Engineer, &c. 3s.t 264. A FIRST BOOK OF MINING AND QUARRYING, with the Sciences connected therewith, for Primary Schools and Self- Instruction. By: J. H. Collins, F.G.S. Second Edition, with additions, is. 6d. [Just Published. ARCHITECTURE, BUILDING, ETC. 16. ARCHITECTURE— ORDERS— ThQ Orders and their Esthetic Principles. By W. H. Leeds. Illustrated, is. 6d. 17. ARCHITECTURE— STYLES— The History and Description of the Styles of Architecture of Various Countries, from the Earliest to the Present Period. By T. Talbot Bury, F.R.I. B.A., &c. Illustrated. 2s. Orders and Styles of Architecture, in One Vol., 3^. 6d. 18. ARCHITECTURE— DESIGN— The Principles of Design in Architecture, as deducible from Nature and exemplified in the Works of thf Greek and Gothic Architects. By E. L. Garbett, Architect. Illustrated. 2s. 6d *»* The three preceding Works, in One handsome Vol., half bound, entttlec "Modern Architecture," /r/c^ 6j-. 22. THE ART OF BUILDING, Rudiments of. General Principles of Construction, Materials used in Building, Strength and Use of Materials Working Drawings, Specifications, and Estimates. By E. Dobson, 2s.t 25. MASONRY AND STONE CUTTING : Rudimentary Treatise on the Principles of Masonic Projection and their application to Con- struction. By Edward Dobson, M.R.I.B.A., &c. 2s. 6d.t 42. COTTAGE BUILDING. By C. Bruce Allen, Architect. Tenth Edition, revised and enlarged. With a Chapter on Economic Cottages for Allotments, by Edward E. Allen, C.E. 2s. 45. LIMES, CEMENTS, MORTARS, CONCRETES, MASTICS, PLASTERING, &c. By G. R. Burnell, C.E. Thirteenth Edition, is. 6d. The t indicates that these vols, may be had strongly bound at 6d. extra. LONDON : CROSBY LOCKWOOD AND SON, weale's rudimentary series. A^rchitecture, Building, etc., continued, 57. WARMING AND VENTILATION, An Exposition of the General Principles as applied to Domestic and Public Buildings, Mines, Lighthouses, Ships, &c. By C. Tomlinson, F.R.S., &c. Illustrated. 3s. III. ARCHES, PIERS, BUTTRESSES, ^c: Experimental Essays on the Principles of Construction. By "W. Bland. Illustrated, is. 6d. 116. THE ACOUSTICS OF PUBLIC BUILDINGS ; or, The Principles of the Science of Sound applied to the purposes of the Architect and Builder. By T. Roger Smith, M.R.I.B.A., Architect. Illustrated, is. 6d. 127. ARCHITECTURAL MODELLING IN PAPER, the Art of. By T. A. Richardson, Architect. Illustrated, is. 6d. 128. VITRUVIUS—THE ARCHITECTURE OF MARCUS VITRUVIUS PC LLC. In Ten Books. Translated from the Latin by Joseph Gwilt, F.S.A., F.R.A.S. With 23 Plates. 53. 130. GRECIAN ARCHITECTURE, An Inquiry into the Principles of Beauty in ; with an Historical View of the Rise and Progress of the Art in Greece. By the Earl of Aberdeen, is. The two preceding Works in One handsome Vol,, half bound, entitled "Ancibnt Architecture," price 6j. 132. THE ERECTION OF DWELLING-HOUSES, Illustrated by a Perspective View, Plans, Elevations, and Sections of a pair of Semi- detached Villas, with the Specification, Quantities, and Estimates, &c. By S. H. Brooks. New Edition, with Plates. 2s. 6d„t 156. QUANTITIES MEASUREMENTS in Bricklayers', Masons', Plasterers', Plumbers^ Painters', Paperhangers', Gilders', Smiths', Carpenters* and Joiners' Work. By A. C. Beaton, Surveyor. New Edition, is. 6d. 175. LOCKWOOD 6- CO:S BUILDER' S AND CONTRACTOR'S PRICE BOOK, containing the latest Prices of all kinds of Builders* Materials and Labour, and of all Trades connected with Building, &c., &c. Edited by F. T. W. Miller, Architect. Published annually. 3s. 6d. ; half bound, 4s. 182. CARPENTRY AND yOINERY—Tn^ Elementary Prin- ciples of Carpentry. Chiefly composed from the Standard Work of Thomas Tredgold, C.E. Witli a TREATISE ON JOINERY by E. Wyndham Tarn, M.A. Fourth Edition, Revised. 3s. 6d.t 182*. CARPENTRY AND JOINERY, ATLAS of 35 Plates to accompany the above. With Descriptive Letterpress. 4to. 6s. 185. THE COMPLETE MEASURER ; the Measurement of Boards, Glass, &c. ; Unequal-sided, Square-sided, Octagonal-sided, Round Timber and Stone, and Standing Timber, &c. By Richard Horton. Fifth Edition. 4s. ; strongly bound in leather, 5s. 187. HINTS TO YOUNG ARCHITECTS, By G. WiGHTWiCK. New Edition. By G. H. Guillaume. Illustrated. 3s. 6d.1: 188. HOUSE PAINTING, GRAINING, MARBLING, AND SIGN WRITING : with a Course of Elementary Drawing for House- Painters, Sign- Writers, &c., and a Collection of Useful Receipts. By Ellis A. Davidson. Fifth Edition. With Coloured Plates. 5s. clotb limp ; 6s. cloth boards. 189. THE RUDIMENTS OF PRACTICAL BRICKLAYING, In Six Sections : General Principles ; Arch Drawing, Cutting, and Setting ; Pointing ; Paving, Tiling, Materials ; Slating and Plastering ; Practical Geometry, Mensuration, &c. By Adam Hammond. Sixth Edition, is. 6d. 191. PLUMBING, A Text-Book to the Practice of the Art or Craft of the Plumber. With Chapters upon House Drainage. Fourth Edition. With 330 Illustrations. By W. P. Buchan. 3s. 6d.t 192. THE TIMBER IMPORTER'S, TIMBER MERCHANTS, and BUILDER'S STANDARD GUIDE. By R. E. Grandy. 2s. 206. A BOOK ON BUILDING, Civil and Ecclesiastical, including Church Restoration. With the Theory of Domes and the Great Pyramid, &c. By Sir Edmund Beckett, Bart., LL.D., Q.C., F.R.A.S. 4s. 6d.t The % indicates that these vols, may be had strongly bound at 6d. extra. 7, STATIONERS' HALL COURT, LUDGATE HILL, E.G. weale's rudimentary series. Architecture, Building, etc., contmued, 226. THE JOINTS MADE AND USED BY BUILDERS in the Construction of various kinds of Engineering and Architectural Works. By Wyvill J. Christy, Architect. With upwards of 160 Engravings on Wood. 3s.J 228. THE CONSTRUCTION OF ROOFS OF WOOD AND IRON By E. Wyndham Tarn, M.A., Architect. Second Edition, revised, is. 6d 229. ELEMENTARY DECORATION : as apphed to the Interior and Exterior Decoration of Dwelling-Houses, &c. By J. W. Facey. 2s. 257. PRACTICAL HOUSE DECORATION A Guide to the Art of Ornamental Painting. By James W. Facey. 2s. 6d. The two preceding Works, in One handsome Vol., half-bound, entitled Mouse Decoration, Elementary and Practical,' price 5^-. 230 HANDRAILING, Showing New and Simple Methods for finding the Pitch of the Plank, Drawing the Moulds, Bevelling, Jointing-up, and Squaring the Wreath. By George Collings. Plates and Diagrams. is.6d, 247. BUILDING ESTA TES : a Rudimentary Treatise on the Develop- ment, Sale, Purchase, and General Management of Building Land. By Fowler Maitland, Surveyor. Second Edition, revised. 2s. 248. PORTLAND CEMENT FOR USERS, By Henry Faija, Assoc. M. Inst. C.E. Second Edition, corrected. Illustrated. 2s.. 252. BRICKWORK : a Practical Treatise, embodying the General and Higher Principles of Bricklaying, Cutting and Setting, &c. By F. Walker. Second Edition, Revised and Enlarged, is. 6d. 2X THE PRACTICAL BRICK AND TILE BOOK, Comprising: 189! Brick and Tile Making, by E. Dobson, A.I.C.E.; Practical Bricklay- 252. ING, by A. Hammond ; Brickwork, by F. Walker. 550 pp. with 270 Illus- trations. 6s. Strongly half-bound. 2^x THE TIMBER MERCHANT'S, SAW-MILLER'S, AND IMPORTER'S FREIGHT-BOOK AND ASSISTANT. By Wm. Rich- ARDSON. With a Chapter on Speeds of Saw-Mill Machinery, &c. By ,S8. akluLlriV&'fN- CARPENTRY AND JOINERY. A Practical Treatise on Circular Work of Single and Double Curvature. By George Collings, Author of " A Treatise on Handrailing. 2s. 6d. 2c;q GAS FITTING: A Practical Handbook treating of every Description of Gas Laying and Fitting. By John Black. With 122 Illus- 261 SHORING^AND ITS APPLICATION: A Handbook for the Use of Students. By George H. Blagrove is. 6d. ^\.'^'J.{ilf^^''^f^-j^ ot^ THE ART OF PRACTICAL BRICK CUTTING AND SETTING. By Adam Hammond, Author of Practical Bricklaying.* With 90 Engravings, is. 6d. \Jtist Published, SHIPBUILDING, NAVIGATION, MARINE ENGINEERING, ETC. CI NA VAL ARCHITECTURE, An Exposition of the Elementary ' Principles of the Science, and their Practical Application to Naval Construe- tion By J. Peake. Fifth Edition, with Plates and Diagrams. 3s. 6d.J c^* SHIPS FOR OCEAN ^ RIVER SERVICE, Elementary and * Practical Principles of the Construction of. By H. A. Sommerfeldt. is. 6d. ^X*"^, AN A TEAS OFENGRA VINGS to Illustrate the above. Twelve large folding plates. Royal 4to, cloth. 7s. 6d. o:r..,^o C4. MASTING, MASTMAKING, AND RIGGING OF SHIPS, Also Tables of Spars, Rigging, Blocks ; Chain, Wire, and Hemp Ropes, &c., relative to every class of vessels. By Robert Kipping, N.A. 2s. 54*. IRON SHIP-BUILDING, With Practical Examples and Details. By John Grantham , C.E. 5th Edition. 4s. The t indicates that these vols, may be had strongly bound at 6d. extra. LONDON : CROSBY LOCKWOOD AND SON, weale's rudimentary series. 7 Shipbuilding, Navigation, Marine Engineering, etc., cont, 55. THE SAILOR'S SEA BOOK: a Rudimentary Treatise on Navigation. By James Greenwood, B.A. With numerous Woodcuts and Coloured Plates. New and enlarged edition. P.y W. H. Rosser. 2s. 6d.t 80. MARINE ENGINES AND STEAM VESSELS. By Robert Murray, C.E. Eighth Edition, thoroughly Revised, with Additions by the Author and by George Carlisle, C.E., Senior Surveyor to the Board of Trade, Liverpool. 4s. 6d. limp ; 5s. cloth boards. %lbts. THE FORMS OF SHIPS AND BOATS. By W. Bland. Seventh Edition, Revised, with numerous Illustrations and Models, is. 6d. 99. NAVIGATION AND NAUTICAL ASTRONOMY, in Theory and Practice. By Prof. J. R. YoUxNG. New Edition. 2s. 6d. 106. SHIPS' ANCHORS, a Treatise on. By G. Cotsell, N.A. is. 6d. 149. SAILS AND SAIL-MAKING. "With Draughting, and the Centre of Effort of the Sails ; Weights and Sizes of Ropes : Masting, Rigging, and Sails of Steam Vessels, &c. 12th Edition. By R. Kipping, N.A. 2s. 6d.t 155. ENGINEER'S GUIDE TO THE ROYAL MERCANTILE NAVIES. By a Practical Engineer. Revised by D. F. McCarthy. 3s. 55 PRACTICAL NAVIGATION. Consisting of The Sailor's & Sea-Book. By James Greenwood and W. H. Rosser. Together with ^P, . the requisite Mathematical and Nautical Tables for the Working of the Problems. By H. Law, C.E., and Prof. J. R. Young. 7s. Half-bound. AGRICULTURE, GARDENING, ETC. 61*. A COMPLETE READY RECKONER FOR THE ADMEA- SUREMENT OF LAND, &c. By A. Arman. Third Edition, revised and extended by C. Norris, Surveyor, Valuer, &c. 2s. 131. MILLER'S, CORN MERCHANTS, AND FARMER'S READY RECKONER. Second Edition, with a Price List of Modern Flour-Mill Machinery, by W. S. Hutton, C.E. 2s. 140. SOILS, MANURES, AND CROPS. (Vol. i. Outlines of Modern Farming.) By R. Scott Burn. Woodcuts. 2s. 141. FARMING ^ FARMING ECONOMY, Notes, Historical and Practical, on. (Vol. 2. Outlines of Modern Farming.) ByR. Scott Burn. 3s. 142. STOCK; CATTLE, SHEEP, AND HORSES. (Vol. 3. Outlines of Modern Farming.) By R. Scott Burn. Woodcuts, as. 6d. 145. DAIRY, PIGS, AND POULTRY, Management of the. By R. Scott Burn. (Vol. 4. Outlines of Modern Farming.) 2s. 146. UTILIZATION OF SEWAGE, IRRIGATION, AND RECLAMATION OF WASTE LAND. (Vol. 5. Outlines of Modern Farming.) By R. Scott Burn. Woodcuts. 2s. 6d. Nos. 140-1-2-5-6, in One Vol,, handsomely half-bound, enttiled " Outlines of Modern Farming." By Robert Scott Burn. Price \2s. 177. FRUIT TREES, The Scientific and Profitable Culture of. From the French of Du Breuil. Revised by Geo. Glenny. 187 Woodcuts. 3s. 6d.t 198. SHEEP; THE HISTORY, STRUCTURE, ECONOMY, AND DISEASES OF. By W. C. Spooner, M.R.V.C., &c. Fourth Edition, enlarged, including Specimens of New and Improved Breeds. 3s. 6d.t 201. KITCHEN GARDENING MADE EASY. By George M. F. Glenny. Illustrated, is. 6d.i: 207. OUTLINES OF FARM MANAGEMENT, and the Organic zation of Farm Labour. By R. Scott Burn. 2s. 6d.+ 208. OUTLINES OF LANDED ESTATES MANAGEMENT. By R. Scott Burn. 2s. 6d,t Nos. 207 6- 208 in One Vol., handsomely half bound, eniiiled " Outlines OS Landed Estates and Farm Management." By R. Scott Burn. Price 6s. The t indicates that these vols, may be had strongly bound at bd. extra. 7, STATIONERS' HALL COURT, LUDGATE HILL, E.G. 8 weale's rudimentary series. Agriculture, Gardening, etc., continued. 209. THE TREE PLANTER AND PLANT PROPAGATOR. A Practical Manual on the Propagation of Forest Trees, Fruit Trees, Flowering Shrubs, Flowering Plants, &c. By Samuel Wood. 2s4 210. THE TREE PRUNER, A Practical Manual on the Pruning of Fruit Trees, including also their Training and Renovation ; also the Pruning of Shrubs, Climbers, and Flowering Plants. By Samuel Wood. 2s. t **♦ Nos. 209 210 in One Vol.y handsomely half -bound, enittled "The Trhh Planter, Propagator, and Pruner." By Samuel Wood. Price 5^. 218. THE HA Y AND STRA W MEASURER : Being New Tables for the Use of Auctioneers, Valuers, Farmers, Hay and Straw Dealers, &c. By John Steele. Fourth Edition. 2s. 222. SUBURBAN FARMING, The Laying-out and Cultivation of Farms, adapted to the Produce of Milk, Butter, and Cheese, Eggs, Poultry, and Pigs. By Prof. John Donaldson and R. Scott Burn, 3s. 6d.t 231. THE ART OF GRAFTING AND BUDDING. By Charles Baltet. With Illustrations. 2S. 6d.t 232. COTTAGE GARDENING; or, Flowers, Fruits, and Vegetables for Small Gardens. By E. Hobday, is. 6d. 233. GARDEN RECEIPTS, Edited by CHARLES W. QuiN. is,6d. 234. THE KITCHEN AND MARKET GARDEN. Compiled by C. W. Shaw, Editor of ** Gardening Illustrated." 3s. t 239. DRAINING AND EMBANKING. A Practical Treatise, em- bodying the irost recent experience in the Application of Improved Methods. By John Scott, late Professor of Agriculture and Rural Economy at the Royal Agricultural College, Cirencester. With 68 Illustrations, is. 6d. 240. IRRIGATION AND WATER SUPPLY. A Treatise on Water Meadows, Sewage Irrigation, Warping, &c. ; on the Construction of Wells, Ponds, and Reservoirs ; and on Raising Water by Machinery for Agricul- tural and Domestic Purposes. By Prof. John Scott. With 34 lUus. is. 6d. 241. FARM ROADS, FENCES, AND GATES. A Practical Treatise on the Roads, Tramways, and Waterways of the Farm ; the Principles of Enclosures; and the different kinds of Fences, Gates, and Stiles. By Professor John Scott. With 75 Illustrations, is. 6d. 242. FARM BUILDINGS. A Practical Treatise on the Buildings necessary for various kinds of Farms, their Arrangement and Construction, including Plans and Estimates. By Prof. Joh:^ Scott. With 105 Illus. zs. 243. BARN IMPLEMENTS AND MACHINES. A Practical Treatise on the Application of Power to the Operations of Agriculture; and on various Machines used in the Threshing-barn, in the Stock-yard, and in the Dairy, &c. By Prof. J. Scott. With 123 Illustrations. 2s. 244. FIELD IMPLEMENTS AND MACHINES. A Practical Treatise on the Varieties now in use, with Principles and Details of Con- struction, their Points of Excellence, and Management. By Professor John Scott. With 138 Illustrations. 2s. 245. AGRICULTURAL SURVEYING. A Practical Treatise on Land Surveying, Levelling, and Setting-out ; and on Measuring and Esti- mating Quantities, Weights, and Values of Materials, Produce. Stock, &c. By Prof. John Scott. With 62 Illustrations, is. 6d. Nos. 239 to 245 in One Vol.y handsomely half -bounds entitled "Thb Complkti Text- Book of Farm Engineering." By Professor John Scott. Price 12*. 250. ME A T PRODUCTION. A Manual for Producers, Distributors, &c. By John Ewart. 2s. 6d.t The X indicates that these vols, may be had strongly bound at 6d. extra. LONDON : CROSBY LOCKWOOD AND SON, weale's rudimentary series. 9 MATHEMATICS, ARITHMETIC, ETC. 32. MATHEMATICAL INSTRUMENTS, a Treatise on; Their Construction, Adjustment, Testing, and Use concisely Explained. By J. F. Heather, M.A. Fourteenth Edition, revised, with additions, by A. T, Walmisley, M.I.C.E., Fellow of the Surveyors* Institution. Original Edi- tion, in I vol., Illustrated. 2S.1: {^Just published. In ordering: the above, be careful to say, " Original Edition " {No. 32), to distin' guish it from the Enlarged Edition in 3 vols. (Nos. 168-9-70.) 76. DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY, an Elementary Treatise on; with a Theory of Shadows and of Perspective, extracted from the French of G. MoNGE. To which is added, a description of the Principles and Practice of Isometrical Projection. By J. F. Heather, M.A. With 14 Plates. 2S. 178. PRACTICAL PLANE GEOMETRY : giving the Simplest Modes of Constructing Figures contained in one Plane and Geometrical Con- struction of the Ground. By J. F. Heather, M. A. With 215 Woodcuts. 2s. 83. COMMERCIAL BOOK-KEEPING, With Commercial Phrases and Forms in English, French, Italian, and German. By James Haddon, M.A., Arithmetical Master of King's College School, London, is. 6d. 84. ARITHMETIC, a Rudimentary Treatise on : with full Explana- tions of its Theoretical Principles, and numerous Examples for Practice. By Professor J. R. Young. Eleventh Edition, is. 6d. 84*. A Key to the above, containing Solutions in full to the Exercises, together with Comments, Explanations, and Improved Processes, for the Use of Teachers and Unassisted Learners. By J. R. Young, is. 6d. 85. EQUATIONAL ARITHMETIC, applied to Questions of Interest, Annuities, Life Assurance, and General Commerce ; with various Tables by which all Calculations may be greatly facilitated. By W. Hipsley. 2s. 86. ALGEBRA, the Elements of. By James Haddon, M.A. With Appendix, containing miscellaneous Investigations, and a Collection of Problems in various parts of Algebra. 2s. 86*. A Key and Companion to the above Book, forming an extensive repository ol Solved Examples and Problems in Illustration of the various Expedients necessary in Algebraical Operations. By J. R. Young, is. 6d. 88. EUCLID, The Elements of : with many additional Propositions 89. and Explanatory Notes : to which is prefixed, an Introductory Essay on Logic. By Henry Law, C.E. 2s. 6d.j: ♦»* Sold also separately, viz. : — 88. Euclid, The First Three Books. By Henry Law, C.E. is. 6d. 89. Euclid, Books 4, 5, 6, 11, 12. By Henry Law, C.E. is. 6d. 90. ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY AND CONIC SECTIONS, By James Hann. A New Edition, by Professor J. R. Young. 2s. t 91. PLANE TRIGONOMETRY, the Elements of. By James Hann, formerly Mathematical Master of King's College, London, is. 6d. 92. SPHERICAL TRIGONOMETR Y, the Elements of. By James Hann. Revised by Charles H. Dowling, C.E. is. %• Or with " The Elements of Plane Trigonometry^^ in One Volume, is, 6d. 93. MENSURATION AND MEASURING, With the Mensuration and Levelling of Land for the Purposes of Modern Engineering. By T. Baker, C.E. New Edition by E. Nqgent, C.E. Illustrated, is. 6d. 101. DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS^ Elements of the. By W. S. B. Woolhouse, F.R.A.S., &c. is. 6d. 102. INTEGRAL CALCULUS, Rudimentary Treatise on the. By Homersham Cox, B.A. Illustrated, is. 136. ARITHMETIC, Rudimentary, for the Use of Schools and Self- Instniction. By James Haddon, M.A. Revised by A. Arman. is. 6d. 137. A Key to Haddon's Rudimentary Arithmetic. By A. Arman. is. 6d. The ± indicates that these vols, may be had strongly bound at 6d. extra. 7, stationers' hall court, ludgate hill, e.g. lO WEALE*S RUDIMENTARY SERIES. Mathematics, Arithmetic, etc., continued. 168. DRAWING AND MEASURING INSTRUMENTS, Includ- ing — I. Instruments employed in Geometrical and Mechanical Drawing, and in the Construction, Copying, and Measurement of Maps and Plans. II. Instruments used for the purposes of Accurate Measurement, and for Arithmetical Computations. By J. F. Heather, M.A. Illustrated, is. 6d, 169. OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS, Including (more especially) Tele- scopes, Microscopes, and Apparatus for producing copies of Maps and Plans by Photography. By J. F. Heather, M.A. Illustrated, is. 6d. 170. SURVEYING AND ASTRONOMICAL INSTRUMENTS, Including — I. Instruments Used for Determining the Geometrical Features of a portion of Ground. II. Instruments Employed in Astronomical Observa- tions. By J. F. Heather, M.A. Illustrated, is. 6d. The above three volumes for?n an enlargement of the Author's original work^ ** Mathematical Instruments.^' {See TVic. 32 tn the Series.)^ ^e%.^MATHEAIATICAL INSTRUMENTS. By J. F. Heather, 169. > M.A. Enlarged Edition, for the most part entirely re-written. The 3 Parts as ^^o.) aHove, in One thick Volume. With numerous Illustrations. 4s. 6d.t 158. THE SLIDE RULE, AND HOW TO USE IT; containing lull, easy, and simple Instructions to perform all Business Calculations with unexampled rapidity and accuracy. By Charles Hoare, C.E. Fifth Edition. With a Slide Rule in tuck of cover. 2s. 6d.t 196. THEORY OF COMPOUND INTEREST AND ANNUL TIES ; with Tables of Logarithms for the more Difficult Computations of Interest, Discount, Annuities, &c. By F^dor Thoman. 4s. t 199. THE COMPENDIOUS CALCULATOR ; or, Easy and Concise Methods of Perforiring the various Arithmetical Operations required in Commercial and Business Transactions ; together with Useful Tables. By D. O'GoRMAN. Twenty-sixth Edition, carefully revised by C. Norris. 3s., cloth limp ; 3s. 6d., strongly half-bound in leather. 204. MATHEMATICAL 7:^^Z^6\ for Trigonometrical, Astronomical, and Nautical Calculations ; to which is prefixed a Treatise on Logarithms, By Henry Law, C.E. Together with a Series of Tables for Navigation and Nautical Astronomy. By Prof. J. R. Young. New Edition. 4s. 204*. LOGARITHMS. With Mathematical Tables for Trigonometrical, Astronomical, and Nautical Calculations. By Henry Law, M.Inst.C.E. New and Revised Edition. (Formingpart of the above Work). 3s. 221. MEASURES, WEIGHTS, AND MONEYS OF ALL NA- TIONSt and an Analysis of the Christian, Hebrew, and Mahometan Calendars. By W. S. B. Woolhouse, F.R.A.S., F.S.S. Sixth Edition. 2s.t 227. MATHEMATICS AS APPLIED TO THE CONSTRUC- TIVE ARTS. Illustrating the various processes of Mathematical Investi- gation, by means of Arithmetical and Simple Algebraical Equations and Practical Examples. By Francis Campin, C.E. Second Edition. 3s.t PHYSICAL SCIENCE, NATURAL PHILO- SOPHY, ETC. 1. CHEMISTRY, By Professor George Fownes, F.R.S. With an Appendix on the Application of Chemistry to Agriculture, is. 2. NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, Introduction to the Study of. By C. ToMLiNSON. Woodcuts. IS. 6d. 6. MECHANICS, Rudimentary Treatise on. By Charles Tom- LiNSON. Illustrated, is. 6d. 7. ELECTRICITY; showing the General Principles of Electrical Science, and the purposes to which it has been applied. By Sir W. Snow Harris, F.R.S., &c. With Additions by R. Sabine, C.E., F.S.A. is. 6d. 7*. GALVANISM, By Sir W. Snow Harris. New Edition by Robert Sabine, C.E., F.S.A. is. 6d. 8. MAGNETISM ; being a concise Exposition of the General Prin- ciples of Magnetical Science. By Sir W. Snow Harris. New Edition, revised by H. M. Noad, Ph.D. With 165 Woodcuts. 3s. Cd.X The X indicates that these vols, may be had strongly bound at 6d. extras. LONDON : CROSBY LOCKWOOD AND SON, WE ALE'S RUDIMENTARY SERIES. II Physical Science, Natural Philosophy, etc., continued, 11. THE ELECTRIC TELEGRAPH ; its History and Progress; with Descriptions of some of the Apparatus. By R. Sabine, C.E., F.S.A. 3s. 12. PNEUMATICS, including Acoustics and the Phenomena of "Wind Currents, for the Use of Beginners By Charles Tomlinson, F.R.S. Fourth Edition, enlarged. Illustrated, is. 6d. {Just published, 12, MANUAL OF THE MOLLUSCA ; a Treatise on Recent and Fossil Shells. By Dr. S. P. Woodward, A.L.S. Fourth Edition. With Appendix by Ralph Tate, A.L.S., F.G.S. With numerous Plates and 300 Woodcuts. 6s. 6d. Cloth boards, 7s. 6d. 96. ASTRONOMY, By the late Rev. Robert Main, M.A. Third Edition, by William Thynne Lynn, B.A., F.R.A.S. 2s. 97. STATICS AND DYNAMICS, the Principles and Practice of; embracing also a clear development of Hydrostatics, Hydrodynamics, and Central Forces. By T. Baker, C.E. Fourth Edition, is. 6d. 138. TELEGRAPH, Handbook of the ; a Guide to Candidates for Employment in the Telegraph Service. By R. Bond. 3s. t 173. PHYSICAL GEOLOGY, partly based on Major-General Port. lock's "Rudiments of Geology." By Ralph Tate, A.L.S. ,&c. Woodcuts. 2s. 174. HISTORICAL GEOLOGY, partly based on Major-General Portlock's ** Rudiments." By Ralph Tate, A.L.S., &c. Woodcuts. 2s. 6d. 173 RUDIMENTARY TREATISE ON GEOLOGY, Physical and & Historical. Partly based on Major-General Portlock's " Rudiments of 174. Geology." By Ralph Tate, A.L.S., F.G.S., &c. In One Volume. 4s. 6d.4 183 ANIMAL PHYSICS, Handbook of. By Dr. Lardner, D.C.L., & . formerly. Professor of Natural Philosophy and Astronomy in University 184.. College, Lend. With 520 Illustrations. In One Vol. 7s. 6d., cloth boards. ^* *^ Sold also in Two Parts, as follows : — 183. Animal Physics. By Dr. Lardner. Part I., Chapters I. — VII. 4s. 184. Animal Physics. By Dr. Lardner. Part II., Chapters VIII.— XVIII. 3s FINE ARTS. 20. PERSPECTIVE FOR BEGINNERS, Adapted to Young Students and Amateurs in Architecture, Painting", &c. By George Pyne. 2s« 40 GLASS STAINING, AND THE ART OF PAINTING ON GLASS. From the German of Dr. Gessert and Emanuel Otto From- BERG. With an Appendix on The Art of Enamelling. 2s. 6d. 69. MUSIC, A Rudimentary and Practical Treatise on. With numerous Examples. By Charles Child Spencer. 2s. 6d. 71. PIANOFORTE, The Art of Playing the. With numerous Exer- cises & Lessons from the Best Masters. By Charles Child Spencer. js.6d. 69-71. MUSIC ping ChroJiicle, 4 CROSBY LOCKWOOD &* SON'S CATALOGUE. Engineering Construction. PATTERN -MAKING : A Practical Treatise, embracing the Main Types of Engineering Construction, and including Gearing, both Hand and Machine made, Engine Work, Sheaves and Pulleys, Pipes and Columns, Screws, Machine Parts, Pumps and Cocks, the Moulding of Patterns in Loam and Greensand, &c., together with the methods of Estimating the . weight of Castings; to which is added an Appendix of Tables for Workshop Reference. By a Foreman Pattern Maker. With upwards of Three Hundred and Seventy Illustrations. Crown 8vo, 7s. 6i. cloth. A well- written technical gfuide, evidentl)' written by a man who understands and has prac- tised what he has written about. We cordially recommend it to engineering students, young' journeymen, and others desirous of being initiated into the mysteries of pattern-making." — Builder. " Likely to prove a welcome ^uide to many workmen, especially to draughtsmen who have lacked a training in the shops, pupils pursuing their practical studies in our factories, and to em- ployers and managers in engineering v!Otk.s."— Hardware Trade Journal. "More than 370 illustrations help to explain the text, which is, however, always clear and ex- plicit, thus rendering the work an excellent vade mecmn for the apprentice who desires 10 become master of his trade." — English Mecha^iic. lyictionary of Mechanical Engineering Terms. LOCK WOOD'S DICTIONARY OF TERMS USED IN THE PRACTICE OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING, embracing those current in the Drawing Office, Pattern Shop, Foundry, Fitting, Turning, Smith's and Boiler Shops, &c. &c. Comprising upwards of 6,000 Definitions. Edited by A Foreman Pattern-Maker, Author of " Pattern Making." Crown 8vo> 7s. 6d. cloth. [Just published, "Just the sort of handy dictionary required by the various trades engaged in mechanical en- gineering. The practical engineering pupil will find the book of great value m his studies, and every foreman engineer and mechanic should have a copy." — Building Neius. "After a careful examination of the book, and trying all manner of words, we think that the engineer will here find all he is likely to require. It will be largely used." — Practical Engineer. " This admirable dictionary, although primarily intended for the use of draughtsmen and other technical craftsmen, is of much larger value as a book of reference, and will find a ready welcome in many libraries."— G/aJ-^(?w Herald. Smithes Tables for Mechanics^ etc. TABLES, MEMORANDA, AND CALCULATED RESULTS, FOR MECHANICS, ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, BUILDERS, etc. Selected and Arranged by Francis Smith. Fourth Edition, Revised and En- larged, 250 pp., waistcoat-pocket size, is. 6d. limp leather. [Just published. " It would, perhaps, be as difficult to make a small pocket-book selection of notes and formulae to suit ALL engineers as it would be to make a universal medicine ; but Mr. Smith's waistcoat- pocket collection may be looked upon as a successful attempt." — Engineer. "The best example we have ever seen of 250 pages of useful matter packed into the dimen- sions of a card-case." — Building Ne^us. "A veritable pocket treasury of knowledge." — Iron. Steam Boilers. A TREATISE ON STEAM BOILERS: Their Strength, Con- struction, and Economical Working, By Robert Wilson, C.E. Fifth Edition. i2mo, 6s. cloth. "The best treatise that has ever been published on steam hoWers."— Engineer. "The author shows himself perfect master of his subject, and we heartily recommend all em- ploying steam power to possess themselves of the work. — Ry land's Iron Trade Circular. Boiler Chimneys. BOILER AND FACTORY CHIMNEYS; Their Draught-Power and Stability. With a Chapter on Lightning Conductors. By Robert Wilson, A.I.C.E., Author of "A Treatise on Steam Boilers," &c. Second Edition. Crown 8vo, 3^. 6d. cloth. [Just published. Boiler Making. THE BOILER-MAKER'S READY RECKONER, With Ex- amples of Practical Geometry and Templating, for the Use of Platers, Smiths and Riveters. By John Courtney, Edited by D. K. Clark, M.I. C.E. Second Edition, Revised, with Additions, lamo, 5s. half-bound. " A most useful work No workman or apprentice should be without this book."— Iron Trade Circular. " A reliable guide to the working boiler-maker." — Iron. " Boiler-makers will readily recognise the value of this volume. . . . The tables are clearly printed, and so arranged that they can be referred to with the greatest facility, so that cannot be doubted that they will be generally appreciated and much used." — Mining yournal. MECHANICS, MECHANICAL ENGINEERING, etc. 5 Steam Engine, TEXT-BOOK ON THE STEAM ENGINE. With a Sup- plement on Gas Engines. By T. M. Goodeve, M.A., Barrister-at-Law, Author of "The Elements of Mechanism," &c. Ninth Edition. With numerous Illustrations. Crown 8vo, 6s. cloth. " Professor Goodeve has given us a treatise on the steam engine which will bear comparison with anything- written by Huxley or Maxwell, and we can award it no higher \ira.\SQ."—Eng^ifieer. " Professor Goodeve's book is ably and clearly written. It is a sound work." — Athencsiim. " Mr. Goodeve's text-book is a work of which every young engineer should possess himself." '—Mining yotir7tal. " Essentially practical in its aims. The manner of exposition leaves nothing to be desired." — Scots ma} I. " A valuable vade mecum for the student of engineering, and should be in the possession of every scientific leader."— Coliiery Guardian. Gas Engines. ON GAS-ENGINES. Being a Reprint, with some Additions, of the Supplement to the Text-book on the Steam Engine, by T. M. Goodeve, M.A. Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d. cloth. [Just published. " Like all Mr. Goodeve's writings, the present is no exception in point of general excellence. It is a valuable little volume." — MecJianical JVorld. " This little book will be useful to those who desire to understand how the gas-engine works. —Efiglish Mechanic. Steam. THE SAFE USE OF STEAM. Containing Rules for Un- professional Steam-users. By an Engineer. Fifth Edition. Sewed, 6d. "If steam-users would but learn this little book by heart, boiler explosions would become sensations by their rarity." — English Mechanic. €oal and Speed Tables, A POCKET BOOK OF COAL AND SPEED TABLES, for Engineers and Steam-users. By Nelson Foley, Author of " Boiler Con- struction." Pocket-size, 3s. 6d. cloth ; 4s. leather. " This is a very useful book, containing very useful tables. The results given are well chosen, and the volume contains evidence that the author really understands his subject. We can recom- mend the work with pleasure." — Mechanical World. " These tables are designed to meet the requirements of every-day use ; they are of sufficient scope for most practical purposes, and may be commended to engineers and users of steam." — Iron. " This pocket-book well merits the attention of the practical engineer. Mr. Foley has com- piled a very useful set of tables, the information contained in which is frequently required by engineers, coal consumers and users of steam." — Iron and Coal Trades Review. Fire Engineering. FIRES, FIRE-ENGINES, AND FIRE-BRIGADES. With a History of Fire-Engines, their Construction, Use, and Management; Re- marks on Fire-Proof Buildings, and the Preservation of Life from Fire ; Statistics of the Fire Appliances in English Towns ; Foreign Fire Systems ; Hints on Fire Brigades, &c. &c. By Charles F. T. Young, C.E. With numerous Illustrations, 544 pp., demy 8vo, £1 4s. cloth. To such of our readers as are interested in the subject of fires and fire apparatus, we can most heartily commend this book. It is really the only English work we now have upon the subject." — £n£i7ieering. " It displays much evidence of careful research ; and Mr. Young has put his facts neatly together. It is evident enough that his acquaintance with the practical details of the construction of steam fire engines, old and new, and the conditions with which it is necessary they should comply, is accurate and {u\l."—E7igineer. Gas Lighting. COMMON SENSE FOR GAS-USERS : A Catechism of Gas- Lighting for Householders, Gasfitters, Millowners, Architects, Engineers, etc. By Robert Wilson, C.E., Author of " A Treatise on Steam Boilers." Second Edition, with Folding Plates and Wood Engravings. Crown 8vo, price IS. in wrapper. All gas-users will decidedly benefit, both in pocket and comfort, if they will avail themselves of Mr. Wilson's counsels."— Engineering. 6 CROSBY LOCKWOOD SON'S CATALOGUE, THE POPULAR WORKS OF MICHAEL REYNOLDS ("The Engine Driver's Friend"). Locomotive-Engine Driving. LOCOMOTIVE-ENGINE DRIVING : A Practical Manual for Engineers in charge of Locomotive Engines. By Michael Reynolds, Member of the Society of Engineers, formerly Locomotive Inspector L. B. and S. C. R. Eighth Edition. Including a Key to the Locomotive Engine. With Illus- trations and Portrait of Author. Crown 8vo, 4s. cloth. " Mr. Reynolds has supplied a want, and has supplied it well. We can confidently recommend the book, not only to the practical driver, but to everyone who takes an interest in the performance of locomotive engines." — The E-ng;i7ieer. " Mr. Reynolds has opened a new chapter in the literature of the day. This admirable practical treatise, of the practical utility of which we have to speak in terms of warm commendation." — Athenceum. *' Evidently the work of one who knows his subject thoroughly."— Railway Service Gazette. "Were the cautions and rules given in the book to become part of the every-day working ol our engine-drivers, we might have fewer distressing accidents to deplore." — Scotsmmi. Stationary Engine Driving. STATIONARY ENGINE DRIVING: A Practical Manual for Engineers in charge of Stationary Engines. By Michael Reynolds. Third Edition, Enlarged. With Plates and Woodcuts. Crown 8vo, 4s. 6d. cloth. " The author is thoroughly acquainted with his subjects, and his advice on the various points treated is clear and practical. . . . He has produced a manual which is an exceedingly useful one for the class for whom it is specially intended." — E^igineering. " Our author leaves no stone unturned. He is determined that his readers shall not only knovr something about the stationary engine, but all about it." — Engineer. "Anengineman who has mastered the contents of Mr.Reynolds'sbookwill require but little actual experience with boilers and engines before he can be trusted to look after them." — English Mechanic The Engineer^ Fireman^ and Engine-Boy. THE MODEL LOCOMOTIVE ENGINEER, FIREMAN, and ENGINE-BOY. Comprising a Historical Notice of the Pioneer Locomotive Engines and their Inventors. By Michael Reynolds. With numerous Illus- trations and a fine Portrait of George Stephenson. Crown 8vo, 4s. 6d. cloth. " From the technical knowledge of the author it will appeal to the railway man of to-day more forcibly than anything written by Dr. Smiles. . . . The volume contains information of a tech- nical kind, and facts that every driver should be familiar with." — English Mechanic. "We should be glad to see this book in the possession of everyone in the kingdom who has ever laid, or is to lay, hands on a locomotive engine." — Iron, Continuous Railway Brakes, CONTINUOUS RAILWAY BRAKES : A Practical Treatise on the several Systems in Use in the United Kingdom ; their Construction and Performance. With copious Illustrations and numerous Tables. By Michael Reynolds, Large crown Svo, 9s. cloth. " A popular explanation of the different brakes. It will be of g'reat assistance in forming public opinion, and will be studied with benefit by those who take an mterest in the brake." — English Mechanic. Written with suflficient technical detail to enable the principle and relative connection of the various parts of each particular brake to be readily grasped." — Mechanical World. Engine-Driving Life, ENGINE-DRIVING LIFE; or, Stirring Adventures and Inci- dents in the Lives of Locomotive-Engine Drivers, By Michael Reynolds. Ninth Thousand. Crown Svo. 2S. cloth, "From first tolast is perfectly fascinating. Wilkie Collins's most thrilling conceptions are thrown into the shade by true incidents, endless in their variety, related in every page." — North British Mail. "Anyone who wishes to get a real insight into railway Ufe cannot do better than read * Engine- Driving Life ' for himsel-f ; and if he once take it up he will find that the author's enthusiasm and real love of the engine-driving professionwill carry him on till he has read every page." — Saturday Review. Focket Companion for Enginemen. THE ENGINEMAN'S POCKET COMPANION AND PRAC^ TICAL EDUCATOR FOR ENGINEMEN, BOILER ATTENDANTS, AND MECHANICS. By Michael Reynolds. With Forty-five Illustra- tions and numerous Diagrams. Second Edition, Revised. Royal iSmo, 3s. 6ii., strongly bound for pocket wear. [Just published, "This admirable work is well suited to accomplish its object, being the honest workmanship oj a competent engineer." — Glasgow Herald. " A most meritorious work, giving in a succinct and practical form all the information an engine- minder desirous of mastering the scientific principles of his daily calling would require." — Miller. " A boon to those who are striving to become efficient mechanics."— Z'az'/y Chronicle. CIVIL ENGINEERING, SURVEYING, etc. 7 French-English Glossary for Engineers, etc. A POCKET GLOSSARY of TECHNICAL TERMS: ENGLISH- FRENCH, FRENCH-ENGLISH ; with Tables smtable for the Architectural, Engineering, Manufacturing and Nautical Professions. By John James Fletcher, Engineer and Surveyor ; 200 pp. Waistcoat-pocket size, is. 6d., limp leather. " It ought certainly to be in the waistcoat-pocket of every professional man. —Iron. " It is a very great advantage for readers and correspondents in France and England to have so large a number of the words relating to engineering and manufacturers collected in a liliputian volume. The httle book will be useful both to students and travellers." — Architect. " The glossary of terms is very complete, and many of the tables are new and well arranged. We cordially commend the \>od^"— Mechanical World. JPortahle Engines, THE PORTABLE ENGINE; ITS CONSTRUCTION AND MANAGEMENT. A Practical Manual for Owners and Users of Steam Engines generally. By William Dyson Wansbrough. With 90 Illustra- tions. Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d. cloth. [Just published. " This is a work of value to those who use steam machinery. . . . Should be read by every- one who has a steam engine, on a farm or elsewhere." — Mark Lane Express. " We cordially commend this work to buyers and owners of steam engines, and to those who have to do with their construction or use."— Timber Trades yournal. "Such a general knowledge of the steam engine as Mr. Wansbrough furnishes to the reader should be acquired by all intelligent owners and others who use the steam engine.'' — Building News. CIVIL ENGI NEERING, SUR VEYING, etc. MR. NUMBER'S IMPORTANT ENGINEERING BOOKS. The Water Supply of Cities and Towns. A COMPREHENSIVE TREATISE on the WATER-SUPPLY OF CITIES AND TOWNS. By William Humber, A-M. Inst. C.E., and M. Inst. M.E., Author of " Cast and Wrought Iron Bridge Construction," &c. &c. Illustrated with 50 Double Plates, i Single Plate, Coloured Frontispiece, and upwards of 250 Woodcuts, and containing 400 pages of Text. Imp. 4to, £6 6s. elegantly and substantially half-bound in morocco. List of Contents. Conduits.— XIII. Distribution of Water.— XI V. Meters, Service Pipes, and House Fittings. — XV. The Law and Economy of Water Works. XVI. Constant and Intermittent Supply.— XVII. Description of Plates. — Appendices, giving Tables of Rates of Supply, Velocities, &c. &c., together with Specifications of several Works illustrated, among which will be found : Aberdeen, Bideford, Canterbury, Dundee, Halifax, Lambeth, Rotherham, Dublin, and others. "The most systematic and valuable work upon water supply hitherto produced in English, or In any other language. . . . Mr. Humber's work is characterised almost throughout by an exhaustiveness much more distinctive of French and German than of English technical treatises." — Engineer. " We can congratulate Mr. Humber on having been able to give so large an amount of infor- mation on a subject so important as the water supply of cities and towns. The plates, fifty in number, are mostly drawings of executed works, and alone would have commanded the attention of every engineer whose practice may lie in this branch of the profession."— Builder. Cast and Wrought Iron Bridge Construction. A COMPLETE AND PRACTICAL TREATISE ON CAST AND WROUGHT IRON BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION, including Iron Foundations. In Three Parts — Theoretical, Practical, and Descriptive. By William Humber, A-M. Inst. C.E., and M. Inst. M.E. Third Edition, Re- vised and much improved, with 115 Double Plates (20 of which now first appear in this edition), and numerous Additions to the Text. In Two Vols., imp. 4to, £6 16s. 6d. half-bound in morocco. " A very valuable contribution to the standard literature of civil engineering. In addition to elevations, plans and sections, large scale details are given which very much enhance the instruc- tive worth of these illustrations." — Ci-uil Engineer a7id Architect's Journal. "Mr. Humber's stately volumes, lately issued— in which the most important bridges erected during the last five year's, under the direction of the late Mr. Brunei, Sir W. Cubitt, Mr. Hawk- shaw, Mr. Page, Mr. Fowler, Mr. Hemans, and others among our most eminent engineers, are drawn and specified in great detail."— £"«^z«eer. I. Historical Sketch of some of the means that have been adopted for the Supply of Water to Cities and Towns. — II. Water and the Fo- rei§:n Matter usually associated with it.— III. Ramfall and Evaporation. — IV. Springs and the water-bearing formations of various dis- tricts. — V. Measurement and Estimation of the flow of Water —VI. On the Selection of the Source of Supply.— VII. Wells.— VIII. Reser- voirs.— IX. The Purification of Water.— X. Pumps. — XL Pumping Machinery. — XII. 8 CROSBY LOCK WOOD <^ SON'S CATALOGUE. MR. NUMBER'S GREAT WORK ON MODERN ENGINEERING. Complete in Four Volumes, imperial 4to, price £12 12s., half-morocco. Each Volume sold separately as follows : — i RECORD OF THE PROGRESS OF MODERN ENGINEER- ING. First Series. Comprismg Civil, Mechanical, Marine, Hydraulic, Railway, Bridge, and other Engineering Works, &c. By William Humber, A-M. Inst. C.E., &c. Imp. 4to, with 36 Double Plates, drawn to a large scale, Photographic Portrait of John Hawkshaw, C.E., F.R.S., &c., and copious descriptive Letterpress, Specifications, &c., £3 3s. half-morocco. List of the Plates and Diagrams. Thames, West London Extension Railway (g plates) ; Armour Plates : Suspension Bridge, Thames (4 plates) ; The Allen Engine ; Sus- pension Bridge, Avon (3 plates) ; Underground Railway (3 plates). Victoria Station and Roof, L. B. & S. C. R. (8 plates) ; Southport Pier (2 plates) ; Victoria Station and Roof, L. C. & D. and G. W, R. (6 plates) ; Roof of Cremorne Music Hall ; Bridge over G. N. Railway ; Roof of Station, Dutch Rhenish Rail (2 plates) ; Bridge over the " Handsomely lithographed and printed. It will find favour with many who desire to preserve in a permanent form copies of the plans and specifications prepared for the guidance of the con- tractors for many important engineering works." — En£tneer. NUMBER'S RECORD OF MODERN ENGINEERING, Second Series. Imp. 4to, with 36 Double Plates, Photographic Portrait of Robert Stephenson, C.E., M.P., F.R.S., &c., and copious descriptive Letterpress, Specifications, &c., £s 3s. half-morocco. List of the Plates and Diagrams. Birkenhead Docks, Low Water Basin (15 plates) ; Charing Cross Station Roof, C. C. Railway (3 plates) ; _pigswell Viaduct, Great Northern Railway ; Robbery Wood Viaducti Great Northern Railway ; Iron Permanent Way; Clydach Viaduct, Merthyr, Tredegar, and Abergavenny Rciilway ; Ebbw Viaduct, Merthyr, Tredegar, and Abergavenny Rail- way ; College Wood Viaduct, Cornwall Rail- way ; Dublin Winter Palace Roof (3 plates) ; Bridge over the Thames, L. C. & D. Railway (6 plates) ; Albert Harbour, Greenock (4 plates). " Mr. Humber has done the profession good and true service, by the fine collection of examples he has here brought before the profession and the puh\ic."—Prac(ical Mechanic's Journal. HUMBERTS RECORD OF MODERN ENGINEERING. Third Series. Imp. 4to, with 40 Double Plates, Photographic Portrait of J. R. M'Clean, late Pres. Inst. C.E., and copious descriptive Letterpress, Speci- fications, &c., £z 3s. half-morocco. List of the Plates and Diagrams. Sewer, Reservoir and Outlet (4 plates) ; Outfall Sewer, Filth Hoist ; Sections of Sewers (North and South Sides). Thames Embankment.— Section of River Wall ; Steamboat Pier, Westminster (2 plates); Landing Stairs between Charing Cross and Waterloo Bridges; York Gate (2 plates); Over- flow and Outlet at Savoy Street Sewer (3 plates) ; Steamboat Pier, Waterloo Bridge (3 plates) ; Junction of Sewers, Plans and Sections ; Gullies, Plans and Sections; Rolling Stock; Granite and Iron Forts. Main Drainage, Metropolis.— iVi^r/A Side.—yiSiX) showing Interception of Sewers ; Middle Level Sewer (2 plates) ; Outfall Sewer, Bridge over River Lea (3 plates) ; Outfall Sewer, Bridge over Marsh Lane, North Woolwich Railway, and Bow and Barking Railway Junc- tion ; Outfall Sewer, Bridge over Bow and Barking Railway (3 plates); Outfall Sewer. Bridge over East London Waterworks' Feeder (2 plates) ; Outfall Sewer, Reservoir (2 plates) ; Outfall Sewer, Tumbling Bay and Outlet ; Out- fall Sewer, Penstocks. South Side— OutiaW Sewer, Bermondsey Branch (2 plates) ; Outfall ** The drawings have a constantly increasing value, and whoever desires to possess clear repre- sentations of the two great works carried out by our Metropolitan Board will obtain Mr. Humber's vo\\xm&."— Engineer. HUMBER'S RECORD OF MODERN ENGINEERING. Fourth Series. Imp. 4to, with 36 Double Plates, Photographic Portrait of John Fowler, late Pres. Inst. C.E., and copious descriptive Letterpress, Speci- fications, &c., £s 3s. half-morocco. List of the Plates and Diagrams. Abbey Mills Pumping Station, Main Drain- age, Metropolis (4 plates) ; Barrow Docks (5 plates) ; Manquis Viaduct, Santiago and Val- paraiso Railway (2 plates); Adam's Locomo- tive, St. Helen's Canal Railway (2 plates) ; Cannon Street Station Roof, Charing Cross Railway (3 plates) ; Road Bridge over the River Moka (2 plates) ; Telegraphic Apparatus for ••We gladly welcome another year's issue of this valuable publication from the able pen of Mr. Humber. The accuracy and general excellence of this work are well known, while its useful- ness in giving the measurements and details of some of the latest examples of engineering, as carried out by the most eminent men in the profession, cannot be too highly prized."— A rtizan. Mesopotamia ; Viaduct over the River Wye, Midland Railway (3 plates) ; St. Germans Via- duct, Cornwall Railway (2 plates) ; Wrought- Iron Cylinder for Diving Bell ; Millwall Docks (6 plates) ; Milroy's Patent Excavator ; Metro- politan District Railway (6 plates) ; Harbours, Ports, and Breakwaters (3 plates). CIVIL ENGINEERING, SURVEYING, etc. Q MR. NUMBER'S ENGINEERING BOOKS— continued. Strains, Calculation of, A HANDY BOOK FOR THE CALCULATION OF STRAINS IN GIRDERS AND SIMILAR STRUCTURES, AND THEIR STRENGTH. Consisting of Formulae and Corresponding Diagrams, with numerous details for Practical Application, &c. By William Humber, A-M. Inst. C.E., &c. Fourth Edition, Crown 8vo, nearly lOo Woodcuts and 3 Plates, 7s. 6d. cloth. " The formulae are neatly expressed, and the diagrams good."~AthenS" /;t " Ornamental Interiors" the designs of more than thirty artist- decorators and architects of high standing have been illustrated. The book may therefore fairly claim to give a good general view of the works of the modern school of decoration, besides giving characteristic examples of earlier decorative arrange- ments. "Ornamental Interiors" gives a short account of the styles of Interior Decoration as practised by the Ancients in Egypt, Greece, Assyria, Rome and Byzan- tium. This part is illustrated by characteristic designs. The main body of the work, however, is devoted to the illustration of the modern styles of Decorative Art, and many examples are given of decorative designs suitable for modern Dining- Rooms, Dmwing-Rooms, Libraries, Staircases and Halls, Parlours, Studies and Smoking-Rooms. The Decoration of Public Buildings is illustrated by views of the chief [State Apartments in Buckingham Palace and Windsor Castle, the Salle de Leys at Antwerp, the Salle de Mariages at Brussels , and of other works which have distinctive featvLres suitable for the purpose. Opinions of the Press, "The book is well illustrated and handsomely got up, and contains some true criticism and a good many good examples of decorative treatment." — The Builder. " We can greatly commend Mr. Moyr Smith's book, for it is the production of one professedly capable in decorative work, and abounds with useful hints and descriptions of executed modern work, together with a well-put resume of ancient styles. ... As much a book for the drawing- room as for the manufacturer."— 77i^ British Architect. " Well fitted for the dilettante, amateur, and professional designer —Decoration. " This is the most elaborate, and beautiful work on the artistic decoration of interiors that we have seen. . . . The scrolls, panels and other designs from the author's own pen are very beautiful and chaste ; but he takes care that the designs of other men shall figure even more than his own." — Liverpool Albion. " To all who take an interest in elaborate domestic ornament this handsome volume will be welcome." — Graphic. " Mr. Moyr Smith deserves the thanks of art workers for having placed within their reach a book that seems eminently adapted to afford, by example and precept, that guidance of which most craftsmen stand in need."— Furniture Gazette. British and Foreign Marbles. MARBLE DECORATION and the Terminology of British and Foreign Marbles. A Handbook for Students. By George H. Blagrove, Author of " Shoring and its Application," &c. With 28 Illustrations. Crown 8vo, 3s, td, cloth. [Just published, c i8 CROSBY LOCKWOOD (S- SON'S CATALOGUE. DELAMOTTE'S WORKS ON ILLUMINATION AND ALPHABETS. A PRIMER OF THE ART OF ILLUMINATION, for the Use of Beginners : with a Rudimentary Treatise on the Art, Practical Directions for its exercise, and Examples taken from Illuminated MSS., printed in Gold and Colours. By F. Delamotte, New and Cheaper Edition. Small 4to, 6s. orna- mental boards. "The examples of ancient MSS. recommended to the student, which, with much good sense, the autJior chooses from collections accessible to all, are selected with judgment and knowledge, as well as taste." — Athe7icsuin. ORNAMENTAL ALPHABETS, Ancient and Medicsval, from the Eighth Century, with Numerals ; including Gothic, Church-Text, large and small, German, Italian, Arabesque, Initials for Illumination, Monograms, Crosses, &c. &c,, for the use of Architectural and Engineering Draughtsmen, Missal Painters, Masons, Decorative Painters, Lithographers, Engravers, Carvers, &c. &c. Collected and Engraved by F. Delamotte, and printed in Colours. New and Cheaper Edition. Royal 8vo, oblong, 2S. 6d. ornamental boards. ' ' For those who insert enamelled sentences round gilded chalices, who blazon shop legends over shop-doors, who letter church walls with pithy sentences from the Decalogue, this book will be use- ful. ' — Athenceum. EXAMPLES OF MODERN ALPHABETS, Plain and Ornamental; including German, Old English, Saxon, Italic, Perspective, Greek, Hebrew, Court Hand, Engrossing, Tuscan, Riband, Gothic, Rustic, and Arabesque ; with several Original Designs, and an Analysis of the Roman and Old English Alphabets, large and small, and Numerals, for the use of Draughtsmen, Sur- veyors, Masons, Decorative Painters, Lithographers, Engravers, Carvers, &c. Collected and Engraved by F. Delamotte, and printed in Colours. New and Cheaper Edition. Royal 8vo, oblong, 2S. 6d. ornamental boards. "There is comprised in it every possible shape into which the letters of the alphabet and numerals can be formed, and the talent which has been expended in the conception of the various plain and ornamental letters is wonderful." — Standard. MEDIEVAL ALPHABETS AND INITIALS FOR ILLUMI- NATORS. By F. G. Delamotte. Containing 21 Plates and Illuminated Title, printed in Gold and Colours. With an Introduction by J. Willis Brooks. Fourth and Cheaper Edition. Small 4to, 4s. ornamental boards. " A volume in which the letters of the alphabet come forth glorified in gilding and all the colours of the prism interwoven and intertwined and intermingled." — Sun. THE EMBROIDERER'S BOOK OF DESIGN. Containing Initials, Emblems, Cyphers, Monograms, Ornamental Borders, Ecclesiastical Devices, Mediaeval and Modern Alphabets, and National Emblems. Col- lected by F. Delamotte, and printed in Colours. Oblong royal 8vo, is. 6d. ornamental wrapper. "The book will be of great assistance to ladies and young children who are endowed with the art of plying the needle in this most ornamental and useful pretty work."— East A 7t£-lian Times. Wood Carving. INSTRUCTIONS IN WOOD-CARVING, for Amateurs; with Hints on Design. By A Lady. With Ten large Plates, 2s. 6d. in emblematic wrapper. " The handicraft of the wood-carver, so well as a book can impart it, may be learnt from • A Lady's' publication." — Athenceum. " The directions given are plain and easily understood."— Mechanic. Glass Bainting. GLASS STAINING AND THE ART OF PAINTING ON GLASS. From the German of Dr. Gessert and Emanuel Otto Fromberg. With an Appendix on The Art of Enamelling. i2mo, 2s. 6d. cloth limp. Letter JPainting* THE ART OF LETTER PAINTING MADE EASY. By James Greig Badenoch. With 12 full-page Engravings of Examples, is. cloth limp. " The system Is a simple one, but quite original, and well worth the careful attention of letter- painters. It can be easily mastered and reiaembexQd,"— Building- News. CARPENTRY, TIMBER, etc. 19 CARPENTRY, TIMBER, etc, TredgoliVs Carpentry, Enlarged by Tarn. THE ELEMENTARY PRINCIPLES OF CARPENTRY. A Treatise on the Pressure and Equilibrium of Timber Framing, the Resist- ance of Timber, and the Construction of Floors, Arches, Bridges, Roofs, Uniting Iron and Stone with Timber, &c. To which is added an Essay on the Nature and Properties oi Timber, &c., with Descrfptions of the kinds of Wood used in Building ; also numerous Tables of the Scantlings of Tim- ber for different purposes, the Specific Gravities of Materials, &c. By Thomas Tredgold, C.E. With an Appendix of Specimens of Various Roofs of Iron and Stone, Illustrated. Seventh Edition, thoroughly revised and considerably enlarged by E. Wyndham Tarn, M.A., Author of "The Science of Build- ing," &c. With 61 Plates, Portrait of the Author, and several Woodcuts. In one large vol., 4to, price £1 5s. cloth. "Ought to be in every architect's and every builder's library." — BiHlder. " A work whose monumental excellence must commend it wherever skilful carpentry is con- cerned. The author's principles are rather confirmed than impaired by time. The additional plates are of great intrinsic value." — Building- News. WoodtvorMng Machinery. WOODWORKING MACHINERY : Its Rise, Progress, and Con- struction. With Hints on the Management of Saw Mills and the Economical Conversion of Timber. Illustrated with Examples of Recent Designs by leading English, French, and American Engineers. By M. Powis Bale, A.M. Inst. C.E., M.I.M.E. Large crown 8vo, 12s. 6d. cloth. " Mr. Bale is evidently an expert on the subject, and he has collected so much information that his book is all-sufficient for builders and others engaged in the conversion of timber." — Architect. "The most comprehensive compendium of wood-working machinery we have seen. The author is a thorough master of his subject." — Building News. "The appearance of this book at the present time will, we should think, give a considerable impetus to the onward march of the machinist engaged in the designing and manufacture of wood-working machines. It should be in the office of every wood-working factory." — English Mechanic. Saiv Mills. SAW MILLS: Their Arrangement and Management, and the Economical Conversion of Timber. (Being a Companion Volume to ** Wood- working Machinery.") By M. Powis Bale, A.M. Inst. C.E., M.I.M.E. With numerous Illustrations. Crown 8vo, los. 6d. cloth. " The administration of a large sawing estabHshment is discussed, and the subject examined from a financial standpoint. Henc-e the size, shape, order, and disposition of saw-mills and the like are gone into in detail, and the course of the timber is traced from its reception to its delivery in its converted state. We could not desire a more complete or practical treatise." — Builder. "We highly recommend Mr. Bale's work to the attention and perusal of all those who are en- gaged in the art of wood conversion, or who are about building or remodelling saw-mills on im- proved principles."— ^2<;z7i3??«^ News. Carpentering. THE CARPENTER'S NEW GUIDE ; or, Book of Lines for Car- penters ; comprising all the Elementary Principles essential for acquiring a knowledge of Carpentry. Founded on the late Peter Nicholson's Standard Work. A New Edition, revised by Arthur Ashpitel, F.S.A. Together with Practical Rules on Drawing, by George Pynk. With 74 Plates, 4to, £1 IS. cloth. Handrailing. A PRACTICAL TREATISE ON HANDRAILING : Showing New and Simple Methods for Finding the Pitch of the Plank, Drawing the Moulds, Bevelling, Jointing-up, and Squaring the Wreath. By George CoLLiNGS. Illustrated with Plates and Diagrams. i2mo, is. 6d. cloth limp. " Will be found of practical utility in the execution of this difficult branch of jo'mery."— Builder. " Almost every difficult phase of this somewhat intricate branch of joinery s elucidated by the aid of plates and explanatory letterpress." — Furiiiturc Gazette. Circular WorJc. CIRCULAR WORK IN CARPENTRY AND JOINERY: A Practical Treatise on Circular Work of Single and Double Curvature. By George CoLLiNGs, Author of " A Practical Treatise on Handrailing." Illus- trated with numerous Diagrams. i2mo, 2S. 6d. cloth limp. Ijfust published. • An excellent example of what a book of this kind should be. Cheap in price, clear in defini- tion, and practical in the examples selected."— iSwi^er. 20 CROSBY LOCK WOOD cS- SON 'S CATALOGUE. Timber Merchant's Companion* THE TIMBER MERCHANTS AND BUILDER'S COM- PANION. Containing New and Copious Tables of the Reduced Weight and Measurement of Deals and Battens, of all sizes, from One to a Thousand Pieces, and the relative Price that each size bears per Lineal Foot to any given Price per Petersburg Standard Hundred ; the Price per Cube Foot of Square Timber to any given Price per Load of 50 Feet ; the proportionate Value ol Deals and Battens by the Standard, to Square Timber by the Load of 50 Feet; the readiest mode of ascertaining the Price of Scantling per Lineal Foot of any size, to any given Figure per Cube Foot, &c. &c. By William Dowsing. Fourth Edition, Revised and Corrected. Cr. 8vo, 3s. cl. "Every timber merchant and builder ought to possess it." — Hull Advertiser. " We are glad to see a fourth edition of these admirable tables, which for correctness and simplicity of arrangement leave nothing to be desired." — Timber Trades yournal. "An exceedingly well-arranged, clear, and concise manual of tables for the use of all who buy or sell timber." — yournal 0/ Forestry. JPractical Timber Merchant. THE PRACTICAL TIMBER MERCHANT. Being a Guide for the use of Building Contractors, Surveyors, Builders, &c., comprising useful Tables for all purposes connected with the Timber Trade, Marks of Wood, Essay on the Strength of Timber, Remarks on the Growth of Timber, &c. By W. Richardson. Fcap. 8vo, 3s. 6d, cloth. " This handy manual contains much valuable information for the use of timber merchants, builders, foresters, and all others connected with the growth, sale, and manufacture of timber.' — yournal of Forestry. Timber Freight BooJc. THE TIMBER MERCHANTS, SAW MILLER'S, AND IMPORTER'S FREIGHT BOOK AND ASSISTANT. Comprising Rules, Tables, and Memoranda relating to the Timber Trade. By William Richardson Timber Broker; together with a Chapter on "Speeds of Saw Mill Machinery," by M. Powis Bale, M.LM.E.. &c. i2mo, 3s. 6d. cl. boards. "A very useful manual of rules, tables, and memoranda, relating to the timber trade. We re- commend it as a compendium of calculation to all timber mceisurers and merchants, and as supply- ing a real want in the trade." — Building^ News. JPacMng-Case Makers, Tables for. PACKING-CASE TABLES ; showing the number of Super- ficial Feet in Boxes or Packing-Cases, from six inches square and upwards. By W. Richardson, Timber Broker. Second Edition. Oblong 4to. 3s. 6d. cl. " Invaluable labour-saving tables." — Ironmonger. " Will save much labour." — Grocer. Superficial Measurement. THE TRADESMAN'S GUIDE TO SUPERFICIAL MEA- SUREMENT. Tables calculated from i to 200 inches in length, by i to 108 inches in breadth. For the use of Architects, Surveyors, Engineers, Timber Merchants, Builders, &c. By James Hawkings. Third Edition. Fcap., 3s. 6d. cloth. " A useful collection of tables to facilitate rapid calculation of surfaces. The exact area of any surface of which the limits have been ascertained can be instantly determined. The book will be found of the greatest utility to all engaged in building operations." — Scotsman. Forestry. THE ELEMENTS OF FORESTRY. Designed to afford In- formation concerning the Planting and Care of Forest Trees for Ornament or Profit, with Suggestions upon the Creation and Care of Woodlands. By F. B. Hough. Large crown 8vo, los. cloth. Timber Importer's Guide. THE TIMBER IMPORTER'S, TIMBER MERCHANTS AND BUILDER'S STANDARD GUIDE. By Richard E. Grandy. Compris- ing an Analysis of Deal Standards, Home and Foreign, with Comparative Values and Tabular Arrangements for fixing Nett Landed Cost on Baltic and North American Deals, including all intermediate Expenses, Freight, Insurance, &c. &c. Together with copious Information for the Retailer and Builder. Third Edition, Revised. i2mo, 2s. 6d. cloth boards. " Everything it pretends to be : built up gradually, it leads one from a forest to a treenail, and throws in, as a makeweight, a host of material concerning bricks, columns, cisterns, Si.c."— -English Mechanic. NAVAL ARCHITECTURE, NAVIGATION, etc. 21 NAVAL ARCHITECTURE, NAVIGATION, etc. Chain Cables, — CHAIN CABLES AND CHAINS. Comprising Sizes and Curves of Links, Studs, &c., Iron for Cables and Chains, Chain Cable and Chain Making, Forming and Welding Links, Strength of Cables and Chains, Certificates for Cables, Marking Cables, Prices of Chain Cables and Chains, Historical Notes, Acts of Parliament, Statutory Tests, Charges for Testing, List of Manufacturers of Cables, &c. &c. By Thomas W. Traill, F.E.R.N., M. Inst. C.E., Engineer Surveyor in Chief, Board of Trade, the Inspector of Chain Cable and Anchor Proving Establishments, and General Superin- tendent, Lloyd's Committee on Proving Establishments. With numerous Tables, Illustrations and Lithographic Drawings. Folio, £2 2S. cloth, bevelled boards. " The author writes not only with a full acquaintance with scientific formulae and details, but also with a profound and fully-instructed sense of the importance to the safety of our ships and sailors of fidelity in the manufacture of cables." — Athe7tceii)n. " The business of chain cable making- is well explained and illustrated. "We can safely recom- mend this work to all in any way connected with the manufacture of chain cables and chains, as a good book." — Nature. "It contains a vast amount of valuable information. Nothing seems to be wanting to make it a complete and standard work of reference on the subject." — Nautical Magazhie. PocJcet'BooJc for Naval Architects and Shipbuilders. THE NAVAL ARCHITECT'S AND SHIPBUILDER'S POCKET-BOOK of Formula, Rules,and Tables,and MARINE ENGINEER'S AND SURVEYOR'S Handy Book of Reference. By Clement Mackrow, Member of the Institution of Naval Architects, Naval Draughtsman. Third Edition, Revised. With numerous Diagrams, &c. Fcap., 12s. 6d. strongly bound in leather. " Should be used by all who are engaged in the construction or design of vessels. . . . Will be found to contain the most useful tables and formulae required by shipbuilders, carefully collected from the best authorities, and put together in a popular and simple form." — E7tgineer. "The professional shipbuilder has now, in a convenient and accessible form, reliable data for solving many of the numerous problems that present themselves in the course of his work." — Iron. "There is scarcely a subject on which a naval architect or shipbuilder can require to refresh his memory which will not be found within the covers of Mr. Mackrow'sbook." — Englisk Mechanic. PocJcet-Booh for Marine Engineers. A POCKET-BOOK OF USEFUL TABLES AND FOR- MULA FOR MARINE ENGINEERS. By Frank Proctor, A.I.N.A. Third Edition. Royal 32mo, leather, gilt edges, with strap, 4s. "We recommend it to our readers as going far to supply a long-felt -want."— Naval Science. "A most useful companion to all marine engineers."— United Service Gazette. Lighthouses. EUROPEAN LIGHTHOUSE SYSTEMS, Being a Report of a Tour of Inspection made in 1873. By Major George H. Elliot, Corps of Engineers, U.S.A. Illustrated by 51 Engravings and 31 Woodcuts. 8vo, 21S. cloth. \* The following are published in We ale's Rudimentary Series. MASTING, MAST-MAKING, AND RIGGING OF SHIPS, By Robert Kipping, N.A. Fifteenth Edition. i2mo, 2s. 6d. cloth boards. SAILS AND SAIL-MAKING. Eleventh Edition, Enlarged, with an Appendix. By Robert Kipping, N.A. Illustrated. i2mo, 3s. cloth boards. NAVAL ARCHITECTURE, By James Peake. Fifth Edition, with Plates and Diagrams. i2mo, 4s. cloth boards. MARINE ENGINES AND STEAM VESSELS {A Treatise on). By Robert Murray, C.E., Principal Officer to the Board of Trade for the East Coast of Scotland District. Eighth Edition, thoroughly Revised, with considerable Additions, by the Author and by George Carlisle, C.E., Senior Surveyor to the Board of Trade at Liverpool. i2mo, 5s. cloth boards. PRACTICAL NAVIGATION. Consisting of The Sailor's Sea- Book, by Jas. Greenwood and W. H. Rosser ; together with the requisite Mathematical and Nautical Tables for the Working of the Problems, by Henry Law, C.E. and Prof. J. R.Young. Illustrated i2mo,7s. half-bound. 22 CROSBY LOCK WOOD &- SON'S CATALOGUE. MINING AND MINING INDUSTRIES. Metalliferous Mining. BRITISH MINING : A Treatise on the History, Discovery, Practical Development, and Future Prospects of Metalliferous Mines in the United King- dom. By Robert Hunt, F.R.S., Keeper of Mining Records; Editor of Ure's Dictionary of Arts, Manufactures, and Mines," &c. Upwards of 950 pp., with 230 Illustrations. Second Edition, Revised. Super-royal 8vo, £2 2S. cloth. [,Just published. \* Opinions of the Press. "One of the most valuable works of reference of modern times. Mr. Hunt, as keeper of mining records of the United Kingdom, has had opportunities for such a task not enjoyed by anyone else, and has evidently made the most of them. . . . The language and style adopted are good, and the treatment of the various subjects laborious, conscientious, and scientific." — EiigineeHng. "Probably no one in this country was better qualified than Mr. Hunt for undertaking such a work. Brought into frequent and close association during a long life-time with the principal guar- dians of our mineral and metallurgical industries, he enjoyed a position exceptionally favourable for collecting the necessary information. The use which he has made of his opportunities is suffi- ciently attested by the dense mass of information crowded into the handsome volume which has just been published. ... In placing before the reader a sketch of the present position of British Mining, Mr. Hunt treats his subject so fully and illustrates it so amply that this section really forms a little treatise on practical mining. . . . The book is, in fact, a treasure-house of statistical information on mining subjects, and we know of no other work embodying so great amass of matter of this kind. Were this the only merit of Mr. Hunt's volume it would be sufficient to render it indispensable in the library of everyone interested in the development of the mining and metallur- gical industries of this country." — AtheneZKjn. "A mass of information not elsewhere available, and of the greatest value to those who may be interested in our great mineral industries." — Engineer, "A sound, business-hke collection of interesting facts. . . . The amount of information Mr. Hunt has brought together is enormous. . . . The volume appears likely to convey more instruction upon the subject than any work hitherto published." — Mining Journal. "The work will be for the mining industry what Dr. Percy's celebrated treatise has been for the metallurgical — a book that cannot with advantage be omitted from the library." — Iron and Coal Trades Review. ".The literature of mining has hitherto possessed no work approaching in importance to that which has just been published. There is much in Mr. Hunt's valuable work that every shareholder in a mine should read with close attention. The entire subject of practical mining — from the first search for the lode to the latest stages of dressing the ore — is dealt with in a masterly manner." — Academy. QoV..''—Athenr. Lardner^s Electric Telegraph. THE ELECTRIC TELEGRAPH. By Dr. Lardner. Re- vised and Re-written by E. B. Bright, F.R.A.S. 140 Illustrations. SmaD 8vo, 2S. 6d. cloth. " One of the most readable books extant on the Electric Telegraph." — Eiiglish Mechanic. Storms. STORMS : Their Nature, Classification, and Laws; with the Means of Predicting them by their Embodiments, the Clouds. By Wm. Blasius. With Coloured Plates and Woodcuts.' Crown Bvo, ids. 6d. cloth. " A very readable book. . . . The fresh facts contained in its pages, collected with evident care, form a useful repository for meteorologists in the study of atmospherical disturbances. . . . The book will pay perusal as being the production of one who gives evidence of acute observa- tion." — Naticre. The Blowpipe. THE BLOWPIPE IN CHEMISTRY, MINERALOGY, AND GEOLOGY. Containing all known Methods of Anhydrous Analysis, many Working Examples, and Instructions for Making Apparatus. By Lieut.- Colonel W. A. Ross, R.A. With 120 Illustrations. Cr. 8vo, 3s. 6d. cloth. "The student who goes conscientiously through the course of experimentation here laid dowm will gain a better insight into inorganic chemistry and mineralogy than if he had 'got up 'any of the best text-books ot the day, and passed any number of examinations in their contents." — Ckemi- cal Xeivs. Tlie Military Sciences. AIDE-MEMOIRE TO THE MILITARY SCIENCES. Framed from Contributions of Officers and others connected with the different Ser- vices. Originally edited by a Committee of the Corps of Royal Engineers, Second Edition, most carefully revised by an Officer of the Corps, with many Additions; containing nearly 350 Engravings and many hundred Woodcuts. Three Vols., royal 8vo, extra cloth boards, and lettered, £^ los. "A compendious encyclopaedia of military knowledge, to which we are greatly indebted."— Edifibitr^h Review. Field Fortification. A TREATISE ON FIELD FORTIFICATION, THE ATTACK OF FORTRESSES, MILITARY MINING, AND RECONNOITRING. By Colonel I. S. Macaulay, late Professor of Fortification in the R.M.A., Wool- wich. Sixth Edition, crown 8vo, cloth, with separate Atlas of 12 Plates, 12s, 26 CROSBY LOCK WOOD SON'S CATALOGUE. Temp eram ents, OUR TEMPERAMENTS, THEIR STUDY AND THEIR TEACHING. A Popular Outline. By Alexander Stewart, F.R.C.S. Edin. In one large 8vo volume, with 30 Illustrations, including A Selection from Lodge's " Historical Portraits," showing the Chief Forms of Faces, Price 15s. cloth, gilt top. "The book is exceedingly interesting, even for those who are not systematic students of an- thropologfy. ... To those who think the proper study of mankind is man, it will be full of attrac- tion."— i^'az/y Telegraph. "The author's object is to enable a student to read a man's temperament in his aspect. The work is well adapted to its end. It is worthy of the attention of students of human nature."— ScotS)na)i. " The volume is heavy to hold, but light to read. Though the author has treated his subject exhaustively, he writes in a popular and pleasant manner that renders it attractive to the general reader." — Ptuich. Pneumatics and Acoustics. PNEUMATICS : including Acoustics and the Phenomena of Wind Currents, for the Use of Beginners. By Charles Tomlinson, F.R.S., F.C.S., &c. Fourth Edition, Enlarged. With numerous Illustrations. i2mo, IS. 6d. cloth. [Just published. " Beginners in the study of this important application of science could not have a better manual. ' ' —Scots7Jza9i. " A valuable and suitable text-book for students of Acoustics and the Phenomena of Wind Currents."— Sc/iool9nasier. Conchology, A MANUAL OF THE MOLLUSC A : Being a Treatise on Recent and Fossil Shells. By S. P. Woodward, A.L.S., F.G.S., late Assistant Palaeontologist in the British Museum. Fifth Edition. With an Appendix on Recent and Fossil Conchological Discoveries, by Ralph Tate, A.L.S., F.G.S. Illustrated by A. N. Waterhouse and Joseph Wilson Lowry. With 23 Plates and upwards of 300 Woodcuts. Crown 8vo, ys. 6d. cloth boards. " A most valuable storehouse of conchological and geological information." — Science Gossip. Astronomy, ASTRONOMY. By the late Rev. Robert Main, M.A., F.R.S., formerly Radcliffe Observer at Oxford. Third Edition, Revised and Cor- rected to the present time, by William Thynne Lynn, B. A., F.R. A.S., formerly of the Royal Observatory, Greenwich. i2mo, 2s. cloth limp. "A sound and simple treatise, very carefully edited, and a capital book for beginners."— I^noTvleds-e. "Accurately brought down to the requirements of the present time by Mr. Lynn.." — JEdu- catioiial Times. Geology. RUDIMENTARY TREATISE ON GEOLOGY, PHYSICAL AND HISTORICAL. Consisting of "Physical Geology," which sets forth the leading Principles of the Science ; and " Historical Geology,'* which treats of the Mineral and Organic Conditions of the Earth at each successive epoch, especial reference being made to the British Series of Rocks. By Ralph Tate, A.L.S., F.G.S. , &c., &c. With 250 Illustrations. i2mo, 5s. cloth boards. " The fulness of the matter has elevated the book into a manual. Its information is exhaustive and well arranged." — School Board Chrofticle. Geology and Genesis. THE TWIN RECORDS OF CREATION; or, Geology and Genesis : their Perfect Harmony and Wonderftd Concord. By George W, Victor le Vaux. Numerous Illustrations. Fcap. 8vo, 5s. cloth. "A valuable contribution to the evidences of Revelation, and disposes very conclusively of the arguments of those who would set God's Works against God's Word. No real difficulty.-is shirked, and no sophistry is left unexposed." — The Rock. " The remarkable peculiarity of this author is that he combines an unbounded admiration of science with an unbounded admiration of the Written record. The two impulses are balanced to a nicety ; and the consequence is that difficulties, which to minds less evenly poised would be seri- ous, find immediate solutions of the happiest kinds. '—London Review. NATURAL AND APPLIED SCIENCE. 27 DR. LARDNER'S HANDBOOKS OF NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. THE HANDBOOK OF MECHANICS. Enlarged and almost re- written by Benjamin Loewy, F.R.A.S. With 378 Illustrations. Post 8vo, 6s. cloth. " The perspicuity of the original has been retained, and chapters which had become obsolete have been replaced by others of more modern character. The explanations throughout are studiously popular, and care has been taken to show the application of the various branches of physics to the industrial arts', and to the practical business of lile." — Minting- yournal. "Mr. Loewy has carefully revised the book, and brought it up to modern requirements."— Natjire. " Natural philosophy has had few exponents more able or better skilled in the art of popu- Earising the subject than Dr. Lardner ; and Mr. Loewy is doing good service in fitting this treatise, and the others of the series, for use at the present time." — Scotsniafi. THE HANDBOOK OF HYDROSTATICS AND PNEUMATICS. New Edition, Revised and Enlarged, by Benjamin Loewy, F.R.A.S. With 236 Illustrations. Post 8vo, 5s. cloth. "For those 'who desire to attain an accurate knowledge of physical science without the pro- found methods of mathematical investigation,' this work is not merely intended, but well adapted."' — Chemical Ne^vs. " The volume before us has been carefully edited, augmented to nearly twice the bulk of the former edition, and all the most recent matter has been added. . . . It is a valuable text-book." ^Nature. " Candidates for pass examinations will find it, we think, specially suited to their requirements." Sn^lis/i Mechanic, THE HANDBOOK OF HEAT. Edited and almost entirely re- written by Benjamin Loewy, F.R.A.S., &c. 117 Illustrations. Post 8vo, 6s. cloth. " The style is always clear and precise, and conveys instruction without leaving any cloudiness or lurking doubts behind." — Engiyieering. "A most exhaustive book on the subject on which it treats, and is so arranged that it can be understood by all who desire to attain an accurate knowledge of physical science Mr. Loewy has included all the latest discoveries in the varied laws and effects of heat." — Standard. "A complete and handy text-book for the use of students and general readers." — EngUsh Mechanic. THE HANDBOOK OF OPTICS. By Dionysius Lardner,D.C.L., formerly Professor of Natural Philosophy and Astronomy in University College, London. New Edition. Edited by T. Olver Harding, B.A. Lond., of University College, London. With 298 Illustrations. Small 8vo, 448 pages, 5s. cloth. "Written by one of the ablest English scientific writers, beautifully and elaborately illustrated." Mechanic s Magazine. THE HANDBOOK OF ELECTRICITY, MAGNETISM, AND ACOUSTICS. By Dr. Lardner. Ninth Thousand. Edit, by George Carey Foster, B.A., F.C.S. With 400 Illustrations. Small 8vo, 5s. cloth. " The book could not have been entrusted to anyone better calculated to preserve the terse and fucid style of Lardner, while correcting his errors and bringing up his work to the present state of scientific knowledge." — Poptilar Science Review. \* The- above. Five Volumes, though each is Complete in itself, form A Com- plete Course of Natural Philosophy. Dr, Lardner^s Handbook of Astronomy. THE HANDBOOK OF ASTRONOMY. Forming a Companion to the " Handbook of Natural Philosophy.'' By Dionysius Lardner, D.C.L., formerly Professor of Natural Philosophy and Astronomy in University College, London. Fourth Edition. Revised and Edited by Edwin Dunkin, F.R.A.S., Royal Observatory, Greenwich. With 38 Plates and upwards of 100 Woodcuts. In One Vol., small 8vo, 550 pages, gs. 6d. cloth. " Probably no other book contains the same amount of information in so compendious and well- arranged a form — certainly none at the price at which this is otfered to the public." — Athencetim. "We can do no other than pronounce this work a most valuable manual of astronomy, and we strongly recommend it to aU who wish to acquire a general — but at the same time correct — acquaint- ance with this subUme science." — Quarterly yotir7tal of Sciettce. "One of the most deservedly popular books on the subject . . . We would recommend not only the student of the elementary principles of the science, but he who aims at mastering- the higher and mathematical branches of astronomy, not to be without this work beside him." — Practi- cal Magazine. 28 CROSBY LOCKWOOD SON'S CATALOGUE, DR. LARDNER'S MUSEUM OF SCIENCE AND ART. motive — Thermometer — New Planets : Le* verrier and Adams's Planet— Magnitude and Minuteness— Common Things : The Almanack — Optical Images— How to observe the Heavens — Common Things : The Looking-glass — Stellar Universe— The Tides— Colour— Com- mon Things: Man — Magnifying Glasses — In- stinct and Intelligence— The Solar Microscope — The Camera Lucida — The Magic Lantern— The Camera Obscura — The Microscope — The White Ants : Their Manners and Habits— The Surface of the Earth, or First Notions of Geography— Science and Poetry — The Bee — Steam Navigation — Electro-Motive Power — Thunder, Lightning, and the Aurora Borealis —The Printing Press— The Crust of the Earth — Comets — The Stereoscope — The Pre-Adara- ite Earth — Eclipses — Sound. THE MUSEUM OF SCIENCE AND ART, Edited by DiONYSius Lardner, D.C.L., formerly Professor of Natural Philosophy and Astronomy in University College, London. With upwards of 1,200 Engrav- ings on Wood. In 6 Double Volumes, £1 is., in a new and elegant cloth bind- ing ; or handsomely bound in half-morocco, 31s. 6d. Contents : The Planets: Are they Inhabited Worlds ?— Weather Prognostics — Popular Fallacies in Questions of Physical Science— Latitudes and Longitudes — Lunar Influences — Meteoric Stones and Shooting Stars— Railway Accidents —Light— Common Things : Air— Locomotion in the United States— Cometary Influences — Common Things : Water— The Potter's Art- Common Things : Fire — Locomotion and Transport, their Influence and Progress — The Moon— Common Things: The Earth- The Electric Telegraph — Terrestrial Heat — The Sun— Earthquakes and Volcanoes— Barometer, Safety Lamp, and Whitworth's Micrometric Apparatus— Steam— The Steam Engine— The Eye — The Atmosphere — Time — Common Things: Pumps— Common Things : Spectacles, the Kaleidoscope — Clocks and Watches — Microscopic Drawing and Engraving— Loco- Opinions of the Press. "This series, besides afl^ording popular but sound instruction on scientific subjects, vAth which the humblest man in the country ought to be acquainted, also undertakes that teaching of ' Com- mon Things ' which every well-wisher of his kind is anxious to promote. Many thousand copies 0/ this serviceable publication have been printed, in the belief and hope that the desire for instruction and improvement widely prevails ; and we have no fear that such enlightened faith will meet with disappointment."— rtwer and Printing- Trades Journal, " The book is clear and complete, and will be useful to anyone wanting to understand the first elements of the beautiful art of wood engraving." — G7'aphic. Paper Making, A TREATISE ON PAPER; with an Outline of its Manufacture, Complete Tables of Sizes, etc. For Printers and Stationers. By Richardson Parkinson. 8vo, 3j. cloth ; 2S. ^d. paper wrapper. " An admirable handbook by a man who understands his s\xh}QcV —Printers' Register. 32 CROSBY LOCKWOOD 6- SON'S CATALOGUE. LOCKWOOD'S HANDYBOOKS FOR HANDICRAFTS. These Handybooks are written to supply Handicraftsmen with informa- tion on workshop practice, and are intended to convey, m plain language, technical knowledge of the several crafts. Workshop terms are used, and workshop practice described, the text being freely illustrated with drawings of modern tools^ appliances and processes, useful alike to the young beginner and to the old hand, whose range -of experience has been narrowed under a system of divided labour, as well as to amateurs. IS" The following Volumes are already published. Metal Tiirning. THE METAL TURNER'S HANDYBOOK. A Practical Manual for Workers at the Foot-Lathe : Embracing Information on the Tools, Appliances and Processes employed in Metal Turning. By Paul N. Has- LUCK, A.I. M.E., Author of " Lathe-Work." With upwards of One Hundred Illustrations. Second Edition, Revised. Cr. 8vo, 2S. cloth. [Just published. " Altogether admirably adapted to initiate students into the art of turning."— Leicester Post. " Clearly and concisely written, excellent in every way, we heartily commend it to all interested iin metal turning." — Mechanical World. "With the assistance of a clever master, a clear and vivid expounder, and an abundance of illustrations, the work lets handicraftsmen know what are the resources of the turning-lathe and how these may be developed," — Dundee Advertiser, Wood Turning. THE WOOD TURNER'S HANDYBOOK. A Practical Manual for Workers at the Lathe: Embracing Information on the Tools, Appliances and Processes Employed in Wood Turning. By Paul N. Hasluck, A.I.M.E., Author of " Lathe-Work," "The Metal Turner's Handybook," &c. With upwards of One Hundred Illustrations. Crown 8vo, 2S, cloth. [Just published. The volume is well and clearly written in a lucid style, and all the instructions are fully given. It will be found of great value to workmen and amateurs, and forms a safe and reliable guide to every branch of the lathe manipulation," — Carpenter and Builder. " An excellent manual for workers at the lathe," — Glasgow Herald. "We recommend the book to young turners and amateurs, A multitude of workmen have fiitherto sought in vain for a manual of this special industry." — Mechanical World. Watch Repairing. THE WATCH JOBBER'S HANDYBOOK. A Practical Manual on Cleaning, Repairing and Adjusting. Embracing Information on the Tools, Materials, Appliances and Processes Employed in Watchwork. By Paul N. Hasluck, A.I.M.E., Author of " Lathe-Work," "The Metal Turner's Handy- Book," ''The Wood Turner's Handybook," &c. With upwards of One Hundred Illustrations. Crown 8vo, 2S. cloth. [Just published. " Written in a clear style exactly suited to beginners and amateurs. We heartily recommend tit." — Practical Engineer. " We recommend it to craftsmen in watchmaking as a useful and well-written grammar of their art," — Scotsman. "All young persons connected with the trade should acquire and study this excellent, and at the same time, inexpensive work." — Clcrke)iwell Chronicle. Pattern Making. THE PATTERN MAKER'S HANDYBOOK, A Practical Manual, embracing Information on the Tools, Materials and Appliances em- ployed in Constructing Patterns for Founders. By Paul N. Hasluck, A.I.M.E. With One Hundred Illustrations. Cr. 8vo, 2s. cloth. [Just published. "Mr, Hasluck's 'Lathe Work' and kindred productions have acquired a high reputation. His new volume, ' Pattern Making,' contains invaluable advice, and furnishes the studious workman with a very large amount of practical information." — Lloyd's A'eivs. " Especially useful to the beginner. We commend it to all who are interested in the counsels it so ably ^iv&s."— Colliery Guardian. "This handy volume contains sound information of considerable value to students and s,rWfiCQXs."— Hardware Trade Journal. Mechanical Manipulation. THE MECHANICS WORKSHOP HANDYBOOK. A Practical Manual on Mechanical Manipulation. Embracing Information on various Handicraft Processes, with Useful Notes and Miscellaneous Memoranda. By Paul N. Hasluck, A.I.M.E. Author of "Lathe-Work," "The Metal Turner's Handybook," " The Wood Turner's Handybook." &c. Crown Svo, 2s. cloth. [Just ready. INDUSTRIAL AND USEFUL ARTS. 33 Electrolysis of Gold, Silver ^ Copper ^ etc, ELECTRO-DEPOSITION : A Practical Treatise on the Electrolysis of Gold, Silver, Copper, Nickel, and other Metals and Alloys. With descrip- tions of Voltaic Batteries, Magnet and Dynamo-Electric Machines, Ther- mopiles, and of the Materials and Processes used in every Department of the Art, and several Chapters on ELECTRO-METALLURGY. By Alex- ander Watt, Author of "Electro-Metallurgy," &c. With numerous Illus- trations. Second Edition, Revised and Corrected. Crown 8vo, gs. cloth. IJtist published. " Evidently-written by a practical man who has spent a long period of time in electro-plate workshops. The information given respecting the details of workshop manipulation is remarkably complete. . . . Mr. Watt's book will prove of great value to electro.depositors, jewellers, and various other workers in metal." — Nature. " Eminently a book for the practical worker in electro-deposition. It contains minute and practical descriptions of methods, processes and materials as actually pursued and used in tlie workshop. Mr. Watt's book recommends itself to all interested in its subjects." — En^itieer. Electro- Metallurgy. ELECTRO-METALLURGY : Practically Treated. By Alexander Watt, F.R.S.S.A. Eighth Edition, Revised, with Additional Matter and Illustrations, including the most recent Processes. i2mo, 3s. 6d. cloth boards. "From this book both amateur and artisan may learn everything necessary for the successful prosecution of electroplating."— Electroplating. ELECTROPLATING : A Practical Handbook. By J. W. Urqu- hart, C.E. With numerous Illustrations. Crown 8vo, 5s. cloth. "The information given appears to be based on direct personal knowledge. . . Its sciencw is sound and the style is always clear." — Athencetcm. Electrotyping. ELECTROTYPING : The Reproduction and Multiplication of Print- ing Surfaces and Works of Art by the Electro-deposition of Metals. By J. W. Urquhart, C.E. Crown 8vo, 5s, cloth. "The book is thoroughly practical. The reader is, therefore, conducted through the leading taws of electricity, then through the metals used by electrotypers, the apparatus, and the depositing: processes, up to the final preparation of the work." — Art Journal. "We can recommend this treatise, not merely to amateurs, but to those actually engaged in th'.i trade." — Chemical News. Goldsmitlis^ WorJc. THE GOLDSMITH'S HANDBOOK. By George E. Gee, Jeweller, &c. Third Edition, considerably Enlarged. i2mo, 3s. 6d. cloth boards. "A good, sound, technical educator, and will be generally accepted as an authority. It exactly fulfils the purpose intended." — Horological Jotirnal. "Will speedily become a standard book which few will care to be without." — jfeweller and Metalworker. Silversmiths^ Work. THE SILVERSMITH'S HANDBOOK. By George E. Gee, Jeweller, &c. Second Edition, Revised, with numerous Illustrations. i2mo, 3s. 6d. cloth boards. "The chief merit of the work is its practical character. . . . The workers in the trade will speedily discover its merits when they sit down to study it." — English Mechanic. " This work forms a valuable sequel to the author's 'Goldsmith's Yid^nd^ooV.' "^Silversmiths' TracU Journal. The above two works together, strongly ha j -bound, price ys. Textile Manitfactiirers^ Tables. UNIVERSAL TABLES OF TEXTILE STRUCTURE. For the use of Manufacturers in every branch of Textile Trade. By Joseph Edmondson. Oblong folio, strongly bound in cloth, price ys. 6d. The principle on which the tables are founded is well known, and much used in the muslin manufacture, but the intricacy of the calculations hitherto required {especially where warp and weft differ in counts and in the closeness of the threads) has prevented its general application. By these tables all the adjustments may be made without calculation. Mere references to the proper places bring out the required information. " Immense labour has been bestowed on the work by the author. The tables are adapted to every mode of numbering yarns and setts, and apply to all the branches of textile manufacture."— Textile Recorder. D CROSBY LOCKWOOD <^ SON'S CATALOGUE. Horology, A TREATISE ON MODERN HOROLOGY, in Theory and Pvac tice. Translated from the French of Claudius Saunter, ex-Director of the School of Horology at Macon, by Julien Tripplin, F.R.A.S., Besancon Watch Manufacturer, and Edward Rigg, M.A., Assayer in the Royal Mint. With Seventy-eight Woodcuts and Twenty-two Coloured Copper Plates. Second Edition. Super-royal 8vo, £2 2S. cloth, £2 los. half-calf. " There is no horolog'ical work in the English langfuag'e at all to be compared to this produce tion of M. Saunier's for clearness and completeness. It is alike good as a guide for the student and as a reference for the experienced horologist and skilled workman." — Horological your>ial. " The latest, the most complete, and the most reliable of those literary productions to which coTitinental watchmakers are indebted for the mechanical superiority over their English brethren — in fact, the Book of Books.is M. Saunier's ''Ixaz.'^x^a.'" —VFatchmaker, Jeweller and Sil-versviith. " This magnificent treatise is one of the most valuable and comprehensive contributions to the literature of horological art and science ever produced, and cannot be too highly commended. It is a perfect cyclopaedia of watch and clockmaking."— 77tg Ccuefiiry IVatch and Clockjnaker. WatchmaMng, THE WATCHMAKER'S HANDBOOK, Intended as a Work- shop Companion for those engaged in Watchmaking and the Allied Mechani- cal Arts. Translated from the French of Claudius Saunier, and consider- ably Enlarged by Julien Tripplin, F.R.A.S., Vice-President of the Horologi- cal Institute, and Edward Rigg, M.A., Assayer in the Royal Mint. With Numerous Woodcuts and Fourteen Copper Plates. Second Edition, Revised. With Appendix. Crov/n 8vo, gs. cloth. [Just published. " Each part is trulj'' a treatise in itself. The arrangement is good and the language is clear and concise. It is an admirable guide for the young watchmaker."— i;';?^/;/^^;'/;/^. " It is impossible to speak too highly of its excellence. It fulfils every requirement in a hand- hook intended for the use of a worKman. Should be found in every workshop." — Watch and Clockmaker. " Thi=;book contains an immense number of practical details bearing on the daih'' occupation of a watchmaker, and it will be found of great use to an army of workers." — IVatchJuaker and Metal'cuorker (Chicago). CHEMICAL MANUFACTURES & COMMERCE, The Allzali Trade, Sulphuric Acid, etc. A MANUAL OF THE ALKALI TRADE, including the Manufacture of Sulphuric Acid, Sulphate of Soda, and Bleaching Powder. By John Lomas, Alkali Manufacturer, Newcastle-upon-Tyne and London. With 232 Illustrations and Working Drawings, and containing 390 pages of Text. Second Edition, with Additions. Super-royal 8vo, los. cloth. "This book is written by a manufacturer for manufacturers. The working details of the most approved forms of apparatus are given, and these are accompanied by no less than 2^2 wood en- gravings, all of which may be used for the purposes of construction. Every step in the manufac ture is very fully described in this manual, and each improvement explained." — Athenainn. " The author is not one of those clever compilers who, on short notice, will ' read up ' any conceiv- able subject, but a practical man in the best sense of the word. We find here not merely a sound and luminous explanation of the chemical principles of the trade, but a notice of numerous matters which have a most important bearing on the successful conduct of alkali works, but w-hich are generally overlooked by even the most experienced technological authors." — Chemical Review, Breiving. A HANDBOOK FOR YOUNG BREWERS. By Herbert Edwards Wright, B.A. Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d. cloth. " This little volume, containing such a large amount of good sense in so small a compass, oughl to recommend itself to every brewery pupil." — Brewers' Guardian. Commercial Chemical Analysis. THE COMMERCIAL HANDBOOK OF CHEMICAL ANA^ LYSIS; or, Practical Instructions for the determination of the Intrinsic or Commercial Value of Substances used in Manufactures, in Trades, and in the Arts. By A. Normandy, Editor of Rose's "Treatise on Chemical Analysis." New Edition, to a great extent Re-written by Henry M. Noad, Ph.D., F.R.S. With numerous Illustrations. Crown 8vo, 12s. 6rf. cloth. "We strongly recommend this book to our readers as a guide, alike indispensable to the house- wife as to the pharmaceutical practitioner." — Medical Ti>nes. " Essential to the analysts appointed under the new Act. The most recent results are given, and the work is well edited and carefully wtiiien."— Nature. AGRICULTURE, FARMING, GARDENING, etc. 35 Dye-Wares and Colours. THE MANUAL OF COLOURS AND DYE-WARES : Their Properties, Applications, Valuation^ Impurities, and Sophistications. For the use of Dyers, Printers, Drysalters, Brokers, &c. By J. W. Slater. Second Edition, Revised and greatly Enlarged. Crown 8vo, ys. 6d. cloth. "A complete encyclopaedia of the materia tinctoria. The information given respectlngf each article is full and precise, and the methods of determining the value of articles such as these, so liable to sophistication, are given with clearness, and are practical as well as valuable." — Chemist a?id Druggist. " There is no other work which covers precisely the same ground. To students preparing for examinations in dyeing and printing it will prove exceedingly useful." — Chemical News. JPigments. THE ARTIST'S MANUAL OF PIGMENTS, Showing their Composition, Conditions of Permanency. Non-Permanency, and Adul- terations; Effects in Combination with Each Other and with Vehicles ; and the most Reliable Tests of Purity. Together with the Science and Arts Department's Examination Questions on Painting. By H. C. Standage. Second Edition, Revised. Small crown 8vo, 2S. 6d. cloth. [Jtist published. " This work is indeed mtcltum-hi-parvo, and we can, with good conscience, recommend it to all who come in contact with pigments, whether as makers, dealers or users." — Chemical Review. "This manual cannot fail to be a very valuable aid to all painters who wish their work to endure and be of a sound character ; it is complete and comprehensive." — Si>ectator. " The author supplies a great deal of very valuable information and memoranda as to the chemical quaUties and artistic effect of the principal pigments used by painters." — Builder. Gauging. Tables and Hides for Hevenite Officers^ HrewerSt etc, A POCKET BOOK OF MENSURATION AND GAUGING : Containing Tables, Rules and Memoranda for Revenue Officers, Brewers, Spirit Merchants, &c. By J. B. Manx (Inland Revenue). Oblong i8mo, 4s, leather, with elastic band. [Jmt publislied. " This handy and useful book is adapted to the requirements of the Inland Revenue Depart- ment, and will be a favourite book of reference. The range of subjects is comprehensive, and the arrangement simple and clear." — Ciuiliaji. " A most useful book. It should be in tlie hands of every practical brewer." — Brewers Journal. AGRICULTURE, FARMING, GARDENING, etc. Agricidtural Facts and Figures. NOTE-BOOK OF AGRICULTURAL FACTS AND FIGURES FOR FARMERS AND FARM STUDENTS. By Primrose McConnell, Fellow of the Highland and Agricultural Society ; late Professor of Agricul- ture, Glasgow Veterinary College. Third Edition. Royal 32mo, full roan, gilt edges, with elastic band, 4s. *' The most complete and comprehensive Note-book for Farmers and Farm Students that we have seen. It literally teems with information, and we can cordially recommend it to all connected with agriculture."— A'^'r^/z British Agriculturist. Youatt and Burn^s Complete Grazier. THE COMPLETE GRAZIER, and FARMER'S and CATTLE- BREEDER'S ASSISTANT. A Compendium of Husbandry; especially in the departments connected with the Breeding, Rearing, Feeding, and General Management of Stock; the Management of the Dairy, &c. With Directions tor the Culture and Management of Grass Land, of Grain and Root Crops, the Arrangement of Farm Offices, the use of Implements and Machines, and on Draining, Irrigation, Warping, &c. ; and the Application and Relative Value of Manures. By William Youatt, Esq., V.S. Twelfth Edition, En- larged by Robert Scott Burn, Author of " Outlines ot Modern Fa-rming," *' Systematic Small Farming," &c. One large 8vo volume, 860 pp., with 244 Illustrations, £1 is. half-bound. The standard and text-book with the farmer and grazier." — Farmers Magazine. "A treatise which will remain a standard work on the subject as long as British agriculture endures." — Mark Lane Exp7-ess (First Notice). "The book deals with all departments of agriculture, and contains an immense amount of valuable information. It is, in fact, an encyclopcedia of agriculture put into readable form, and it is the only work equally comiprehensive brought down to present date. It is excellently printed on thick paper, and strongly bound, and deserves a place in the Hbrary of every agriculturist."— Afar>6 Lane Express (Second Notice). 36 CROSBY LOCK WOOD <^ SON'S CATALOGUE. Flour Mamtfactiire^ 3Iilling^ etc. FLOUR MANUFACTURE : A Treatise on Milling Science and Practice. By Friedrich Kick, Imperial Regierungsrath, Professor of Mechanical Technology in the Imperial German Polytechnic Institute, Prague. Translated from the Second Enlarged and Revised Edition with Supplement. By H. H. P. Powles, Assoc. Memb. Institution of Civil En- gineers. Nearly 400 pp. Illustrated Viiih 28 Folding Plates, and 167 Wood- cuts. Royal 8vo, 25s. cloth. [Just published, " This valuable work is. and will remain, the standard authority on the science of milling-. . . The miller v/ho has read and digested this work will have laid the foundation, so to speak, of a suc- cessful career ; he will have acquired a number of g^eneral principles which he can proceed to apply. In this handsome volume we at last have the accepted text-book of modern milling in good, sound English, which has little, if any, trace of the German idiom." — The Miller, " Professor Kick treats the subject so thoroughly both on its theoretical and practical sides that his work is well suited to be a text-book of technical education Sinywhere." —Scotsman. " The appearance of this celebrated work in English is verj' opportune, and British millers will, we are sure, not be slow in availing themselves of its pages." — Millers' Gazette. Small Farming. SYSTEMATIC SMALL FARMING; or, The Lessons of my Farm. Being an Introduction to Modern Farm Practice for Small Farmers in the Culture of Crops ; The Feeding of Cattle ; The Management of the Dairy, Poultry and Pigs ; The Keeping of Farm Work Records j The Ensilage System, Construction of Silos, and other Farm Buildings; The Improve- ment of Neglected Farms, &c. By Robert Scott Burn, Author of " Out- lines of Landed Estates' Management," and " Outlines of Farm Manage- ment," and Editor of " The Complete Grazier." With numerous Ulustrations, crown 8vo, 6s. cloth. "This is the completest book of its class we have seen, and one which every amateur farmer will read with pleasure and accept as a guide." — Field. "Mr. Scott Burn's pages are severely practical, and the tone of the practical man is fel* throughout. The book can only prove a treasure of aid and suggestion to the small farmer of intelligence and energy." — British Quarterly Revieiu, "The volume contains a vast amount of useful information. No branch of farming is left untouched, from the labour to be done to the result«^ achieved."— C/aj^(?w Herald. Modem Farming. OUTLINES OF MODERN FARMING. By R. Scott Burn. Soils, Manures, and Crops — Farming and Farming Economy — Cattle, Sheep, and Horses— Management of the Dairy, Pigs and Poultry — Utilisation of Town-Sewage, Irrigation, &c. Sixth Edition. In One Vol., 1,250 pp., half- bound, profusely Illustrated, 12s. " The aim of the author has been to make his work at once comprehensive and trustworthy, and in this aim he has succeeded to a degree which entitles him to much credit." — Morning' Advertiser. "Eminently calculated to enlighten the agricultural community on the varied subjects of which it treats, and hence it should find a place in every farmer's library." — City Press. " No farmer should be without this book." — Baiibicry Guardian, Agricultural Engineering. FARM ENGINEERING, THE COMPLETE TEXT -BOOK OF, Comprising Draining and Embanking ; Irrigation and Water Supply ; Farm Roads, Fences, and Gates ; Farm Buildings, their Arrangement and Con- struction, with Plans and Estimates; Barn Implements and Machines; Field Implements and Machines; Agricultural Surveying, Levelling, &c. By Prof. John Scott, Editor of the Farmers^ Gazette, late Professor of Agriculture and Rural Economy at the Royal Agricultural College, Cirencester, &c. &c. In One Vol., 1,150 pages, half-bound, with over 600 Illustrations, 12s. •* Written with great care, as well as with knowledge and ability. The author has done his •work well ; we have found him a very trustworthy guide wherever we have tested his statements. The volume will be of great value to agricultural students."— J/ark Lane Express. ' For a young agriculturist we know of no handy volume so Hkely to be more usefully studied." — Bill's IVeekly Messenger. English Agriculture. THE FIELDS OF GREAT BRITAIN : A Text-Book of Agriculture, adapted to the Syllabus of the Science and Art Department. For Elementary and Advanced Students. By Hugh Clements (Board of Trade). i8mo, 2S. 6d. cloth. "A most comprehensive volume, giving a mass of information." — Agricultural Economist. "It is a long time since we have seen a book which has pleased us more, or which contains such a vast and useful fund oi kuo\\lQdgQ."—Educatio}ial l imes. AGRICULTURE, FARMING, GARDENING, etc, 37 Farm and Estate Book-keeping. BOOK-KEEPING FOR FARMERS & ESTATE OWNERS. A Practical Treatise, presenting, in Three Plans, a System adapted to all Classes of Farms. By Johnson M. Woodman, Chartered Accountant. Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d. cloth. " Will be found of great assistance by those who intend to commence a system of book-keep- ing-, the author's examples being clear and explicit/and his explanations, while full and accurate, being to a large extent free from technicalities." — Live Stock Jourtial. Farm Account Book. WOODMAN'S YEARLY FARM ACCOUNT BOOK. Giving a Weekly Labour Account and Diary, and showing the Income and Expen- diture under each Department of Crops, Live Stock, Dairy, &c. &c. With Valuation, Profit and Loss Account, and Balance Sheet at the end of the Year, and an Appendix of Forms. Ruled and Headed for Entering a Com- plete Record of the Farming Operations. By Johnson M. Woodman, Chartered Accountant, Author of "Book-keeping for Farmers." Folio, 75. 6d. half-bound. "Contains every requisite form for keeping farm accounts readily and accurately." — Agri' culture. Early Fruits, Floivers and Vegetables. THE FORCING GARDEN ; or, How to Grow Early Fruits, Flowers, and Vegetables. With Plans, and Estimates for Building Glass- houses, Pits and Frames. Containing also Original Plans for Double Glazingj a New Method of Growing the Gooseberry under Glass, &c. &c., and on Venti- lation, Protecting Vine Borders, &c. With Illustrations. By Samuel Wood. Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d. cloth. " Mr. Wood's book is an original and exhaustive answer to the question 'How to Grow Early Fruits, Flowers and Vegetables? ' " — Land and Water, Good Gardening. A PLAIN GUIDE TO GOOD GARDENING ; or, How to Grow Vegetables, Fruits, and Flowers. With Practical Notes on Soils, Manures, Seeds, Planting, Laying-out of Gardens and Grounds, &c. By S. Wood. Third Edition, with considerable Additions, &c., and numerous Illustrations. Crown 8vo, 5s. cloth. " A very good book, and one to be highly recommended as a practical guide." — Athenaum. '* May be recommended to young gardeners, cottagers, and specially to amateurs, for the plain and trustworthy information it gives on common matters." — Gardeners' Chronicle. Gainful Gardening. MULTUM-IN-PARVO GARDENING; or, How to make One Acre of Land produce £620 a-year by the Cultivation of Fruits and Vegetables ; also, How to Grow Flowers in Three Glass Houses, so as to realise £176 per annum clear Profit. By Samuel Wood, Author of "Good Gardening,'* &c. Fourth and cheaper Edition, Revised, with Additions. Crown 8vo, is. sewed. "We are bound to recommend it as not only suited to the case of the amateur and gentleman's gardener, but to the market grower." — Gardeners' Magazine. Gardening for Ladies. THE LADIES' MULTUM-IN-PARVO FLOWER GARDEN, and Amateurs' Complete Guide, With Illustrations. By Samuel Wood, Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d. cloth. " Full of shrewd hints and useful instructions, based on a lifetime of experience." — Scotsman. Meceipts for Gardeners. GARDEN RECEIPTS. Edited by Charles W. Quin. i2mo, IS. 6d. cloth limp. "A useful and handy book, containing a good deal of valuable inforimtion."— A tkencsufn. Kitchen Gardening. THE KITCHEN A ND MA RKET GA RDEN. By Contributors to " The Garden." Compiled by C. W. Shaw, i2mo, 3s. 6d. cloth boards. " The most valuable compendium of kitchen and market-garden work published."— /^ar^r. Cottage Gardening. COTTAGE GARDENING ; or, Flowers, Fruits, and Vegetables for Small Gardens. By E. Hobday. lamo, is. 6d, cloth limp. "Contains much useful information at a small chargQ."— Glasgow Herald, 38 CROSBY LOCKWOOD &- SON'S CATALOGUE, ESTATE MANAGEMENT, AUCTIONEERING, LAW, etc. Uudson^s Land Valuer's JPocket-BooJc. THE LAND VALUER'S BEST ASSISTANT: Being Tables on a very much Improved Plan, for Calculating the Value of Estates, With Tables for reducing Scotch, Irish, and Provincial Customary Acres to Statute Measure, &c. By R. Hudson, C.E. New Edition. Royal 32mo, leather, elastic band, 4s. "This new edition includes tables for ascertaining- the value of leases for any term of years ; and for showing how to lay out plots of ground of certain acres in forms, square, round, &c., with valuable rules for ascertaining the probable worth of standing timber to any amount ; and is of incalculable value to the country gentleman and professional man." — Farjfiers' Jourtial. ElvarVs Land Improver's Tocl^et-Boolc. THE LAND IMPROVER'S POCKET-BOOK OF FORMULA, TABLES and MEMORANDA required in any Computation relating to the Permanent Improvement of Landed Property, By John Ewart, Land Surveyor and Agricultural Engineer. Second Edition, Revised, Royal 32mo, oblong, leather, gilt edges, with elastic band, 4s. " A compendious and handy little volume." — Spectator. Complete Agrieultiiral Surveyor's JPoclcet-BooJc, THE LAND VALUER'S AND LAND IMPROVER'S COM- PLETE POCKET-BOOK. Consisting of the above Two Works bound to- gether. Leather, gilt edges, with strap, 7s. ^d. " Hudson's book is the best ready-reckoner on matters relating to the valuation of land and crops, and its combination with Mr. Ewart "s work greatly enhances the value and usefulness of the latter-mentioned. ... It is most useful as a manual for reference." — North of England Farmer. Auctioneer's Assistant, THE APPRAISER, A UCTIONEER, BROKER, HOUSE AND EST A TE A GENT AND VALUER'S POCKET A SSISTA NT, for the Valua- tion for Purchase, Sale, or Renewal of Leases, Annuities and Reversions, and of property generally; with Prices for Inventories, &c. By John Wheeler, Valuer, &c. Fifth Edition, re-written and greatly extended by C. N orris, Surveyor, Valuer, &c. Royal 52mo, 5s. cloth. " A neat and concise book of reference, containing- an admirable and clearly-arranged list of prices for inventories, and a very practical g-uide to determine the value of furniture, &c." — Siandai-d. " Contains a large quantity of varied and useful information as to the valuation for purchase, sale, or renewal of leases, annuities and reversions, and of property generally, with prices for inventories, and a guide to determine the value of interior fittings and other effects." — Builder. Auctioneering. AUCTIONEERS : Their Duties and Liabilities. By Robert Squibbs, Auctioneer. Demy 8vo, los. 6d, cloth. " The position and duties of auctioneers treated compendiously and clearly." — Builder. •'Every auctioneer ought to possess a copy of this excellent work." — Ironmsjtger. " Of great value to the profession. . . . We readily welcome this book from the fact that it treats the subject m a manner somewhat new to the profession." — Estates Gazette. Legal Guide for JPaivnhrokers. THE PAWNBROKERS', FACTORS' AND MERCHANTS' GUIDE TO THE LAW OF LOANS AND PLEDGES. With the Statutes and a Digest of Cases on Rights and Liabilities, Civil and Criminal, as to Loans and Pledges of Goods, Debentures, Mercantile and other Se curities. By H. C. Folkakd, Esq., Barrister-at-Law, Author of " The Law of Slander and Libel," &c. With Additions and Corrections to 1876. Fcap. 8vo, 3s. 6d. cloth. " This work contains simply everything that requires to be known concerning the department of the law of which it treats. We can safely commend the book as unique and very nearly perfect." — Iron. The task undertaken by Mr. Folkard has been very satisfactorily performed. . . . Such ex- planations as are needful have been supplied with great clearness and with due regard to brevity. City Press, ESTATE MANAGEMENT, AUCTIONEERING, LAW, etc, 39 Hoiv to Invest, HINTS FOR INVESTORS : Being an Explanation of the Mode ot Transacting Business on the Stock Exchange. To which are added Com- ments on the Fluctuations and Table of Quarterly Average prices of Consols since 1759. Also a Copy ol the London Daily Stock and Share List. By Walter M. Playford, Sworn Broker. Crown 8vo, 2S. cloth, " An invaluable guide to investors and speculators."— ^z///z<7«ti-/. Metropolitan Hating Appeals, REPORTS OF APPEALS HEARD BEFORE THE COURT OF GENERAL ASSESSMENT SESSIONS, from the Year 1871 to 1885. By Edward Ryde and Arthur Lyon Ryde. Fourth Edition, brought down to the Present Date, with an Introduction to the Valuation (Metropolis) Act, 1869, and an Appendix by Walter C. Ryde, of the Inner Temple, Barrister- at-Law. Svo, 16s. cloth. " A useful work, occupying- a place mid-way between a handbook for a law^-er and a guide to the survej'or. It is compiled by a gentleman eminent in his profession as a land agent, ^vhose spe- cialty, it is acknowledged, lies in the direction of assessing property for rating purposes."— La?id ylg'C7tts' Record. House Property, HANDBOOK OF HOUSE PROPERTY. A Popular and Practical Guide to the Purchase, Mortgage, Tenancy, and Compulsory Sale of Houses and Lawfi, including the Law of Dilapidations and Fixtures; with Examples of all kinds of Valuations, Useful Information on Buildings, and Suggestive Elucidations of Fine Art. By E. L. Tarbuck, Architect and Surveyor. Fourth Edition, lamo, 5s. cloth. [Just published. " The advice is thoroughly practical."— Zaw journal. "This is a well-written and thoughtful work. We commend the work to the careful study of all Interested in questions affecting houses and land." — Land Agents' Record (First Notice). " Carefully brought up to date, and much improved bj^ the addition of a division on fine art. —Land Agents' Record (Second Notice). Inwood^s Estate Tables, TABLES FOR THE PURCHASING OF ESTATES, Freehold, Copyhold, or Leasehold; Annuities, Advoivsons, etc., and for the Renewing of Leases held under Cathedral Churches, Colleges, or other Corporate bodies, for Terms of Years certain, and for Lives ; also for Valuing Reversionary Estates, Deferred Annuities, Next Presentations, &c. ; together with Smart's Five Tables of Compound Interest, and an Extension of the same to Lower and Intermediate Rates. By W. Inwood. 22nd Edition, with considerable Additions, and new and valuable Tables of Logarithms for the more Difficult Computations of the Interest of Money, Discount, Annuities, &c., by M. Fedor Thoman, of the Societe Credit Mobilier of Paris. i2mo, 8s. cloth. "Those interested in the purchase and sale of estates, and in the adjustment of compensation cases, as well as in transactions in annuities, life insurances, &c,, will find the present edition of eminent service." — Engi7ieeri)tg, " ' Inwood's Tables ' still maintain a most enviable reputation. The new issue has been enriched by large additional contributions by M. Fedor Thoman, wliose carefully arranged Tables cannot fail to be of the utmost utility." — Milling Jourtial. Agriciiltiiral and Tenant-Hi ght Valuation. THE AGRICULTURAL AND TENANT-RIGHT-VALUER'S ASSISTANT. A Practical Handbook on Measuring and Estimating the Contents, Weights and Values of Agricultural Produce and Timber, the Values of Estates and Agricultural Labour, Forms of Tenant-Right-Valua- tions, Scales of Compensation under the Agricultural Holdings Act, 1883, &c. &c. By Tom Bright, Agricultural Surveyor, Author of "The Live Stock of North Devon," &c. Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d. cloth. [Just published. Full of tables and examples in connection with the valuation of tenant-right, estates, labour, contents, and weights of timber, and farm produce of all kinds. The book"is well calculated to assist the valuer in the discharge of his duty." — Agricultural Gazette. " An eminently practical handbook, full of practical tables and data of undoubted interest and value to surveyors and auctioneers in preparing valuations of all \i\vi(ls." —Faryner. " Shows at a glance the value of land, crops, and the cost of seeding, harvesting, &c. &c. It Is a really practical and useful handbook, for which we anticipate a very large salQ."— Reading Mercury. CROSBY LOCK WOOD cS- SON'S CATALOGUE. A Complete Epitome of the Laivs of this Country, EVERY MAN'S OWN LAWYER: A Handy-book of the Principles of Law and Equity. By A Barrister. Twenty-fifth Edition. Reconstructed, Thoroughly Revised, and much Enlarged. Brought down to the end of last Session, and including careful Digests o{—Coro7ters Act, 1887; Probation of First Offenders Act, 1SS7; Margarine Act, 1887; Agricultural Holdings {England) Act, 1883 ; Cottage Gardens {Compensation for Crops) Act, 1887; Bankruptcy Act, 1883; Allotments Act, 1887; Merchandise Trade Marks Act, 1887; Truck Amendment Act, 1887; Water Companies {Regulation of Powers) Act, 1887 ; Registration of Deeds of Arrangements Act, 1887. Crown 8vo, 684 pp., price 6s. (saved at every consultation I), strongly bound in cloth. [Just published. *v* THE BOOK WILL BE FOUND TO COMPRISE (AMONGST OTHER MATTER)— THE Rights and Wrongs of Individuals— Mercantile and Commercial Law —Partnerships, Contracts and agreements — Guarantees, Principals and Agents— Criminal Law— Parish Law— County Court Law— Game and Fishery Laws— Poor Men's Lawsuits— Laws of Bankruptcy— Wagers— Cheques, Bills AND Notes— Copyright— Elections and Registration— Insurance— Libel and Slander— Marriage and Divorce— Merchant Shipping— Mortgages— Settle- MENTs— Stock Exchange practice— Trade Marks and patents— Trespass— Nui- sances— Transfer of Land— Wills, &c. &c. Also Law for Landlord and Tenant —Master and Servant— Heirs— Devisees and Legatees— Husband and Wife- Executors AND Trustees— Guardian and Ward -Married women and Infants —Lender, Borrower and Sureties— Debtor and Creditor— Purchaser and Vendor— Companies— Friendly Societies— Clergymen— Churchwardens— Medi- cal Practitioners— Bankers— Farmers— Contractors— Stock Brokers— Sports- men— Gamekeepers— Farriers- Horse Dealers— Auctioneers— House Agents— Innkeepers-Bakers— Millers-pawnbrokers— Surveyors— Railways and Car- riers— Constables— Seamen— Soldiers, &C. &.C. The following subjects may be mentioned as some of those which have re' ceived special' attention during the present revision: — Marriage of British Subjects Abroad; Police Constables; Pawnbrokers; Intoxicating Liquors Licensing; Domestic Servants ; Landlord and Tenant ; Vendors and Purchasers ; Parlia- mentary Elections ; Municipal Elections ; Local Elections ; Corrupt Practices at all Elections ; Public Health and Local Government and Nuisances ; Highways ; Churchwardens ; Vestry Meetings ; Rates. ^ It is believed that the extensions and amplifications of the present edition, while intended to meet the requirements of the ordinary Englishman, will also have the effect of rendering the book useful to the legal practitioner in the country. One result of the reconstruction and revision, with the extensive additions thereby necessitated, has been the enlargement of the book by nearly a hundred and fifty pages, while the price remains as before. Opinions of the Press. "It is a complete code of English Law, written in plain languag-e, which all can understand. .... Should be in the hands of every business man, and all who wish to abolish lawyers bills."— U^€ekly TtJnes. "A useful and concise epitome of the law, compiled with considerable care." — Laiv Magazine. " A concLse, cheap and complete epitome of the English law. So plainly written that he who runs may read, and he who reads may understand." — Figaro. " A dictionary of legal facts well put together. The book is a very useful on^'^ ~ Spectator. " A work which has long been wanted, which is thoroughly well done, and which we most cordially recommend." Su7iday Times. Private Bill Legislation and Provisional Orders. HANDBOOK FOR THE USE OF SOLICITORS AND EN- GINEERS Engaged in Promoting Private Acts of Parliament and Provi- sional Orders, for the Authorization of Railways, Tramways, Works for the Supply of Gas and Water, and other undertakings of a like character. By L. Livingston Macassey, of the Middle Temple, Barrister-at-Law, and Member of the Institution of Civil Engineers; Author of " Hints on Water Supply.'' Demy 8vo, 950 pp., price 25s. cloth. IJitst published. " The volume is a desideratum on a subject which can be only acquired by practical experi- ence, and the order of procedure in Private Bill Legislation and Provisional Orders is followed. The author's suggestions and notes will be found of great value to engineers and others profession- ally engaged in this class of practice." — Buitding Neius. " The author's double experience as an engineer and barrister has eminently qualified him for the task, and enabled him to approach the subject alike from an engineering and legal point of view. The volume will be found a great help both to engineers and lawyers engaged in promoting Private Acts of Parliament and Provisional Orders." — Local Government Chronicle. J. OGDEN AND CO. LIMITED, PRINTERS, GREAT SAFFRON HILL, E.C. A SELECTION FROM WE ALE'S SERIES. INDUSTRIAL AIMD USEFUL ARTS. CLOCKS AND WATCHES, AND BELLS, a Rudi- mentary Treatise on. By Sir Edmund Beckett, Bart., Q.O. ^Oj^ Seventh Edition. 4s. 6d. ; cloth boards, 5s. 6d. f^o. "The best work on the subject probably extant. The treatise on bells is ^J^^ undoubtedly the best in the language." — Engineering. THE GOLDSMITH'S HANDBOOK, containing full Instructions for the Alloying and Working of Golo. By -^^ot George E. Gee. Second Edition, enlarged. 3s. ; cl. bds.,. 3s. 6d. x^c^ " A good, sound, technical educator." — Eorological Journal. *' A standard book, which few will care to be without." — JewtUer, C THE SILVERSMITH'S HANDBOOK, containing full Instructions for the Alloying and Working of Silver. By George E. Gee. With Illustrations. 3s. ; cloth boards, 3s. 6d. j^^^ " As a guide to workmen and apprentices it will prove a good technical C\ educator, while manufacturers and dealers may learn much from its pages." — 3v Glasgow Herald. ov THE HALL-MARKING OF JEWELLERY PRAC- TIC ALLY CONSIDERED, By G. E. Gee. 3s. ; cl. bds, 3s. 6d. J^)^ " Deals thoroughly with its subject from a manufacturer's and dealer's point "^i, ^ of yiew.*^— Jeweller. ov COACH-BUILDING: A Practical Treatise, Historical and Descriptive. By James W. Burgess. With 57 Illustra- tions. 2s. 6d. ; cloth boards, 3s. ^ktM "From this book the intelligent and inquiring apprentice may get a tho- ^2£^ rough insight into tho mysteries of coach-building."— Carpenter and Builder. -J-^ ^ PRACTICAL ORG-AN-BUILDma. By W. E. Dick- rate size. We can cordially recommend the book to those interested in organ ^^is^ |tc construction."— ^n^ZtsA JfecAamc. "r"^^ THE BRASS FOUNDER'S MANUAL: Instructions for Modelling, Pattern Making, Moulding, Turning, &c. By W. Graham. 2s. ; cloth, boards, 2s. 6d. CONSTRUCTION OF DOOR LOCKS. From the Papers of A. C. Hobbs. Edited by Charles Tomlinson, F.E.S. 5^ With a Note upon Iron Safes by Egbert Mallet. 2s. 6d. 11: BRICKS AND TILES, Rudimentary Treatise on the Manufacture of; containing an Outline of the Principles of S.;^^ Brickmaking. By E. Dobson, M.R.I.B.A. Additions by C. S^c-^ Tomlinson, F.R.S. 3s. ; cloth boards, 3s. 6d. i^c5 " The best handbook on the subject. We can safely recommend it as a ^od investment."— .BuiWer. T^X THE ART OF LETTER FAINTING MADE EASY. ^JC" By James Greig Badenoch. With 12 full-page engravings. Is. i^c5 " The system is a simple one, but quite original, and well worth the careful JQ?^ j^Sc? attention of letter-painters."— .ButWin^ News. C "^j^ CROSBY LOCKWOOD & SON, 7, STATIONEES' HALL COUET,E.C. BY THE SAME AUTHOR, UNIFORM WITH THE PRESENT VOLUME. Second Editiotty considerably enlarged, price 1$, 6d. cloth, or IS, limp, THE GOLDSMITH'S HANDBOOK, CONTAINING FULL INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ALLOYING AND WORKING OF GOLD. Including the Art of Alloying, Melting, Reducing, Colouring, Collecting, and Refining ; The Pro- cesses of Manipulation, Recovery of Waste ; Che- mical and Physical Properties of Gold ; with a New System of Mixing its Alloys, Solders, Enamels, and other Useful Rules and Recipes. Recently published, price is, 6d. cloth, or ^s, limp. :the:: HALL-MARKING OF JEWELLERY, PRACTICALLY CONSIDERED. Comprising an Account of all the different Assay Towns of the United Kingdom, with the Stamps at present employed ; also the Laws relating to the Standards and Hall Marks at the various Assay Offices ; and a variety of Practical Sugges- tions concerning the Mixing of Standard Alloys, and other Useful Information, CROSBY LOCKWOOD & CO., 7, Stationers* Hall Court, Ludgate Hill, E.C. A SELECTION FROM WE ALE'S SERIES. ^S6S WIIIMING, METALLURGY, &c. ^-^'f? METALLURGY OF IRON. Containing the History of Iron Manufacture, Methods of Assay, and Analyses of Iron [^^^^ J Ores, Processes of Manufacture of Iron and Steel, &c. By H. ^..S^'bi Bauerman, E.G.S. Fifth Edition, revised. 5s. ; cl. bds., 6s. 6d. )^^'^t COAL AND COAL MINING. By Warington W. '^T^c!? Smyth, M.A., F.R.S., &c., Chief Inspector of the Mines of the ^C'c Crown. Sixth Edition, revised. 3s. 6d. ; cloth boards, 4s. ^-^IaS: subterraneous surveying, Elementary and p^^!3^ Practical Treatise on, with and without the Magnetic Needle. By Thomas Fenwick, Surveyor of Mines, and Thomas Baker, Ik Illustrated. 2s. 6d. ; cloth boards, 3s. ^-A^«t^ THE MINERAL SURVEYOR AND VALUERS C03IFLETE GUIDE. With new Traverse Tables, and De- ^ V^V^ scriptions of Improved Instruments, Laying-out and Valuing ' ^^c^ Home and Foreign Iron and Coal Mineral Properties. By W. LiNTERN. 3s. 6d. ; cloth boards, 4s. '^■^ MAGNETIC SURVEYING AND ANGULAR SUR- . pRflNKLiN Institute Library I FHILilDELFHId ^ Class I Book G\ 2. 1 Accession^.^ T 0 j vSp^^-O xtecent rrocesses. 3s.; ciotn Doaras, 6s. ba. ^ ^i^'fcf " From this book both amateur and artisan may learn everything neces- r»^:^^